JP2005073732A5 - - Google Patents

Download PDF

Info

Publication number
JP2005073732A5
JP2005073732A5 JP2003304357A JP2003304357A JP2005073732A5 JP 2005073732 A5 JP2005073732 A5 JP 2005073732A5 JP 2003304357 A JP2003304357 A JP 2003304357A JP 2003304357 A JP2003304357 A JP 2003304357A JP 2005073732 A5 JP2005073732 A5 JP 2005073732A5
Authority
JP
Japan
Prior art keywords
symbol
display
area
game
reach
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Granted
Application number
JP2003304357A
Other languages
Japanese (ja)
Other versions
JP2005073732A (en
JP4461742B2 (en
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed filed Critical
Priority to JP2003304357A priority Critical patent/JP4461742B2/en
Priority claimed from JP2003304357A external-priority patent/JP4461742B2/en
Publication of JP2005073732A publication Critical patent/JP2005073732A/en
Publication of JP2005073732A5 publication Critical patent/JP2005073732A5/ja
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of JP4461742B2 publication Critical patent/JP4461742B2/en
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Expired - Fee Related legal-status Critical Current

Links

Description

遊技機Game machine

本発明は、遊技機に関するものである。   The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

䟋えばパチンコ遊技機やスロットマシン等の遊技機においおは、衚瀺画面に耇数の図柄を倉動衚瀺する図柄衚瀺装眮を備えるものがあり、遊技者に有利な特別遊技状態倧圓たり状態の発生時には、衚瀺画面に予め蚭定されおいる有効ラむン䞊で確定衚瀺された図柄が特定の図柄の組み合わせずされる。そしお、特別遊技状態の発生に䌎い倧入賞口が開攟したり、ビッグボヌナスゲヌムに突入したりするようになっおいる。   For example, some game machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines are equipped with a symbol display device that displays a plurality of symbols in a variable manner on the display screen. When a special gaming state (a big hit state) advantageous to the player occurs, it is displayed. A symbol that is fixedly displayed on an active line set in advance on the screen is a combination of specific symbols. Then, with the occurrence of a special gaming state, the big prize opening is opened or a big bonus game is entered.

かかる遊技機においおは、特別遊技状態ずなる際の特定の図柄衚瀺の前段階ずしお、衚瀺画面䞊でいわゆるリヌチ衚瀺が行われる。䞀䟋ずしお、぀の図柄列がセットずなっお倉動衚瀺されるずずもに各図柄列の図柄が順次停止される図柄衚瀺装眮では、倉動開始埌、先぀の図柄列の図柄が䞀旊停止した際にそれらが有効ラむン䞊で同䞀図柄ずなるこずによりリヌチ衚瀺が行われる。そしお、リヌチ衚瀺がなされた埌に皮々のリヌチ挔出が適宜行われ、特別遊技状態の発生時には、最終の図柄䟋えば぀目の図柄が曎に同䞀図柄で停止衚瀺される䟋えば特蚱文献。
特開−号公報
In such gaming machines, so-called reach display is performed on the display screen as a pre-stage of specific symbol display when entering the special gaming state. As an example, in the symbol display device in which three symbol sequences are variably displayed as one set and the symbols of each symbol sequence are sequentially stopped, when the symbols of the two symbol sequences are temporarily stopped after the variation starts. Reach is displayed when they become the same symbol on the active line. Then, various reach effects are appropriately performed after the reach display is made, and when the special gaming state occurs, the final symbol (for example, the third symbol) is further stopped and displayed with the same symbol (for example, Patent Document 1). .
JP 2000-271292 A

本発明は、絵柄衚瀺手段に加えお可動郚材を備えおいるにもかかわらず、ノむズ等による絵柄衚瀺手段ぞの圱響を抑制し埗る遊技機を提䟛するこずを目的ずするものである。 An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing the influence of noise or the like on the picture display means despite having a movable member in addition to the picture display means .

本発明は、遊技の進行を統括管理する䞻制埡手段ず、  The present invention comprises a main control means for managing the progress of the game,
衚瀺画面に絵柄が倉動衚瀺される絵柄衚瀺手段ず、  A pattern display means for displaying the pattern in a variable manner on the display screen;
前蚘絵柄衚瀺手段の衚瀺画面における絵柄の衚瀺態様を制埡する衚瀺制埡手段ず、  Display control means for controlling the display mode of the picture on the display screen of the picture display means;
前蚘衚瀺画面の前面偎に配眮され、動䜜可胜に蚭けられる可動郚材ず、  A movable member disposed on the front side of the display screen and provided to be operable;
前蚘可動郚材の動䜜を制埡する可動制埡手段ず、  Movable control means for controlling the operation of the movable member;
を備えた遊技機であっお、A gaming machine equipped with
前蚘衚瀺制埡手段及び前蚘可動制埡手段を、前蚘䞻制埡手段に盎列に接続される構成ずする䞀方、前蚘衚瀺制埡手段及び前蚘可動制埡手段に察しお各々独立しお電力䟛絊手段から電力が䟛絊される構成ずし、  The display control unit and the movable control unit are connected in series to the main control unit, while power is supplied from the power supply unit to the display control unit and the movable control unit independently. And
前蚘衚瀺制埡手段は、前蚘可動郚材の動䜜に察応させお前蚘絵柄衚瀺手段における衚瀺画面の衚瀺態様を制埡するものであり、  The display control means controls the display mode of the display screen in the picture display means in correspondence with the operation of the movable member,
前蚘可動郚材は、圓該可動郚材の䞋端を䞊昇させる回動動䜜が可胜な軞郚を有し、  The movable member has a shaft portion capable of rotating to raise the lower end of the movable member,
前蚘可動制埡手段は、前蚘可動郚材の䞋端を䞊昇させる制埡を実行可胜であるこずを特城ずする。  The movable control means can execute control for raising the lower end of the movable member.

本発明によれば、絵柄衚瀺手段に加えお可動郚材を備えおいるにもかかわらず、ノむズ等による絵柄衚瀺手段ぞの圱響を抑制し埗る。  According to the present invention, in spite of having a movable member in addition to the picture display means, the influence on the picture display means due to noise or the like can be suppressed.

はじめに、本実斜の圢態から抜出され埗る発明矀を手段 ずしお区分しお瀺し、それらを必芁に応じお効果等を瀺し぀぀説明する。なお以䞋においおは、理解の容易のため、本実斜の圢態においお察応する構成を括匧曞き等で適宜瀺すが、この括匧曞き等で瀺した具䜓的構成に限定されるものではない。  First, invention groups that can be extracted from the present embodiment are shown as means n (n = 1, 2, 3,...), And will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configuration in the present embodiment is appropriately shown in parentheses, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses.

手段衚瀺画面衚瀺画面䞊の絵柄列図柄列〜においお予め定めた配列で絵柄を倉動衚瀺する絵柄衚瀺装眮第図柄衚瀺装眮ず、絵柄の倉動及び停止を制埡する䞀方、遊技者に有利な特別遊技状態ずなる際の特定衚瀺態様の前段階ずしお埅機絵柄を停止衚瀺するずずもに、該埅機絵柄の衚瀺埌に所定の埅機状態倉動挔出を行う衚瀺制埡手段衚瀺制埡装眮ずを備えた遊技機においお、  Means 1. A pattern display device (first symbol display device 41) that displays a pattern in a predetermined arrangement in a pattern row (symbol rows Z1 to Z3) on a display screen (display screen G), and controls variation and stoppage of the pattern. On the other hand, a display control means (display control device) that stops and displays the standby picture as a pre-stage of the specific display mode when the special gaming state advantageous to the player is performed, and performs a predetermined standby state variation effect after the standby picture is displayed 214),
前蚘衚瀺画面䞊の絵柄列で前蚘配列通りの絵柄ず同配列に反する絵柄ずを混圚させお停止衚瀺するずずもに、それら停止絵柄により前蚘埅機絵柄を成立させる配列倉曎制埡手段衚瀺制埡装眮を備えたこずを特城ずする遊技機。  An array change control means (display control device 214) for stopping and displaying the pattern according to the arrangement and the pattern contrary to the arrangement in the pattern row on the display screen, and establishing the standby pattern by the stop pattern. A gaming machine characterized by having it.

手段の遊技機では、衚瀺制埡手段によっお、絵柄の倉動及び停止が制埡される䞀方、遊技者に有利な特別遊技状態ずなる際の特定衚瀺態様の前段階ずしお埅機絵柄が停止衚瀺され、該埅機絵柄の衚瀺埌に所定の埅機状態倉動挔出が行われる。たた、配列倉曎制埡手段によっお、前蚘衚瀺画面䞊の絵柄列で、予め定めた配列通りの絵柄ず同配列に反する絵柄ずが混圚させお停止衚瀺され、それら停止絵柄により前蚘埅機絵柄が成立するようにもなっおいる。本構成によれば、配列通りの絵柄ず同配列に反する絵柄ずが混圚しおいるため、遊技者にずっお予枬倖の埅機絵柄衚瀺を行うこずができる。この堎合、埅機絵柄衚瀺が画䞀的なものではなくなる。埓っお、倚様な絵柄衚瀺を可胜ずし、ひいおは遊技の興趣を高めるこずができる。  In the gaming machine of means 1, the display control means controls the change and stop of the picture, while the standby picture is stopped and displayed as a pre-stage of the specific display mode when the special gaming state is advantageous to the player, A predetermined standby state variation effect is performed after the display of the standby pattern. Further, the arrangement change control means stops and displays a predetermined array of patterns and a pattern contrary to the same arrangement in the pattern sequence on the display screen, and the standby pattern is established by the stop patterns. It is also. According to this configuration, since the pattern according to the arrangement and the pattern contrary to the arrangement are mixed, it is possible to perform the standby picture display that is unexpected to the player. In this case, the standby picture display is not uniform. Therefore, it is possible to display a variety of patterns, and thus enhance the interest of the game.

ここで、「埅機絵柄」はいわゆるリヌチ衚瀺絵柄に盞圓し、䟋えば、぀の絵柄列が倉動衚瀺される絵柄衚瀺装眮では、前぀の絵柄が同䞀絵柄で停止した段階、すなわち最終停止図柄の停止前にリヌチ衚瀺絵柄が衚瀺されるこずずなる。「埅機状態倉動挔出」はリヌチ挔出に盞圓し、埅機絵柄の成立埌、特別遊技状態に察応する特定衚瀺態様に近づくよう行われる衚瀺挔出のこずである。衚瀺画面䞊に蚭定される絵柄列ずしおは、䟋えば絵柄が瞊方向䞊䞋方向に倉動衚瀺されるもの、絵柄が暪方向巊右方向に倉動衚瀺されるもの等であればよい。たた、絵柄の「停止」には、完党なる静止状態ずなる堎合だけでなく现かく揺れ動く堎合も含み、絵柄倉動が停止したずみなされる状態を広矩に意味する。  Here, the “standby pattern” corresponds to a so-called reach display pattern. For example, in a pattern display device in which three pattern rows are displayed in a variable manner, the stage where the previous two patterns stop at the same pattern, that is, the stop of the final stop pattern. The reach display pattern will be displayed before. The “standby state variation effect” corresponds to a reach effect, and is a display effect that is performed so as to approach the specific display mode corresponding to the special game state after the standby picture is established. The pattern sequence set on the display screen may be, for example, a pattern in which the pattern is variably displayed in the vertical direction (up and down direction) or a pattern in which the pattern is variably displayed in the horizontal direction (left and right direction). Also, the “stop” of the pattern broadly means a state in which the variation of the pattern is considered to be stopped, including not only a completely stationary state but also a case where the pattern fluctuates.

手段手段においお、前蚘衚瀺画面には、前蚘配列通りに䞊ぶ絵柄ずしお少なくずも぀の絵柄を停止衚瀺させる構成ずしたこずを特城ずする遊技機。  Mean 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the display screen is configured to stop and display at least two patterns as the patterns arranged in the arrangement.

手段によれば、配列通りに䞊ぶ絵柄ずしお少なくずも぀の絵柄が停止衚瀺されるため、これを基準にそれ以倖の絵柄を芋るこずで、配列に反する絵柄が存圚するこずをより明確に遊技者に認識させるこずが可胜ずなる。これにより、前蚘の通り画䞀的ではない遊技挔出を行うこずができるようになる。  According to the means 2, since at least two patterns are stopped and displayed as the patterns arranged in accordance with the arrangement, the player can clearly see that there is a pattern contrary to the arrangement by viewing the other patterns on the basis of this. Can be recognized. Thereby, it becomes possible to perform a game effect that is not uniform as described above.

手段手段又は手段においお、前蚘配列倉曎制埡手段は、前蚘衚瀺画面䞊で前蚘配列通りの絵柄を䞀旊停止衚瀺した埌、時間差を持たせお前蚘配列に反する絵柄を衚瀺しお埅機絵柄を成立させるこずを特城ずする遊技機。  Means 3. In the means 1 or 2, the arrangement change control means temporarily stops and displays the pattern according to the arrangement on the display screen, and then displays a picture contrary to the arrangement with a time difference to establish a standby picture. A gaming machine characterized by that.

手段によれば、配列通りの絵柄が䞀旊停止衚瀺された埌、時間差を持たせお配列に反する絵柄が衚瀺されお埅機絵柄が成立するので、特段倉わりない衚瀺が䞀旊行われた埌、むレギュラヌな埅機絵柄衚瀺ぞず移行する。時間差を持たせお衚瀺圢態を倉えるこずにより、遊技者の泚意を匕くような挔出が可胜ずなる。この堎合、遊技者は、次にどのように発展するのかず期埅を持ち぀぀、䞀連の挔出を興味深く芋るこずができるようになる。  According to the means 3, after the pattern according to the arrangement is temporarily stopped and displayed, the pattern contrary to the arrangement is displayed with a time difference and the standby pattern is established. Transition to regular standby picture display. By changing the display form with a time difference, it is possible to produce an effect that draws the player's attention. In this case, the player can see the series of effects with interest while expecting how to develop next.

手段手段又は手段においお、前蚘配列倉曎制埡手段は、前蚘衚瀺画面䞊で前蚘配列通りの絵柄により埅機絵柄を䞀旊衚瀺した埌、時間差を持たせお前蚘配列に反する絵柄により曎に埅機絵柄を远加衚瀺するこずを特城ずする遊技機。  Means 4. In the means 1 or 2, the arrangement change control means displays the standby picture once with the picture according to the arrangement on the display screen, and then additionally displays the standby picture with a picture contrary to the arrangement with a time difference. A gaming machine characterized by that.

手段によれば、配列通りの絵柄により埅機絵柄が䞀旊衚瀺された埌、時間差を持たせお、配列に反する絵柄により曎に埅機絵柄が远加衚瀺されるので、遊技者は、既に発生しおいる埅機絵柄衚瀺に加え、曎に別の埅機絵柄衚瀺が珟れるこずの期埅を抱くこずができる。時間差を持たせお衚瀺圢態を倉えるこずにより、遊技者の泚意を匕くような挔出が可胜ずなる。埓っお、遊技者は、次にどのように発展するのかず期埅を持ち぀぀、䞀連の挔出を興味深く芋るこずができるようになる。  According to the means 4, after the standby picture is once displayed by the picture according to the arrangement, the standby picture is additionally displayed by the picture contrary to the arrangement with a time difference, so that the player has already occurred. In addition to the standby picture display, another standby picture display can be expected to appear. By changing the display form with a time difference, it is possible to produce an effect that draws the player's attention. Accordingly, the player can see the series of effects with interest while expecting how to develop next.

手段手段乃至手段のいずれかにおいお、前蚘衚瀺画面には絵柄を倉動衚瀺する絵柄倉動領域䞻衚瀺領域ず、該絵柄倉動領域に隣接しお蚭けられる付加領域副衚瀺領域ずが蚭定されおおり、前蚘配列倉曎制埡手段は、前蚘付加領域に前蚘配列に反する絵柄を停止衚瀺するこずを特城ずする遊技機。  Means 5. In any one of the means 1 to 4, the design variation area (main display area Rm) for variably displaying the pattern on the display screen, and an additional area (sub display area Rs) provided adjacent to the pattern variation area, Is set, and the arrangement change control means stops and displays a picture contrary to the arrangement in the additional area.

手段によれば、配列に反する絵柄を、付加領域を甚いお停止衚瀺する構成ずしたため、本来絵柄が衚瀺される絵柄倉動領域に加え、その倖偎領域でも絵柄が衚瀺され、衚瀺画面䞊で衚瀺される絵柄数を増やすこずができる。故に、配列通りの絵柄ず配列に反する絵柄ずを混圚させお停止衚瀺するずいった衚瀺態様を奜適に実珟できる。たた、衚瀺される絵柄数が増えるため、特別遊技状態ぞの期埅感も高められる。曎に、付加領域を甚いるこずで、衚瀺画面䞊に衚瀺される絵柄数が増えおも必ずしも各絵柄の瞮小化が匷いられるこずはなく、圓該絵柄の芖認性が維持できる。なお、前蚘付加領域は、埅機絵柄の衚瀺又は特別遊技状態の発生を予芋するこずができるような予告衚瀺を行ったり、絵柄倉動領域での倉動絵柄ずは異なる絵柄等により衚瀺挔出を行ったりする領域であればよい。  According to the means 5, since the design contrary to the arrangement is stopped and displayed using the additional area, the design is displayed in the outer area in addition to the design variation area where the design is originally displayed, and is displayed on the display screen. You can increase the number of pictures to be played. Therefore, it is possible to suitably realize a display mode in which a pattern according to the arrangement and a pattern contrary to the arrangement are mixed and stopped. In addition, since the number of pictures to be displayed increases, a sense of expectation for the special gaming state can be enhanced. Furthermore, by using the additional area, even if the number of pictures displayed on the display screen increases, the reduction of each picture is not necessarily forced, and the visibility of the picture can be maintained. In addition, the additional area displays a standby picture or a notice display that allows foreseeing the occurrence of a special gaming state, or performs a display effect with a picture that is different from the changing picture in the picture changing area. Any area may be used.

手段手段においお、前蚘付加領域に前蚘配列に反する絵柄を停止衚瀺するのに䌎い、前蚘絵柄倉動領域に付加領域を統合する衚瀺領域統合手段衚瀺制埡装眮を曎に備えたこずを特城ずする遊技機。  Means 6. The means 5 further comprises display area integration means (display control device 214) for integrating the additional area into the pattern variation area in accordance with the stop display of the pattern contrary to the arrangement in the additional area. Gaming machine.

手段によれば、絵柄倉動領域に付加領域が統合されるこずで絵柄倉動領域が拡匵されるこずずなり、広領域での埅機状態倉動挔出が可胜ずなる。故に、ダむナミックな挔出が実珟できる。  According to the means 6, the design variation area is expanded by integrating the additional region with the design variation region, and a standby state variation effect in a wide region is possible. Therefore, dynamic production can be realized.

手段手段乃至手段のいずれかにおいお、衚瀺画面䞊の䞀郚を隠すようにしお蚭けられた隠蔜郚材扉䜓ず、この隠蔜郚材を制埡する隠蔜郚材制埡手段音声ランプ制埡装眮ずを備え、前蚘隠蔜郚材制埡手段によっお隠蔜郚材が制埡されおその背埌の隠蔜領域が開攟されるのに䌎い、前蚘配列倉曎制埡手段が、前蚘隠蔜領域に前蚘配列に反する絵柄を衚瀺するこずを特城ずする遊技機。  Mean 7 In any one of the means 1 to 4, a concealing member (door bodies 171 and 172) provided so as to conceal part of the display screen, and concealing member control means (audio lamp control device) for controlling the concealing member 272), and when the concealing member is controlled by the concealing member control means and the concealment area behind it is opened, the arrangement change control means displays a picture contrary to the arrangement in the concealment area. A gaming machine characterized by that.

手段によれば、隠蔜郚材が制埡されおその背埌の隠蔜領域が開攟されるのに䌎い、隠蔜領域に前蚘配列に反する絵柄を衚瀺する構成ずしたため、本来絵柄が衚瀺される非隠蔜領域隠蔜郚材により隠蔜されない領域に加え、その前蚘隠蔜領域でも絵柄が衚瀺され、衚瀺画面䞊で衚瀺される絵柄数を増やすこずができる。故に、配列通りの絵柄ず配列に反する絵柄ずを混圚させお停止衚瀺するずいった衚瀺態様を奜適に実珟できる。たた、衚瀺される絵柄数が増えるため、特別遊技状態ぞの期埅感も高められる。曎に、隠蔜領域を甚いるこずで、衚瀺画面䞊に衚瀺される絵柄数が増えおも必ずしも各絵柄の瞮小化が匷いられるこずはなく、圓該絵柄の芖認性が維持できる。  According to the means 7, as the concealing member is controlled to open the concealment area behind it, the design is displayed in the concealment area so that the pattern contrary to the arrangement is displayed. In addition to the area that is not concealed by the concealing member, the pattern is also displayed in the concealed area, and the number of patterns displayed on the display screen can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to suitably realize a display mode in which a pattern according to the arrangement and a pattern contrary to the arrangement are mixed and stopped. In addition, since the number of pictures to be displayed increases, a sense of expectation for the special gaming state can be enhanced. Furthermore, by using the concealment area, even if the number of pictures displayed on the display screen increases, the reduction of each picture is not necessarily forced, and the visibility of the picture can be maintained.

手段手段においお、前蚘衚瀺画面内に衚瀺される絵柄列数に関連づけおその盞圓数の隠蔜郚材が蚭けられおいるこずを特城ずする遊技機。  Means 8. A gaming machine according to claim 7, wherein a considerable number of concealing members are provided in association with the number of picture sequences displayed in the display screen.

手段によれば、絵柄列数に関連した盞圓数分の隠蔜郚材が蚭けられるこずから、芋え隠れする絵柄に぀いお倚皮倚圩な挔出が可胜ずなる。故に、遊技の面癜みを向䞊するこずができる。  According to the means 8, since a considerable number of concealment members related to the number of pattern rows are provided, a wide variety of effects can be provided for the patterns that are visible and hidden. Therefore, the fun of the game can be improved.

手段手段又は手段においお、前蚘衚瀺画面には絵柄を倉動衚瀺する絵柄倉動領域䞻衚瀺領域ず、該絵柄倉動領域に隣接しお蚭けられる付加領域副衚瀺領域ずが蚭定されおおり、前蚘隠蔜郚材は、前蚘付加領域の少なくずも䞀郚を隠すものであるこずを特城ずする遊技機。  Means 9. In the means 7 or 8, a picture change area (main display area Rm) for changing and displaying a picture and an additional area (sub display area Rs) provided adjacent to the picture change area are set on the display screen. And the concealing member conceals at least a part of the additional area.

手段によれば、隠蔜郚材は、前蚘付加領域の少なくずも䞀郚を隠すものずしお構成されおいるため、配列に反する絵柄を付加領域に衚瀺する堎合に、圓該絵柄を隠蔜郚材により隠しおおくこずができる。故に、絵柄衚瀺を倚様化する䞊で、曎なる倚様化が可胜ずなる。  According to the means 9, since the concealing member is configured to conceal at least a part of the additional region, when displaying a pattern contrary to the arrangement in the additional region, the concealing member is concealed by the concealing member. Can do. Therefore, further diversification is possible in diversifying the pattern display.

手段手段においお、前蚘隠蔜郚材が制埡されおその背埌の隠蔜領域が開攟されるのに䌎い、前蚘隠蔜郚材に隠蔜されおいた前蚘付加領域を前蚘絵柄倉動領域に統合する衚瀺領域統合手段衚瀺制埡装眮を曎に備えたこずを特城ずする遊技機。  Means 10. Means 9: Display area integration means (display control) that integrates the additional area concealed by the concealment member into the design variation area as the concealment member is controlled to open the concealment area behind it. A gaming machine further comprising a device 214).

手段によれば、隠蔜郚材に隠蔜されおいた付加領域が絵柄倉動領域に統合されるこずで、絵柄倉動領域が拡匵されるこずずなり、広領域での埅機状態倉動挔出が可胜ずなる。故に、ダむナミックな挔出が実珟できる。たたこの堎合、衚瀺画面䞊に衚瀺される絵柄数が増えおも必ずしも各絵柄の瞮小化が匷いられるこずはなく、圓該絵柄の芖認性が維持できる。  According to the means 10, since the additional area concealed by the concealing member is integrated into the pattern variation area, the pattern variation area is expanded, and a standby state variation effect in a wide area is possible. Therefore, dynamic production can be realized. In this case, even if the number of pictures displayed on the display screen increases, the reduction of each picture is not necessarily forced, and the visibility of the picture can be maintained.

手段手段のいずれかにおいお、前蚘絵柄倉動領域内に耇数の絵柄が䞊ぶ有効ラむン有効ラむン〜が蚭定される遊技機であっお、前蚘付加領域に絵柄衚瀺するこずに䌎い前蚘有効ラむンを増蚭し、該有効ラむン䞊に埅機絵柄を远加衚瀺する有効ラむン増蚭手段衚瀺制埡装眮を曎に備えたこずを特城ずする遊技機。  Means 11. In any one of means 5, 6, 9, and 10, a gaming machine in which an effective line (effective lines L1 to L5) in which a plurality of patterns are arranged in the pattern changing area is set, and the pattern is displayed in the additional area. Accordingly, a gaming machine further comprising effective line expansion means (display control device 214) for expanding the effective line and additionally displaying a standby picture on the effective line.

手段によれば、付加領域に絵柄衚瀺するこずに䌎い前蚘有効ラむンが増蚭され、該有効ラむン䞊に埅機絵柄が远加衚瀺されるため、特別遊技状態ぞの期埅感を高めるこずができる。  According to the means 11, since the active line is added along with the picture display in the additional area and the standby picture is additionally displayed on the active line, the expectation for the special gaming state can be enhanced.

手段手段乃至手段のいずれかにおいお、前蚘配列倉曎制埡手段は、同䞀の絵柄列の途䞭で前蚘配列を逆転させお絵柄を衚瀺するこずを特城ずする遊技機。  Means 12. In any one of the means 1 to 11, the arrangement change control means displays a picture by reversing the arrangement in the middle of the same picture row.

手段によれば、絵柄の配列が逆転しお衚瀺されるこずにより、同じ絵柄を亀互に出珟させるこずが可胜ずなる。これによっお埅機絵柄が成立しやすくなる、又は同埅機絵柄が繰り返し発生する等の芋た目䞊の面癜みが増し、遊技の興趣が高められる。たた、芋た目䞊の期埅床も高められる。  According to the means 12, the same pattern can appear alternately by displaying the pattern arrangement reversed. As a result, it becomes easier to establish a standby picture or the appearance of the standby picture is repeatedly generated, and the fun of the game is enhanced. It also increases the degree of visual expectation.

手段手段乃至手段のいずれかにおいお、前蚘配列倉曎制埡手段は、同䞀の絵柄列の途䞭で同じ絵柄を連続しお衚瀺するこずを特城ずする遊技機。  Means 13. In any one of the means 1 to 11, the arrangement change control means displays the same picture continuously in the middle of the same picture row.

手段によれば、同じ絵柄が連続しお衚瀺されるこずにより、埅機絵柄が成立しやすくなる、又は同埅機絵柄が繰り返し発生する等の芋た目䞊の面癜みが増し、遊技の興趣が高められる。たた、芋た目䞊の期埅床も高められる。なお、ここで蚀う絵柄は埅機絵柄成立の察象ずなる絵柄であり、䟋えば、埅機絵柄察象の絵柄䞻図柄ず非察象の絵柄副図柄ずが亀互に衚瀺される堎合、前者のみを指す。  According to the means 13, the same picture is continuously displayed, so that it becomes easy to establish the standby picture or the appearance of the standby picture repeatedly occurs, and the interest of the game is enhanced. It also increases the degree of visual expectation. In addition, the pattern said here is the pattern that is the target of the standby pattern establishment. For example, when the pattern of the standby pattern target (main pattern) and the non-target pattern (sub-pattern) are displayed alternately, only the former is displayed. Point to.

手段手段乃至手段のいずれかにおいお、前蚘衚瀺画面䞊に䞉列に䞊ぶ絵柄列を蚭け、この絵柄列のうち、䞡偎の絵柄列の絵柄を䞀方は昇順、他方は降順に倉動させるずずもに、該䞡偎の絵柄を先に停止させおその停止絵柄が同䞀ずなるこずで埅機絵柄を成立させるようにしたこずを特城ずする遊技機。  Means 14. In any one of the means 1 to 11, a pattern row arranged in three rows is provided on the display screen, and one of the pattern rows on both sides of the pattern row is changed in ascending order and the other is changed in descending order. A gaming machine characterized in that a standby pattern is established by stopping the patterns on both sides first and making the stopped patterns the same.

衚瀺画面䞊に蚭定された䞉列の絵柄列のうち、䞡偎の絵柄列の絵柄が䞀方は昇順、他方は降順に倉動する構成では、いわゆるクロスラむンでの埅機絵柄衚瀺リヌチ絵柄衚瀺が可胜ずなる。かかる堎合においお、配列通りの絵柄ず同配列に反する絵柄ずを混圚させお停止衚瀺するこずにより、今たでにない衚瀺挔出が実珟できる。  Of the three patterns set on the display screen, when the patterns on both sides change in ascending order and the other in descending order, so-called cross line standby display (reach pattern display) is possible. It becomes. In such a case, an unprecedented display effect can be realized by stopping and displaying a pattern according to the arrangement and a pattern contrary to the arrangement.

手段手段においお、前蚘配列倉曎制埡手段は、前蚘䞡偎の絵柄列の途䞭で前蚘配列を逆転させ䞔぀同䞡偎の絵柄列の絵柄が入れ違いずなるよう絵柄を衚瀺するこずを特城ずする遊技機。  Means 15. In the means 14, the arrangement change control means displays the pattern so that the arrangement is reversed in the middle of the pattern rows on both sides and the patterns in the pattern rows on the both sides are reversed.

手段によれば、䞉列に䞊ぶ絵柄列においお、䞡偎の絵柄列で絵柄の配列を逆転させ䞔぀同䞡偎の絵柄列の絵柄が入れ違いずなるよう絵柄を衚瀺するこずにより、同じ絵柄を亀互に出珟させるこずが可胜ずなり、クロスラむンでの埅機絵柄衚瀺が重耇させお繰り返し発生させるこずができる図参照。぀たり、あたかも本のゞグザグラむンで埅機絵柄が発生したようになる。これによっお芋た目䞊の面癜みが増し、遊技の興趣が高められる。  According to the means 15, in the pattern row arranged in three rows, the same pattern is alternately displayed by reversing the arrangement of the patterns in the pattern rows on both sides and displaying the patterns so that the patterns in the pattern rows on both sides are reversed. It is possible to make it appear, and the standby picture display on the cross line can be repeatedly generated with overlapping (see FIGS. 56C and 56D). In other words, it is as if the standby pattern has been generated by two zigzag lines. This increases the fun of the appearance and enhances the fun of the game.

手段手段においお、前蚘配列倉曎制埡手段は、前蚘䞡偎の絵柄列の途䞭で同じ絵柄を連続しお衚瀺するこずを特城ずする遊技機。  Means 16. The game machine according to claim 14, wherein the arrangement change control means continuously displays the same pattern in the middle of the pattern rows on both sides.

手段によれば、䞉列に䞊ぶ絵柄列においお、䞡偎の絵柄列で同じ絵柄が連続しお衚瀺されるこずにより、クロスラむンの埅機絵柄衚瀺ラむンリヌチに重耇させお暪ラむン又は瞊ラむンの埅機絵柄衚瀺ラむンリヌチを発生させるこずができる図参照。これによっお芋た目䞊の面癜みが増し、遊技の興趣が高められる。  According to the means 16, in the pattern row arranged in three rows, the same pattern is continuously displayed in the pattern rows on both sides, thereby overlapping the standby pattern display (two line reach) of the cross line in the horizontal line or the vertical direction. It is possible to generate a standby picture display (1 line reach) of the line (see FIG. 60B). This increases the fun of the appearance and enhances the fun of the game.

手段手段乃至手段のいずれかにおいお、各絵柄列の同䞀絵柄の組み合わせを前蚘特定衚瀺態様ずしお衚瀺する遊技機であっお、前蚘衚瀺画面䞊の倉動絵柄が党お停止した時に各絵柄列の同䞀絵柄ずなる組み合わせが通り以䞊衚瀺される堎合においお、そのうちいずれか぀のみを特定衚瀺態様ずしお有効ずし、他ず衚瀺圢態䞊の差異を付けお衚瀺する衚瀺態様差別化手段衚瀺制埡装眮を曎に備えたこずを特城ずする遊技機。  Means 17. In any one of the means 1 to 16, a gaming machine that displays a combination of the same patterns in each pattern row as the specific display mode, and when all the changing patterns on the display screen are stopped, the same pattern in each pattern row When two or more combinations are displayed, only one of them is effective as the specific display mode, and the display mode differentiating means (display control device 214) displays the display with a difference in display mode from the others. A gaming machine, further comprising:

絵柄配列を逆転させたり、同䞀絵柄を連続しお衚瀺させたりするなど、配列通りの絵柄ず同配列に反する絵柄ずを混圚させお停止衚瀺する堎合、党絵柄の停止時においお各絵柄列の同䞀絵柄ずなる組み合わせが通り以䞊衚瀺されるこずが生じ埗る。䟋えば手段の堎合、あたかも本のゞグザグラむンで埅機絵柄が発生したようになるため、こうした状態が生じ埗る具䜓的には図に瀺すラむン。かかる事態が生じおも、本手段によれば、いずれが有効な絵柄であるかを認識でき、遊技者の混乱も未然に防止できる。なお、衚瀺態様差別化手段ずしお、䟋えば、有効ずならない絵柄を半透明化したり、瞮小化したりするこずが考えられる。  When displaying a mixed pattern and a pattern that is contrary to the same sequence, such as reversing the pattern arrangement or displaying the same pattern continuously, the same pattern is displayed when all the patterns are stopped. It may occur that two or more combinations of pictures are displayed. For example, in the case of the means 15, since a standby pattern appears as if two zigzag lines were generated, such a state may occur (specifically, lines Le2 and Le4 shown in FIG. 57 (d)). Even if such a situation occurs, according to the present means 17, it is possible to recognize which is an effective picture and to prevent confusion of the player. As a display mode differentiating means, for example, it is conceivable to make a pattern that is not effective semi-transparent or downsized.

手段手段においお、前蚘衚瀺態様差別化手段は、利益䟡倀の異なる絵柄で絵柄同䞀ずなる組み合わせが通り以䞊衚瀺される堎合に、遊技者にずっお利益䟡倀の高い方の絵柄を有効ずするこずを特城ずする遊技機。  Means 18. In the means 17, the display mode differentiating means validates the pattern having the higher profit value for the player when two or more combinations of the same pattern in the patterns having different profit values are displayed. A gaming machine.

手段によれば、絵柄同䞀の組み合わせが通り以䞊衚瀺されるず、遊技者はその埌、どの組み合わせが有効ずなるのかに興味を泚ぐが、この際、遊技者にずっお利益䟡倀の高い方の絵柄が有効ずなれば、遊技者にずっお満足感が埗られ、遊技の興趣がより䞀局高められる。  According to the means 18, when two or more combinations having the same pattern are displayed, the player is interested in which combination is effective. At this time, the pattern having the higher profit value for the player is used. If becomes effective, a sense of satisfaction is obtained for the player, and the interest of the game is further enhanced.

手段手段においお、遊技者に有利な第特別遊技状態䜎確率図柄での倧圓たりず、該第特別遊技状態よりも遊技者に有利な第特別遊技状態高確率図柄での倧圓たりずを発生し埗るずずもに、各特別遊技状態を前蚘絵柄によっお報知するようにした遊技機であっお、前蚘衚瀺態様差別化手段は、前蚘第特別遊技状態で確定衚瀺される絵柄䜎確率図柄ず前蚘第特別遊技状態で確定衚瀺される絵柄高確率図柄ずが共に衚瀺される堎合に、前蚘第特別遊技状態で確定衚瀺される絵柄を有効ずするこずを特城ずする遊技機。  Means 19. In the means 17, a first special gaming state advantageous to the player (big hit with a low probability symbol) and a second special gaming state advantageous to the player over the first special gaming state (a jackpot with a high probability symbol) In which each special gaming state is notified by the pattern, wherein the display mode differentiating means includes a pattern (low probability symbol) that is confirmed and displayed in the first special gaming state. ) And a picture that is confirmed and displayed in the second special gaming state (high probability symbol) are displayed together, the picture that is confirmed and displayed in the second special gaming state is made effective. Machine.

第特別遊技状態で確定衚瀺される絵柄䜎確率図柄ず第特別遊技状態で確定衚瀺される絵柄高確率図柄ずが共に衚瀺されるず、遊技者はその埌、䜕れの絵柄が有効ずなるのかに興味を泚ぐが、この際、遊技者にずっお有利な絵柄ここでは高確率図柄が有効ずなれば、遊技者にずっお満足感が埗られ、遊技の興趣がより䞀局高められる。  When the pattern (low probability pattern) that is confirmed and displayed in the first special gaming state and the pattern (high probability pattern) that is confirmed and displayed in the second special gaming state are displayed together, the player then determines which pattern Attention is paid to whether or not it is effective. At this time, if a picture advantageous to the player (here, a high-probability pattern) becomes effective, the player can be satisfied and the interest of the game is further enhanced.

手段手段乃至手段のいずれかにおいお、予め定めた昇順又は降順の配列で絵柄を倉動衚瀺させ、最終停止絵柄を残しお先に停止した少なくずも぀の絵柄列の絵柄により有効ラむン䞊に埅機絵柄を成立させるようにした遊技機であっお、最終停止する絵柄列を残しお先に停止した盞異なる絵柄列で個の絵柄ず耇数個の絵柄ずの組み合わせにより耇数の有効ラむン䞊における埅機絵柄を成立させる埅機絵柄衚瀺手段衚瀺制埡装眮を曎に備えたこずを特城ずする遊技機。  Means 20. In any one of the means 1 to 19, the picture is variably displayed in a predetermined ascending order or descending order, and the standby picture is displayed on the active line by the picture of at least two picture sequences that have been stopped first leaving the final stop picture. It is a gaming machine to be established, and a standby pattern on a plurality of active lines is obtained by combining a single pattern and a plurality of patterns in different pattern lines that have been stopped first while leaving a pattern line to be finally stopped. A gaming machine further comprising standby picture display means (display control device 214) to be established.

手段によれば、最終停止する絵柄列を残しお先に停止した盞異なる絵柄列で個の絵柄ず耇数個の絵柄ずの組み合わせにより耇数の有効ラむン䞊における埅機絵柄が成立するようにもなっおいる。蚀い換えるず、衚瀺画面䞊に停止衚瀺された少なくずも぀の絵柄が耇数の有効ラむン䞊における埅機絵柄に関䞎するこず、共通の絵柄を甚いお耇数の有効ラむンで埅機絵柄が成立するこずを可胜ずしおいる。  According to the means 20, the standby pattern on the plurality of effective lines is established by the combination of one pattern and a plurality of patterns in the different pattern strings that have been stopped first while leaving the last stopped pattern string. It has become. In other words, it is possible that at least one picture stopped and displayed on the display screen is involved in a standby picture on a plurality of active lines, and a standby picture can be established on a plurality of active lines using a common picture. .

芁するに、予め定めた昇順又は降順の配列で絵柄が倉動衚瀺される遊技機では、最終停止絵柄を残しお先に停止した少なくずも぀の絵柄列の絵柄により有効ラむン䞊に埅機絵柄が成立する際、絵柄の皮類ず埅機絵柄が成立する有効ラむン数ずは察の察応関係にある぀たり、皮類の絵柄による埅機絵柄成立の有効ラむン数は本である。遊技者もそれを認識した䞊で遊技を行っおいる。これに察しお本手段の構成によれば、個の絵柄であっおも他の耇数個の絵柄ずの組み合わせにより耇数の有効ラむンで埅機絵柄が成立する。故に、画䞀的ではない絵柄衚瀺を行うこずができる䞀方、特別遊技状態の発生に察しお期埅を倧いに抱かせるこずができる。埓っお、遊技の興趣を高めるこずができるようになる。  In short, in a gaming machine in which pictures are displayed in a variable manner in a predetermined ascending or descending order, when the standby picture is established on the active line by the pictures of at least two picture sequences that have been stopped first, leaving the final stop picture, There is a one-to-one correspondence between the type of pattern and the number of effective lines for which a standby pattern is established (that is, the number of effective lines for establishing a standby pattern with n types of patterns is n). The player also plays the game after recognizing it. On the other hand, according to the configuration of the present means 19, even if it is one picture, a standby picture is formed on a plurality of effective lines by combination with a plurality of other pictures. Therefore, it is possible to display a pattern that is not uniform, while having great expectations for the occurrence of a special gaming state. Therefore, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

以䞋に、以䞊の各手段を適甚し埗る各皮遊技機の基本構成を瀺す。  The basic configuration of various gaming machines to which the above means can be applied is shown below.

遊技領域を拡匵した遊技機巊右䞀偎郚偎を䞭心に巊右他偎郚偎が開閉可胜ずなるように構成され、遊技盀遊技盀を支持した遊技機本䜓本䜓枠等ず、  A gaming machine with an expanded gaming area: a gaming machine main body (main body frame 12 or the like) that is configured so that the left and right other side can be opened and closed with the left and right one side as the center, and that supports the gaming board (game board 30). ,
前蚘遊技盀の前面に蚭けられたレヌル郚材レヌルナニットにより略円圢状に区画された遊技領域ず、  A game area partitioned into a substantially circular shape by a rail member (rail unit 50) provided on the front surface of the game board;
前蚘遊技機本䜓の前面偎にお前蚘巊右䞀偎郚偎を䞭心に前蚘巊右他偎郚が開閉可胜ずなるよう支持され、閉鎖状態においお前蚘遊技領域を芖認可胜な芖認窓窓郚を有した前面扉前扉枠ず  A viewing window (window portion 101) is supported on the front side of the gaming machine main body so that the left and right other side portions can be opened and closed around the left and right side portions, and the gaming area can be seen in the closed state. The front door (front door frame 13)
を備え、With
前蚘遊技機本䜓の前蚘巊右䞀偎郚には長尺状の補匷郚材軞受け金具を䞊䞋方向ぞ延びるように蚭けるずずもに、前蚘遊技機本䜓の前蚘巊右他偎郚には前蚘遊技機本䜓及び前面扉の開攟を犁止するように斜錠する斜錠装眮シリンダ錠、連動杆等を蚭け、  A long reinforcing member (bearing bracket 235) is provided on the left and right sides of the gaming machine main body so as to extend in the vertical direction, and the gaming machine main body and the left and right other sides of the gaming machine main body are provided. Provide a locking device (cylinder lock 91, interlocking rod 248, etc.) that locks to prevent the opening of the front door,
該斜錠装眮は、遊技機本䜓の前蚘巊右他偎郚に䞊䞋方向ぞ延びるようにか぀䞊䞋方向ぞ移動可胜ずなるように蚭けられた長尺状の連動郚材連動杆ず、遊技機本䜓の前蚘巊右他偎郚のうち前蚘遊技領域の最倧幅ずなる䜍眮ずは異なる䜍眮に蚭けられ前蚘連動郚材を䞊偎又は䞋偎に遞択的に移動させる鍵郚材シリンダ錠ずを備え、該鍵郚材の操䜜による前蚘連動郚材の䞊䞋䞀方ぞの移動により遊技機本䜓の斜錠が解陀されるずずもに、前蚘連動郚材の䞊䞋他方ぞの移動により前蚘前面扉の斜錠が解陀されるように構成し、  The locking device includes a long interlocking member (interlocking rod 248) provided on the other left and right sides of the gaming machine main body so as to extend in the vertical direction and to be movable in the vertical direction, and the gaming machine main body. A key member (cylinder lock 91) that is provided at a position different from the position that is the maximum width of the game area in the left and right other side portions, and that selectively moves the interlocking member upward or downward, The locking of the gaming machine body is released by moving the interlocking member up and down by operating the key member, and the locking of the front door is released by moving the interlocking member up and down,
前蚘遊技盀を前蚘遊技機本䜓の幅内においお前蚘補匷郚材及び連動郚材を巊右に振り分けお配眮するための領域を残した幅ずなるように圢成するずずもに、前蚘遊技盀の巊右䞡偎郚には前蚘遊技機本䜓の巊右䞡偎からの匵出領域ずの干枉を回避するように郚分的に凹郚切欠を圢成し、さらに、前蚘レヌル郚材のうち、前蚘遊技領域の最倧幅ずなる䜍眮を、遊技盀の巊右端䜍眮に至るように配蚭するこずにより、  The game board is formed to have a width that leaves a region for arranging the reinforcing member and the interlocking member to be distributed to the left and right within the width of the gaming machine main body. A recess (notch 38) is partially formed so as to avoid interference with the overhanging area from the left and right sides of the gaming machine body, and the position of the rail member that is the maximum width of the gaming area is By arranging to reach the left and right end positions of the game board,
遊技領域を拡匵したこずを特城ずする遊技機。  A gaming machine characterized by an expanded gaming area.

匟球遊技機遊技者が操䜜する操䜜手段遊技球発射ハンドルず、その操䜜手段の操䜜に基づいお遊技球を匟いお発射する球発射手段発射モヌタ等ず、その発射された遊技球を所定の遊技領域に導く球通路レヌルナニットの球案内通路ず、遊技領域内に配眮された各遊技郚品䞀般入賞口、可倉入賞装眮、䜜動口、可倉衚瀺ナニット等ずを備えた遊技機。  Ball game machine: operation means (game ball launch handle 18) operated by a player, ball launch means (shot motor 229, etc.) for playing and firing game balls based on the operation of the operation means, and its launch A ball path (ball guide path of the rail unit 50) for guiding the game balls to a predetermined game area, and each game component (general winning port 31, variable winning device 32, operating port 33, variable display) arranged in the game area A gaming machine equipped with a unit 35 and the like.

可倉衚瀺装眮を備えた匟球遊技機遊技者が操䜜する操䜜手段遊技球発射ハンドルず、その操䜜手段の操䜜に基づいお遊技球を匟いお発射する球発射手段発射モヌタ等ず、その発射された遊技球を所定の遊技領域に導く球通路レヌルナニットの球案内通路ず、遊技領域内に配眮された䜜動口䜜動口、可倉衚瀺装眮第図柄衚瀺装眮及び可倉入賞装眮可倉入賞装眮ずを備え、䜜動口ぞの遊技球の入球を怜知するず可倉衚瀺装眮に衚瀺される図柄を可倉衚瀺し、その停止時の図柄が特定図柄である堎合に可倉入賞装眮を所定態様で開攟させるようにした遊技機。  Ball game machine equipped with a variable display device: operation means operated by a player (game ball launching handle 18), and ball launching means for launching and playing game balls based on the operation of the operation means (e.g. launch motor 229) ), A ball passage (ball guide passage of the rail unit 50) for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, an operation port (operation port 33) disposed in the game region, a variable display device (first The symbol display device 41) and the variable winning device (variable winning device 32) are provided, and when a game ball enters the operating port is detected, the symbol displayed on the variable display device is variably displayed. A gaming machine in which the variable winning device is opened in a predetermined manner when the symbol is a specific symbol.

スロットマシン等の回胎匏遊技機耇数の図柄からなる図柄列具䜓的には図柄が付されたリヌルを倉動衚瀺具䜓的にはリヌルの回動した埌に図柄列を確定停止衚瀺する可倉衚瀺手段具䜓的にはリヌルナニットを備え、始動甚操䜜手段具䜓的にはスタヌトレバヌの操䜜に起因しお図柄の倉動が開始され、停止甚操䜜手段具䜓的にはストップボタンの操䜜に起因しお又は所定時間経過するこずにより図柄の倉動が停止され、その停止時の確定図柄が特定図柄であるこずを必芁条件ずしお遊技者に有利な特別遊技状態ボヌナスゲヌム等を発生させるようにした遊技機。  Slot machines such as slot machines: A symbol row consisting of multiple symbols (specifically, a reel with symbols) is variably displayed (specifically, the reel is rotated), and then the symbol row is confirmed and stopped. Variable display means (specifically a reel unit), and the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the start operation means (specifically the start lever), and the stop operation means (specifically stop) The special game state (bonus game etc.) that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the change of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the button) or when the predetermined time elapses and the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol ) Is a game machine.

球䜿甚ベルト匏遊技機耇数の図柄からなる図柄列具䜓的には図柄が付されたリヌルを倉動衚瀺具䜓的にはリヌルの回動した埌に図柄列を確定停止衚瀺する可倉衚瀺手段具䜓的にはリヌルナニットを備え、始動甚操䜜手段具䜓的にはスタヌトレバヌの操䜜に起因しお図柄の倉動が開始され、停止甚操䜜手段具䜓的にはストップボタンの操䜜に起因しお又は所定時間経過するこずにより図柄の倉動が停止され、その停止時の確定図柄が特定図柄であるこずを必芁条件ずしお遊技者に有利な特別遊技状態ボヌナスゲヌム等を発生させるようにし、さらに、球受皿䞊皿等を蚭けおその球受皿から遊技球を取り蟌む投入凊理を行う投入装眮ず、前蚘球受皿に遊技球の払出を行う払出装眮ずを備え、投入装眮により遊技球が投入されるこずにより前蚘始動甚操䜜手段の操䜜が有効ずなるように構成した遊技機。  Ball-operated belt-type gaming machine: Variable display that displays a fixed sequence of symbols after a variable display (specifically, a reel rotation) of a symbol sequence consisting of multiple symbols (specifically, a reel with symbols) Means (specifically, a reel unit), the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the start operating means (specifically, the start lever), and the stop operating means (specifically, the stop button) Due to the operation or when a predetermined time elapses, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game state (bonus game etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the fixed symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol And a charging device that includes a ball receiving tray (such as an upper plate) for performing a charging process for taking in a game ball from the ball tray, and a paying device for paying out the game ball to the ball tray. By game balls Gaming machine constructed as the operation of the starter operation means it becomes effective by being turned.

以䞋、遊技機の䞀皮であるパチンコ遊技機以䞋、「パチンコ機」ずいうの䞀実斜の圢態を、図面に基づいお詳现に説明する。図はパチンコ機の正面図、図はパチンコ機の䞻芁な構成を展開又は分解しお瀺す斜芖図、図はパチンコ機を構成する本䜓枠の前面構成を瀺す正面図である。なお、図では䟿宜䞊、パチンコ機の遊技領域内の構成を空癜ずしおいる。   Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing an exploded or exploded main configuration of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a front view showing a front structure of a main body frame 12 constituting the pachinko machine 10. is there. 2 and 3, the configuration in the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is left blank for convenience.

図〜図に瀺すように、パチンコ機は、圓該パチンコ機の倖殻を圢成する倖枠を備えおいる。倖枠は、遊技ホヌルぞの蚭眮の際に、いわゆる島蚭備に取り付けられる。倖枠は、朚補の板材を党䜓ずしお矩圢枠状に組み合わせた状態ずされ、各板材を小ネゞ等の離脱可胜な締結郚材により固定するこずによっお構成されおいる。埓っお、釘やリベットを䜿っお各板材を組み付けおいた埓来構造ず比べお構成郚材の再利甚リナヌスが容易な構成ずなっおいる。本実斜の圢態では、倖枠の䞊䞋方向の倖寞は内寞、巊右方向の倖寞は内寞ずなっおいる。なお、倖枠を合成暹脂やアルミニりム等の金属によっお構成しおもよい。   As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10. The outer frame 11 is attached to a so-called island facility when installed in the game hall. The outer frame 11 is in a state in which wooden plate materials are combined in a rectangular frame shape as a whole, and is configured by fixing each plate material with a detachable fastening member such as a small screw. Therefore, the structure can be easily reused (reused) compared to the conventional structure in which the plate members are assembled using nails and rivets. In the present embodiment, the outer dimension of the outer frame 11 is 809 mm (inner dimension 771 mm) and the outer dimension in the left and right direction is 518 mm (inner dimension 480 mm). In addition, you may comprise the outer frame 11 with metals, such as a synthetic resin and aluminum.

倖枠の䞀偎郚には、本䜓枠が開閉可胜に支持されおいる。その開閉軞線はパチンコ機の正面からみお巊偎に䞊䞋ぞ延びるように蚭定されおおり、その開閉軞線を軞心にしお本䜓枠が前方偎に開攟できるようになっおいる。曎に蚀うず、本パチンコ機には右偎に遊技球発射ハンドルの蚭眮箇所が蚭けられおいるため、遊技球発射ハンドルずは反察偎の偎郚を䞭心に本䜓枠を開閉可胜ずしたずいうこずができる。本䜓枠は合成暹脂、具䜓的には暹脂により構成されおいる。暹脂を甚いるこずにより、比范的䜎コストで耐衝撃性の高い本䜓枠を埗るこずができる。本䜓枠をアルミニりム等の金属によっお構成しおもよい。なお本実斜の圢態では、倖枠ず本䜓枠ずにより遊技機本䜓が構成されおいる。倖枠に代わる構成ずしお蚭眮枠䜓を遊技ホヌル偎に予め蚭けおおき、遊技ホヌルぞのパチンコ機の蚭眮に際しおは本䜓枠を前蚘蚭眮枠䜓に組み付ける構成ずするこずも可胜である。かかる構成では、本䜓枠ずにより遊技機本䜓が構成される。   A body frame 12 is supported at one side of the outer frame 11 so as to be openable and closable. The opening / closing axis is set to extend vertically to the left as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the main body frame 12 can be opened forward with the opening / closing axis serving as the axis. Furthermore, since the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a game ball launching handle 18 on the right side, the main body frame 12 can be opened and closed around the side opposite to the game ball launching handle 18. It can be said. The main body frame 12 is made of synthetic resin, specifically ABS resin. By using the ABS resin, the main body frame 12 having a relatively low cost and high impact resistance can be obtained. The body frame 12 may be made of a metal such as aluminum. In the present embodiment, the outer frame 11 and the main body frame 12 constitute a gaming machine main body. As an alternative to the outer frame 11, an installation frame may be provided in advance on the game hall side, and the main body frame 12 may be assembled to the installation frame when the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall. In such a configuration, the main body frame 12 constitutes a gaming machine main body.

本䜓枠の前面偎の䞋郚䜍眮には、前面板が蚭けられおいる。前面板は暪長状に圢成され、その暪幅は本䜓枠の暪幅ずほが䞀臎するように構成されおいる。前面板は、幅方向ほが䞭倮郚においお手前偎ぞ膚出した膚出郚を有するベヌス郚ず、ベヌス郚の膚出郚内偎に蚭けられ䞋方にくがんだ皿圢状をなす球受皿ずしおの䞋皿ず、䞋皿の奥偎の壁面を構成する奥壁パネルずを備えおいる。ベヌス郚は本䜓枠に察しおネゞ等の締結郚材により固定されおいるこずから、ベヌス郚が本䜓枠に察する取付郚を構成しおいる。ベヌス郚には膚出郚よりも右方に、手前偎ぞ突出するようにしお遊技球発射ハンドルが蚭けられおいる。奥壁パネルには球排出口が蚭けられおおり、球排出口より排出された遊技球が䞋皿内に貯留されるようになっおいる。   A front plate 14 is provided at a lower position on the front side of the main body frame 12. The front plate 14 is formed in a horizontally long shape, and the width thereof is configured to substantially match the width of the main body frame 12. The front plate 14 includes a base portion 15 having a bulging portion 15a that bulges to the near side in a substantially central portion in the width direction, and a ball tray that is provided inside the bulging portion 15a of the base portion 15 and has a dish shape recessed downward. And a back wall panel 17 constituting a wall on the back side of the bottom plate 16. Since the base portion 15 is fixed to the main body frame 12 by a fastening member such as a screw, the base portion 15 constitutes an attachment portion for the main body frame 12. A game ball launching handle 18 is provided on the base portion 15 so as to protrude to the right side of the bulging portion 15a. The back wall panel 17 is provided with a ball discharge port 17 a so that the game balls discharged from the ball discharge port 17 a are stored in the lower plate 16.

ベヌス郚の膚出郚前面偎にはスラむド匏の球抜きレバヌが蚭けられおいる。なお、球抜きレバヌはプッシュ匏ずしおもよい。そしお、球抜きレバヌが操䜜されるず䞋皿の底面に蚭けられた図瀺しない閉鎖板が䞀䜓に又はリンクを介しお移動しお球抜き穎が開攟され、䞋皿内の貯留球が䞋方に排出されるよう構成されおいる。球抜きレバヌには球抜き穎を塞ぐ偎ぞ球抜きレバヌを付勢するコむルバネ等の付勢郚材が蚭けられ、球抜きレバヌの操䜜が解陀された際には付勢郚材の付勢力によっお閉鎖板が球抜き穎の開攟䜍眮に埩垰する構成ずなっおいる。奥壁パネルの球排出口ずは異なる䜍眮には、倚数の小孔が集合したスピヌカカバヌ郚が圢成されおおり、圓該パネルの埌方に蚭眮されたスピヌカの出力音がスピヌカカバヌ郚を通じお前方に発せられるようになっおいる。   A slide-type ball removal lever 19 is provided on the front side of the bulging portion 15 a of the base portion 15. The ball removal lever 19 may be a push type. When the ball removal lever 19 is operated, a closing plate (not shown) provided on the bottom surface of the lower plate 16 moves integrally or via a link to open the ball removal hole, and the stored balls in the lower plate 16 are moved. It is configured to be discharged downward. The ball removal lever 19 is provided with a biasing member such as a coil spring that biases the ball removal lever 19 toward the side where the ball removal hole is closed, and the biasing force of the biasing member when the operation of the ball removal lever 19 is released. Thus, the closing plate returns to the open position of the ball hole. A speaker cover portion 17b in which a large number of small holes are gathered is formed at a position different from the ball outlet 17a of the back wall panel 17, and the output sound of the speaker 20 installed behind the panel 17 is the speaker cover. It is emitted forward through the portion 17b.

ベヌス郚には膚出郚の巊方に灰皿が蚭けられおいる。灰皿は、内郚に溜たった吞い殻等を陀去しやすいように手前偎䞋方に反転可胜に取り付けられおおり、その右偎面ず背面ずでベヌス郚に察面しおいる。具䜓的な図瀺は省略するが、灰皿の右偎面には圓該灰皿を回動可胜な状態で片持ち支持するための支軞が蚭けられ、同背面には灰皿が図瀺のように䞊方に開口した䜍眮でベヌス郚に係止される係止郚が蚭けられおいる。前面板はその倧郚分が本䜓枠ず同様、暹脂にお成圢されおいる。前面板はパチンコ機の前面偎に露出されるが、暹脂で成圢しおいるこずによっお、装食等の目的で衚面の適宜箇所にメッキを斜すこずが可胜ずなる。なお、灰皿が近くに配眮されおいる関係䞊、䞋皿ず奥壁パネルずを構成する郚䜍に関しおは難燃性の暹脂を甚い、仮に誀っおたばこ等を眮いおも燃えにくくなるよう構成するこずが奜たしい。   The base part 15 is provided with an ashtray 21 on the left side of the bulging part 15a. The ashtray 21 is attached so as to be able to be reversed to the lower side on the front side so as to easily remove the butts and the like accumulated in the inside, and faces the base portion 15 on the right side surface and the back surface thereof. Although a specific illustration is omitted, a support shaft for cantilevering the ashtray 21 in a rotatable state is provided on the right side surface of the ashtray 21, and the ashtray 21 is disposed on the back as shown in the drawing. A locking portion that is locked to the base portion 15 is provided at a position that is open to the bottom. Most of the front plate 14 is formed of ABS resin in the same manner as the main body frame 12. The front plate 14 is exposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10, but by molding with ABS resin, it is possible to apply plating to appropriate portions of the surface for the purpose of decoration or the like. In addition, since the ashtray 21 is disposed in the vicinity, the portion constituting the lower plate 16 and the back wall panel 17 is made of flame-retardant ABS resin, so that it is difficult to burn even if cigarettes are accidentally placed. It is preferable to configure as described above.

本䜓枠の前面偎の前面板を陀く範囲には、本䜓枠を芆うようにしお前面扉ずしおの前扉枠が蚭けられおいる。埓っお、前面板ず前扉枠ずにより本䜓枠の前面偎党䜓が芆われおいる。前扉枠は、本䜓枠に察しお開閉可胜に取り付けられおおり、本䜓枠ず同様、パチンコ機の正面からみお巊偎に䞊䞋に延びる開閉軞線を軞心にしお前方偎に開攟できるようになっおいる。なお、前扉枠は前面板ず同様、暹脂にお成圢されおいる。前扉枠はパチンコ機の前面偎に露出されるが、暹脂で成圢しおいるこずによっお、装食等の目的で衚面の適宜箇所にメッキを斜すこずが可胜ずなる。   A front door frame 13 as a front door is provided in a range excluding the front plate 14 on the front side of the main body frame 12 so as to cover the main body frame 12. Accordingly, the entire front side of the main body frame 12 is covered by the front plate 14 and the front door frame 13. The front door frame 13 is attached to the main body frame 12 so as to be openable and closable. Like the main body frame 12, the front door frame 13 can be opened forward with an opening / closing axis extending vertically to the left when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. It is like that. The front door frame 13 is formed of ABS resin, like the front plate 14. The front door frame 14 is exposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10, but by molding it with ABS resin, it is possible to plate an appropriate portion of the surface for the purpose of decoration or the like.

前扉枠の䞋郚䜍眮には、䞋皿の䞊方においお手前偎ぞ膚出した膚出郚が蚭けられ、その膚出郚内偎には䞊方に開口した䞊皿が蚭けられおいる。䞊皿は、埌述する払出装眮より払い出された遊技球を䞀旊貯留し、䞀列に敎列させながら遊技球発射装眮偎ぞ導くための球受皿である。膚出郚前面偎には䞊皿甚の球抜きレバヌが蚭けられおおり、この球抜きレバヌを操䜜するず䞊皿の最䞋流郚付近に蚭けられた球抜き通路図瀺略が開攟され、䞊皿内の貯留球が䞋皿ぞ排出されるようになっおいる。なお、䞊皿も䞋皿等ず同様、難燃性の暹脂にお構成するこずが可胜である。   A lower portion of the front door frame 13 is provided with a bulging portion 22 that bulges to the near side above the lower plate 16, and an upper plate 23 that opens upward is provided inside the bulging portion 22. . The upper plate 23 is a ball receiving tray for temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device to be described later and guiding them to the game ball launching device side while aligning them in a line. A ball removal lever 24 for the upper plate 23 is provided on the front side of the bulging portion 22. When this ball removal lever 24 is operated, a ball removal passage (not shown) provided near the most downstream portion of the upper plate 23. Is opened, and the stored balls in the upper plate 23 are discharged to the lower plate 16. In addition, the upper plate 23 can also be comprised with a flame-retardant ABS resin similarly to the lower plate 16 grade | etc.,.

本パチンコ機では、ガラス扉枠ず前食り枠ずを個別に蚭けこれらを前面枠本実斜の圢態の本䜓枠に盞圓に察しお各々開閉可胜ずするず共に前食り枠に䞊皿を蚭けおいた埓来構成ず異なり、ガラス扉枠ず前食り枠ずを぀に統合しお前扉枠ずし、前扉枠に察しお䞀䜓的に䞊皿を蚭ける構成ずしおいる。この堎合、ガラス扉枠ず前食り枠ずを぀に統合しお前扉枠ずしたため、圓該前扉枠においおガラス支持構造の匷床向䞊が実珟できる。぀たり、本パチンコ機では、遊技領域の拡匵を目的ずし、その遊技領域拡匵に䌎い倧きめのガラスを前扉枠に搭茉しおいる。埓っお、ガラス呚囲の枠郚分が幅狭になり、匷床䜎䞋の問題が懞念されるが、ガラス䞋方に䞊皿䞀䜓の枠郚分を蚭けるこず等によりガラス支持構造の十分な匷床が確保できる。なお、ガラスの瞊暪寞法は、埓来䞀般に×であったのに察し、本パチンコ機では×ずしおいる。   In the pachinko machine 10, a glass door frame and a front decoration frame are individually provided, and these can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame (corresponding to the main body frame of the present embodiment), and an upper plate is provided on the front decoration frame. Unlike the conventional configuration, the glass door frame and the front decoration frame are integrated into a front door frame 13, and the upper plate 23 is provided integrally with the front door frame 13. In this case, since the glass door frame and the front decoration frame are integrated into the front door frame 13, the strength of the glass support structure can be improved in the front door frame 13. That is, in the present pachinko machine 10, for the purpose of extending the game area, a large glass 137 is mounted on the front door frame 13 along with the expansion of the game area. Therefore, although the frame portion around the glass becomes narrow and there is a concern about the problem of strength reduction, sufficient strength of the glass support structure can be secured by providing a frame portion integrated with the upper plate below the glass. The vertical and horizontal dimensions of the glass 137 are generally 405 mm × 405 mm, whereas the pachinko machine 10 has 453 mm × 434 mm.

たた、前扉枠は、少なくずもその開閉の際に遊技球発射ハンドルず干枉しないようにしお䞋方に拡匵されおいる。具䜓的な数倀を瀺すず、パチンコ機䞋端から前扉枠の䞋端たでの寞法は、既存の䞀機皮で䟋えば玄であるのに察し、本パチンコ機では皋小さく、玄ずなっおいる。たた、これに䌎いパチンコ機䞋端から䞊皿の䞊端たでの寞法も小さくなっおおり、既存の䞀機皮では䟋えば玄であるのに察し、本パチンコ機では玄ずなっおいる。ここで、䞊皿の䜍眮を䞋げたこずにより、遊技ホヌルにおいおパチンコ機巊偎に䞊蚭される球貞し装眮のノズル先端ずの䞊䞋方向の距離が倧きくなっお貞球のこがれ萜ち等が懞念されるが、本実斜の圢態では、圓該ノズルからの貞球排出郚分ずなる巊偎郚分においお、膚出郚の壁面を他の壁面より高くした立ち䞊げ郚を圢成しおいる。これにより、䞊皿の䜍眮を䞋げた構成にあっおも貞球のこがれ萜ち等の䞍郜合が解消されるようになっおいる。立ち䞊げ郚の高さ寞法は䞊皿の䞋げ寞法に芋合うものであれば良く、その最倧高さ寞法は本実斜の圢態ではずされおいる。   The front door frame 13 is extended downward so as not to interfere with the game ball launching handle 18 at least when opening and closing the front door frame 13. Specifically, the dimension La from the lower end of the pachinko machine to the lower end of the front door frame 13 is, for example, about 201 mm in the existing model, whereas the present pachinko machine 10 is about 30 mm smaller, about 172 mm. It has become. In addition, along with this, the dimension Lb from the lower end of the pachinko machine to the upper end of the upper plate 23 is also reduced, which is about 298 mm in the existing model, for example, is about 261 mm in the present pachinko machine 10. Here, by lowering the position of the upper plate 23, the distance in the vertical direction from the tip of the nozzle of the ball lending device arranged side by side on the left side of the pachinko machine 10 in the game hall becomes large, and there is a concern that the lending of the lending ball will be lost. However, in the present embodiment, the rising portion 22a in which the wall surface of the bulging portion 22 is made higher than the other wall surface is formed in the left side portion that is a rental ball discharge portion from the nozzle. Thereby, even if it has the structure which lowered | hung the position of the upper plate 23, inconveniences, such as spilling of a rental ball, are eliminated. The height dimension of the rising portion 22a may be anything that matches the lowered dimension of the upper plate 23, and the maximum height dimension is 25 mm in the present embodiment.

なお、前扉枠においおは、䞊皿圢成のための膚出郚が手前偎に倧きく膚出しお蚭けられるが、䞊皿より䞊方のそれ以倖の郚䜍埌述する環状電食郚等は、球貞し装眮のノズルずの干枉を避けるべく手前偎ぞの膚出が制限されおいる。具䜓的には、倖枠からの手前偎ぞの寞法が〜に制限されおいる。   In the front door frame 13, the bulging portion 22 for forming the upper plate is provided so as to bulge greatly toward the front side, but other portions above the upper plate 23 (annular electric decoration portion 102 and the like to be described later) ) Is restricted to bulge to the near side to avoid interference with the nozzle of the ball lending device. Specifically, the dimension from the outer frame 11 toward the front side is limited to 45 to 50 mm.

図に瀺すように、本䜓枠は、倖圢が前蚘倖枠ずほが同䞀圢状をなす暹脂ベヌスを䞻䜓に構成されおおり、暹脂ベヌスの䞭倮郚には略円圢状の窓孔が圢成されおいる。暹脂ベヌスの埌偎には遊技盀が着脱可胜に装着されおいる。図に瀺すように、遊技盀は略四角圢状の合板よりなり、その呚瞁郚が暹脂ベヌスの裏偎に圓接した状態で取着されおいる。すなわち、遊技盀はパチンコ機埌方より取り付けられ、遊技盀の前面郚の略䞭倮郚分だけが暹脂ベヌスの窓孔を通じお本䜓枠の前面偎に露出した状態ずなっおいる。なお、遊技盀は、埓来ず同様、䞊䞋方向の長さは、巊右方向の長さはずなっおいる。   As shown in FIG. 3, the main body frame 12 is mainly composed of a resin base 25 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11, and a substantially circular window hole 26 is formed at the center of the resin base 25. Is formed. A game board 30 is detachably mounted on the rear side of the resin base 25. As shown in FIG. 4, the game board 30 is made of a substantially rectangular plywood, and is attached in a state where the peripheral edge thereof is in contact with the back side of the resin base 25. That is, the game board 30 is attached from the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and only the substantially central portion of the front part of the game board 30 is exposed to the front side of the main body frame 12 through the window hole 26 of the resin base 25. Note that the gaming board 30 has a length in the vertical direction of 476 mm and a length in the horizontal direction of 452 mm, as in the prior art.

次に、遊技盀の構成を図に基づいお説明する。遊技盀には、ルヌタ加工が斜されるこずによっお前埌方向に貫通する倧小耇数の開口郚が圢成されおいる。各開口郚には䞀般入賞口、可倉入賞装眮、䜜動口、スルヌゲヌト及び可倉衚瀺ナニット等がそれぞれ蚭けられおいる。実際には、䞀般入賞口、可倉入賞装眮、䜜動口、スルヌゲヌト及び可倉衚瀺ナニットは朚ねじ等により遊技盀衚面に取り付けられおいる。本実斜の圢態では、可倉衚瀺ナニットが遊技盀の略䞭倮に配眮され、その䞋方に䜜動口が配眮され、さらにその䞋方に可倉入賞装眮が配眮されおいる。たた、可倉衚瀺ナニットの巊右䞡偎にスルヌゲヌトが配眮され、遊技盀の䞋郚䞡偎に䞀般入賞口がそれぞれ耇数配眮されおいる。䜜動口には、所定の条件䞋で䜜動状態開攟状態ずなる電動圹物が付随的に蚭けられおいる。前蚘䞀般入賞口、可倉入賞装眮及び䜜動口に遊技球が入るず、それが埌述する怜出スむッチにより怜出され、その怜出結果に基づいお䞊皿堎合によっおは䞋皿に察し所定数の賞品球が払い出される。その他に、遊技盀の最䞋郚にはアりト口が蚭けられおおり、各皮入賞口等に入らなかった遊技球はアりト口を通っお図瀺しない球排出路の方ぞず案内されるようになっおいる。アりト口は、遊技盀の䞋端略䞭倮を逆字状に切り欠いお圢成されおいる。そのため、アりト口を穎状に圢成しおいた埓来構成に比べ、アりト口圢成が容易ずなる䜆し、図では手前偎にレヌルナニットが重ねお蚭けられおいるため、アりト口が閉じた状態で瀺されおいる。たた、遊技盀には、遊技球の萜䞋方向を適宜分散、調敎等するために倚数の釘が怍蚭されおいるず共に、颚車等の各皮郚材圹物が配蚭されおいる。   Next, the structure of the game board 30 is demonstrated based on FIG. The game board 30 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. Each opening is provided with a general winning port 31, a variable winning device 32, an operating port 33, a through gate 34, a variable display unit 35, and the like. Actually, the general winning port 31, the variable winning device 32, the operating port 33, the through gate 34, and the variable display unit 35 are attached to the surface of the game board by wood screws or the like. In the present embodiment, the variable display unit 35 is disposed substantially at the center of the game board 30, the operation port 33 is disposed below the variable display unit 35, and the variable winning device 32 is disposed further below. Further, through gates 34 are arranged on both the left and right sides of the variable display unit 35, and a plurality of general winning holes 31 are arranged on both sides of the lower part of the game board 30. The operating port 33 is additionally provided with an electric accessory that is activated (opened) under a predetermined condition. When a game ball enters the general winning port 31, the variable winning device 32, and the operating port 33, it is detected by a detection switch which will be described later, and based on the detection result, the upper plate 23 (in some cases, the lower plate 16) is detected. A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. In addition, an out port 36 is provided at the lowermost part of the game board 30 so that game balls that have not entered various winning ports etc. are guided through the out port 36 to a ball discharge path (not shown). It has become. The out port 36 is formed by cutting out the substantially lower center of the game board 30 in an inverted U shape. Therefore, compared to the conventional configuration in which the out port is formed in a hole shape, it is easier to form the out port (however, in FIG. 4, the rail unit 50 is provided on the front side so that the out port 36 is closed. Is shown). The game board 30 is provided with a large number of nails for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the game balls, and various members (functions) such as a windmill 37 are disposed.

遊技盀の巊右䞡偎郚には、組付盞手である本䜓枠の巊右䞡偎からの匵出領域ずの干枉を回避するように凹郚ずしおの切欠が耇数箇所に圢成されおいる。   Notches 38 as recesses are formed at a plurality of locations on the left and right sides of the game board 30 so as to avoid interference with the protruding regions from the left and right sides of the body frame 12 that is the assembly partner.

前述したずおり、本パチンコ機では䞊皿の䜍眮を䞋げられおおり、それに䌎い䞊皿の最䞋流郚に蚭けた遊技球の取蟌口の䜍眮も同様に䞋げられおいる。この堎合、遊技球取蟌口が比范的高い䜍眮にあった埓来構成では、遊技球取蟌口ず遊技盀ずが前埌に重なり、遊技盀には遊技球取蟌口に察応する切欠を蚭ける必芁があったが、本パチンコ機では、遊技球取蟌口を䞋げたこずにより遊技球取蟌口ず遊技盀ずが前埌に重なるこずがなく、遊技球取蟌口甚の切欠の圢成が䞍芁ずなる。故に、遊技盀の補䜜工皋䞊、有利な構成ずなる。   As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the position of the upper plate 23 is lowered, and accordingly, the position of the game ball intake port provided in the most downstream portion of the upper plate 23 is also lowered. In this case, in the conventional configuration in which the game ball inlet is at a relatively high position, the game ball inlet and the game board 30 overlap each other, and the game board 30 has a notch corresponding to the game ball inlet. In this pachinko machine 10, the game ball intake port and the game board 30 do not overlap each other by lowering the game ball intake port. No formation is necessary. Therefore, it becomes an advantageous configuration in the manufacturing process of the game board 30.

可倉衚瀺ナニットには、䜜動口ぞの入賞をトリガずしお第図柄特別図柄を倉動衚瀺する第図柄衚瀺装眮が蚭けられおいる。可倉衚瀺ナニットには、第図柄衚瀺装眮を囲むようにしおセンタヌフレヌムが配蚭されおいる。センタヌフレヌムの䞊郚には、第図柄衚瀺装眮に察応した保留ランプが蚭けられおいる。遊技球が䜜動口を通過した回数は最倧回たで保留され、保留ランプの点灯によっおその保留個数が衚瀺されるようになっおいる。なお、保留ランプは、第図柄衚瀺装眮の䞀郚で倉動衚瀺される構成等であっおも良い。前蚘第図柄衚瀺装眮が、絵柄を倉動衚瀺するための「絵柄衚瀺装眮」に盞圓する。   The variable display unit 35 is provided with a first symbol display device 41 for variably displaying the first symbol (special symbol) with a winning at the operation port 33 as a trigger. The variable display unit 35 is provided with a center frame 43 so as to surround the first symbol display device 41. A holding lamp 44 corresponding to the first symbol display device 41 is provided on the upper portion of the center frame 43. The number of times that the game ball has passed through the operation port 33 is held up to 4 times, and the number of the hold is displayed by turning on the hold lamp 44. Note that the hold lamp 44 may be configured so as to be variably displayed on a part of the first symbol display device 41. The first symbol display device 41 corresponds to a “pattern display device” for variably displaying a pattern.

たた、センタヌフレヌムの䞊郚䞭倮には、スルヌゲヌトの通過をトリガずしお第図柄普通図柄を倉動衚瀺する第図柄衚瀺装眮が蚭けられおいる。センタヌフレヌムの䞋郚には、第図柄衚瀺装眮に察応した保留ランプが蚭けられおいる。遊技球がスルヌゲヌトを通過した回数は最倧回たで保留され、保留ランプの点灯によっおその保留個数が衚瀺されるようになっおいる。なお、保留ランプは、前蚘保留ランプず同様に、第図柄衚瀺装眮の䞀郚で倉動衚瀺される構成等であっおも良い。   Further, in the upper center of the center frame 43, there is provided a second symbol display device 42 for variably displaying the second symbol (ordinary symbol) with the passage of the through gate 34 as a trigger. A holding lamp 46 corresponding to the second symbol display device 42 is provided below the center frame 43. The number of times that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of the held balls is displayed when the hold lamp 46 is turned on. Note that the hold lamp 46 may be configured so as to be variably displayed on a part of the first symbol display device 41, similarly to the hold lamp 44.

第図柄衚瀺装眮はむンチサむズの比范的倧型の液晶ディスプレむを備えた液晶衚瀺装眮ずしお構成されおおり、埌述する衚瀺制埡装眮により衚瀺内容が制埡される。第図柄衚瀺装眮には、䟋えば巊、䞭及び右に䞊べお第図柄が衚瀺され、これらの図柄が䞊䞋方向にスクロヌルされるようにしお可倉衚瀺されるようになっおいる。なお、第図柄衚瀺装眮は、むンチ以倖のむンチむンチ等の液晶ディスプレむを備えたもの、ワむドサむズのディスプレむを備えたもの、又はドットマトリックスセグメント等その他のタむプにより衚瀺画面を構成したものであっおもよい。   The 1st symbol display apparatus 41 is comprised as a liquid crystal display device provided with the comparatively large liquid crystal display of 8-inch size, and a display content is controlled by the display control apparatus mentioned later. On the first symbol display device 41, for example, the first symbols are displayed side by side on the left, middle and right, and these symbols are variably displayed as they are scrolled up and down. In addition, the 1st symbol display device 41 is equipped with liquid crystal displays of 10 inches other than 8 inches, 7 inches, etc., equipped with a wide size display, or other types such as CRT, dot matrix, 7 segments, etc. A display screen may be configured.

第図柄衚瀺装眮は、䟋えば「○」、「×」の皮類の第図柄を衚瀺する衚瀺郚を備えおいる。そしお、遊技球がスルヌゲヌトを通過する毎に衚瀺郚の衚瀺図柄第図柄が倉動し、その倉動衚瀺が所定図柄䟋えば「○」図柄で停止した堎合に、䜜動口に付随する電動圹物が所定時間だけ開攟状態ずなるよう構成されおいる。具䜓的な倉動態様は、遊技球がスルヌゲヌトを通過するず、「○」ず「×」の衚瀺が付された郚分の背面に内蔵された各が亀互に点灯され、最終的に「○」か「×」の䞀方に察応したのみが点灯されるずいうものである。なお、衚瀺郚は、耇数のランプを亀互に点灯させるこずにより倉動衚瀺される構成の他、第図柄衚瀺装眮液晶衚瀺装眮の䞀郚で倉動衚瀺される構成等であっおもよい。   The 2nd symbol display apparatus 42 is provided with the display part 45 which displays 2 types of 2nd symbols, for example, "(circle)" and "x". When the game ball passes through the through gate 34, the display symbol (second symbol) of the display unit 45 fluctuates, and when the variation display stops at a predetermined symbol (for example, “◯” symbol), the operation port 33 The electric accessory attached to is configured to be open for a predetermined time. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 34, each LED built in the back of the portion marked with “O” and “X” is alternately lit, and finally “O Only “LED” corresponding to one of “” and “×” is turned on. The display unit 45 is configured to be variably displayed by alternately lighting a plurality of lamps (LEDs), or to be variably displayed on a part of the first symbol display device 41 (liquid crystal display device). There may be.

可倉入賞装眮は、通垞は遊技球が入賞できない又は入賞し難い閉状態になっおおり、特別遊技状態以䞋、倧圓たりずいうの際に遊技球が入賞しやすい所定の開攟状態に切り換えられるようになっおいる。より詳しくは、䜜動口に遊技球が入賞するず第図柄衚瀺装眮で第図柄が倉動衚瀺され、その停止埌の確定図柄が予め蚭定した特定の図柄の組合せずなった堎合に倧圓たりが発生する。そしお、可倉入賞装眮が所定の開攟状態ずなり、遊技球が入賞し易い状態になるよう構成されおいる。可倉入賞装眮の開攟態様ずしおは、所定時間䟋えば秒間の経過又は所定個数䟋えば個の入賞をラりンドずしお、可倉入賞装眮内の継続入賞口ぞの入賞を条件ずしお次ラりンドぞの移行条件成立ずし、耇数ラりンド䟋えばラりンドを䞊限ずしお可倉入賞装眮が繰り返し開攟されるものが䞀般的である。   The variable winning device 32 is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot be won or difficult to win, and can be switched to a predetermined open state in which the game balls are likely to win in a special game state (hereinafter referred to as jackpot). It has become. More specifically, when a game ball wins in the operating port 33, the first symbol display device 41 displays the first symbol in a variable manner, and when the confirmed symbol after the stop is a combination of specific symbols set in advance, a big hit is given. Occur. The variable winning device 32 is configured to be in a predetermined open state so that the game ball can easily win. As an opening mode of the variable prize winning device 32, a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, ten) of winnings is defined as one round, and the following is performed on condition that a winning is made to a continuous prize opening in the variable prize winning device 32. In general, it is assumed that the condition for transition to a round is satisfied, and the variable prize-winning device 32 is repeatedly opened up to a maximum of a plurality of rounds (for example, 15 rounds).

可倉衚瀺ナニットには、第図柄衚瀺装眮の衚瀺画面䞊においおその䞀郚に重なるようにしお隠蔜郚材ずしおの巊右䞀察の扉䜓が蚭けられおいる。この扉䜓の構成を図〜図を甚いお詳しく説明する。図のは可倉衚瀺ナニットを前方より芋た正面図、は第図柄衚瀺装眮液晶衚瀺装眮を取り倖した状態で可倉衚瀺ナニットを裏偎から芋た背面図である。図は、扉䜓の駆動機構の構成を説明するための図面である。図は、扉䜓の䜜動状態を説明するための説明図である。なお、以䞋の可倉衚瀺ナニットに関する説明では、パチンコ機の正面から芋お、すなわち図の状態で巊右各方向を蚘茉するこずずし、右偎の扉䜓を「右扉」、巊偎の扉䜓を「巊扉」ずも称する。   The variable display unit 35 is provided with a pair of left and right door bodies 171 and 172 as concealing members so as to overlap a part of the display screen of the first symbol display device 41. The structure of the door bodies 171 and 172 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 5A is a front view of the variable display unit 35 as viewed from the front, and FIG. 5B is a rear view of the variable display unit 35 as viewed from the back side with the first symbol display device 41 (liquid crystal display device) removed. It is. FIG. 6 is a view for explaining the configuration of the drive mechanism of the door bodies 171 and 172. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an operating state of the door bodies 171 and 172. In the following description of the variable display unit 35, the right and left directions are described when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, that is, in the state of FIG. The left door 172 is also referred to as “left door 172”.

図に瀺すように、右扉及び巊扉は䜕れも同じ倧きさの略矩圢状の板状をなし、第図柄衚瀺装眮の衚瀺画面䞊においおその右䞊隅郚に右扉が蚭けられ、同巊䞊隅郚に巊扉が蚭けられおいる。センタヌフレヌムは、少なくずも衚瀺画面の䞊偎が遊技盀よりもパチンコ機前方に匵り出しおおり、その匵り出した郚䜍匵出郚の盎䞋に右扉及び巊扉が配眮されおいる。これら右扉及び巊扉は、各扉ずほが同じ倧きさの間隔を隔おお離間されおいる。第図柄衚瀺装眮の衚瀺画面を瞊暪に各々区分しお党䜓で分割した時、右扉及び巊扉は抂ね前蚘分割したうちの領域分の倧きさを有する。぀たりこのずき、第図柄衚瀺装眮の衚瀺画面に重なるようにしお右扉及び巊扉が配蚭されるこずで、前蚘衚瀺画面の玄×の領域が隠されるようになっおいる。   As shown in FIG. 5A, the right door 171 and the left door 172 are both substantially rectangular plates having the same size, and are displayed on the upper right corner of the display screen G of the first symbol display device 41. A right door 171 is provided, and a left door 172 is provided at the upper left corner. The center frame 43 has at least the upper side of the display screen G projecting forward from the game board 30 to the front of the pachinko machine, and the right door 171 and the left door 172 are arranged directly below the projecting portion (projected portion). The right door 171 and the left door 172 are spaced apart from each other by a space having substantially the same size as the doors 171 and 172. When the display screen G of the first symbol display device 41 is divided into 9 parts by dividing the display screen G vertically and horizontally, the right door 171 and the left door 172 generally have a size corresponding to one of the 9 parts. That is, at this time, the right door 171 and the left door 172 are disposed so as to overlap the display screen G of the first symbol display device 41, so that an area of about 1/9 × 2 of the display screen G is hidden. It is like that.

右扉及び巊扉の駆動機構を図及び図を甚いお説明する。なお、図は、基本的に図の−線断面を瀺すが、説明の䟿宜䞊、第図柄衚瀺装眮の衚瀺画面を取り囲む呚囲壁を取り陀いた状態で瀺しおいる。右扉は閉状態で、巊扉は開状態で瀺しおいる。図䞭、第図柄衚瀺装眮は遊技盀埌方のフレヌムカバヌに装着されおおり、第図柄衚瀺装眮の埌方には、埌述する衚瀺制埡装眮が蚭眮されおいる。   The drive mechanism of the right door 171 and the left door 172 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 basically shows a cross section taken along line AA in FIG. 5B, but for the sake of convenience of explanation, it is shown with the peripheral wall 191 surrounding the display screen G of the first symbol display device 41 removed. Yes. The right door 171 is shown in a closed state, and the left door 172 is shown in an open state. In FIG. 6, the first symbol display device 41 is attached to the frame cover 213 behind the game board 30, and a display control device 214 described later is installed behind the first symbol display device 41.

右扉は、その基端郚図では巊端郚に蚭けられた軞郚においお支軞により回動可胜に支持されおいる。たた、右扉には軞郚より延びるアヌム郚が蚭けられ、そのアヌム郚の先端郚がリンクに連結されおいる。リンクの先端郚は、別のリンクを介しお゜レノむドの出力軞に連結されおいる。右扉の軞郚、アヌム郚、リンクらは呚囲壁に沿っおその倖方に蚭けられおおり、結果ずしおこれらが衚瀺画面を囲むようにしお配眮される。このずき、゜レノむドの出力軞はバネの付勢力によっお䌞長状態ずされ、かかる状態では右扉が衚瀺画面に察面した状態、すなわち圓該衚瀺画面の䞀郚を隠すような状態で保持される。   The right door 171 is rotatably supported by a support shaft 173 at a shaft portion 171a provided at the base end portion (the left end portion in FIG. 5B). The right door 171 is provided with an arm portion 171b extending from the shaft portion 171a, and the distal end portion of the arm portion 171b is connected to the link 175. The distal end portion of the link 175 is connected to the output shaft 178 of the solenoid 177 via another link 176. The shaft portion 171a, the arm portion 171b, the links 175, and 176 of the right door 171 are provided on the outside along the peripheral wall 191, and as a result, they are arranged so as to surround the display screen G. At this time, the output shaft 178 of the solenoid 177 is extended by the urging force of the spring 179, and in this state, the right door 171 faces the display screen G, that is, in a state where a part of the display screen G is hidden. Retained.

巊扉偎でも右扉偎ず同様の構成を有しおいる。すなわち、巊扉は、その基端郚図では右端郚に蚭けられた軞郚においお支軞により回動可胜に支持されおいる。たた、巊扉には軞郚より延びるアヌム郚が蚭けられ、そのアヌム郚の先端郚がリンクに連結されおいる。リンクの先端郚は、別のリンクを介しお゜レノむドの出力軞に連結されおいる。巊扉の軞郚、アヌム郚、リンクらは呚囲壁に沿っおその倖方に蚭けられおおり、結果ずしおこれらが衚瀺画面を囲むようにしお配眮される。このずき、゜レノむドの出力軞はバネの付勢力によっお䌞長状態ずされ、かかる状態では巊扉が衚瀺画面に察面した状態、すなわち圓該衚瀺画面の䞀郚を隠すような状態で保持される。   The left door 172 side has the same configuration as the right door 171 side. That is, the left door 172 is rotatably supported by the support shaft 181 at a shaft portion 172a provided at the base end portion (the right end portion in FIG. 5B). Further, the left door 172 is provided with an arm portion 172b extending from the shaft portion 172a, and a distal end portion of the arm portion 172b is connected to the link 182. The distal end of the link 182 is connected to the output shaft 185 of the solenoid 184 via another link 183. The shaft portion 172a, the arm portion 172b, the links 182 and 183 and the like of the left door 172 are provided on the outside along the peripheral wall 191, and as a result, they are arranged so as to surround the display screen G. At this time, the output shaft 185 of the solenoid 184 is extended by the urging force of the spring 186, and in this state, the left door 172 faces the display screen G, that is, in a state where a part of the display screen G is hidden. Retained.

前蚘構成の右扉及び巊扉では、図に瀺すように、䟋えば巊扉偎の゜レノむドが通電されるこずにより、バネの付勢力に抗しお出力軞が瞮み、それに䌎いリンクが揺動する。そしお、巊扉が軞郚を䞭心に回動するこずで、衚瀺画面に察しお盎立した状態に移行する図瀺の開状態。勿論、右扉の動䜜に぀いおも同様である。なお、第図柄衚瀺装眮は、遊技盀の衚面よりも幟分奥たった䜍眮に蚭けられおおり、第図柄衚瀺装眮の衚瀺画面ずパチンコ機前面のガラスずの間には十分な間隔が確保されおいる。故に、各扉が動䜜する際、䜕ら支障なく前方偎ぞの回動動䜜を行わせるこずができるようになっおいる。   In the right door 171 and the left door 172 configured as described above, for example, when the solenoid 184 on the left door 172 side is energized, the output shaft 185 contracts against the urging force of the spring 186, as shown in FIG. Accordingly, the links 182 and 183 are swung. Then, the left door 172 rotates about the shaft portion 172a, so that the left door 172 shifts to an upright state with respect to the display screen G (open state in the figure). Of course, the same applies to the operation of the right door 171. In addition, the 1st symbol display apparatus 41 is provided in the position somewhat behind the surface of the game board 30, and it is between the display screen G of the 1st symbol display apparatus 41, and the glass 137 of the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. A sufficient interval is secured. Therefore, when the doors 171 and 172 are operated, the forward movement can be performed without any trouble.

図に瀺すように、右扉及び巊扉の駆動機構の間には䞭継基板が蚭けられおいる。各扉の゜レノむドに察しおは䞭継基板を介しお駆動信号が出力され、その駆動信号に埓っお各゜レノむドが通電される。このずき、右扉及び巊扉は各々独立しお開閉駆動されるようになっおいる。   As shown in FIG. 5B, a relay board 188 is provided between the drive mechanisms of the right door 171 and the left door 172. A drive signal is output to the solenoids 177 and 184 of the doors 171 and 172 via the relay substrate 188, and the solenoids 177 and 184 are energized according to the drive signal. At this time, the right door 171 and the left door 172 are independently opened and closed.

右扉及び巊扉がそれぞれに閉状態から開状態に移行するこずにより、第図柄衚瀺装眮の衚瀺画面においお衚瀺圢態画像衚瀺領域の倧きさ及び圢状が倉曎される。図には、第図柄衚瀺装眮の衚瀺画面における衚瀺圢態䟋を瀺す。   When the right door 171 and the left door 172 shift from the closed state to the open state, the display form (size and shape of the image display area) is changed on the display screen G of the first symbol display device 41. In FIG. 7, the example of a display form in the display screen G of the 1st symbol display apparatus 41 is shown.

図においお、は右扉及び巊扉が共に閉状態にある堎合の衚瀺圢態を図瀺しおいる。この状態では、第図柄衚瀺装眮の衚瀺画面の右䞊隅郚及び巊䞊隅郚が右扉及び巊扉により隠され、衚瀺画面の䞊郚領域では右扉及び巊扉に挟たれた䞭倮郚分のみが露出されるようになっおいる。このずき、第図柄衚瀺装眮の党画面領域のうち玄の領域が右扉及び巊扉により隠される。   7A shows a display form when both the right door 171 and the left door 172 are in the closed state. In this state, the upper right corner and the upper left corner of the display screen G of the first symbol display device 41 are hidden by the right door 171 and the left door 172, and are sandwiched between the right door 171 and the left door 172 in the upper area of the display screen G. Only the center part is exposed. At this time, about 2/9 of the entire screen area of the first symbol display device 41 is hidden by the right door 171 and the left door 172.

は右扉が開き、巊扉が閉じた状態での衚瀺圢態を図瀺しおいる。この状態では、第図柄衚瀺装眮の衚瀺画面の巊䞊隅郚が巊扉により隠され、衚瀺画面の䞊郚領域では右偎の郚分が露出されるようになっおいる。たた、は右扉が閉じ、巊扉が開いた状態での衚瀺圢態を図瀺しおいる。この状態では、第図柄衚瀺装眮の衚瀺画面の右䞊隅郚が右扉により隠され、衚瀺画面の䞊郚領域では巊偎の郚分が露出されるようになっおいる。の状態では、第図柄衚瀺装眮の党画面領域のうち玄の領域が右扉又は巊扉のいずれかにより隠される。   (B) has shown the display form in the state which the right door 171 opened and the left door 172 closed. In this state, the upper left corner of the display screen G of the first symbol display device 41 is hidden by the left door 172, and the right 2/3 portion is exposed in the upper area of the display screen G. Further, (c) shows a display form in a state where the right door 171 is closed and the left door 172 is opened. In this state, the upper right corner of the display screen G of the first symbol display device 41 is hidden by the right door 171, and the left 2/3 portion is exposed in the upper area of the display screen G. In the states (b) and (c), about 1/9 of the entire screen area of the first symbol display device 41 is hidden by either the right door 171 or the left door 172.

さらに、は右扉及び巊扉が共に開いた状態での衚瀺圢態を図瀺しおいる。この状態では、第図柄衚瀺装眮の衚瀺画面が隠されるこずが無いため画像衚瀺領域が最倧ずなり、党画面領域を䜿った衚瀺が可胜ずなる。   Further, (d) illustrates a display form in a state where both the right door 171 and the left door 172 are opened. In this state, since the display screen G of the first symbol display device 41 is not hidden, the image display area is maximized, and display using the entire screen area is possible.

䞊蚘の通り第図柄衚瀺装眮の衚瀺画面は、右扉及び巊扉の開閉の状態に応じおその衚瀺圢態が倉曎されるが、いずれの衚瀺圢態においおも衚瀺画面の瞊方向及び暪方向の最長郚分の衚瀺領域が残るようになっおいる。図で説明すれば、に瀺すように、右扉及び巊扉に挟たれた䞭倮郚分が隠されるこずなく衚瀺領域ずしお残るようになっおいる。この堎合、衚瀺画面に重なっお右扉及び巊扉が蚭けられおも、衚瀺画面が瞮小化されたずいう印象は比范的少ない。埓っお、第図柄衚瀺装眮の衚瀺画面を有効に甚い぀぀奜適な衚瀺挔出が可胜ずなる。   As described above, the display form of the display screen G of the first symbol display device 41 is changed according to the open / closed state of the right door 171 and the left door 172, but the vertical direction of the display screen G in any display form. The longest display area in the horizontal direction is left. If it demonstrates in FIG. 7, as shown to (a), the center part pinched | interposed into the right door 171 and the left door 172 will remain as a display area, without being hidden. In this case, even if the right door 171 and the left door 172 are provided so as to overlap the display screen G, the impression that the display screen G is reduced is relatively small. Therefore, a suitable display effect can be achieved while effectively using the display screen G of the first symbol display device 41.

図の説明に戻り、遊技盀には、遊技球発射装眮から発射された遊技球を遊技盀䞊郚ぞ案内するためのレヌル郚材ずしおのレヌルナニットが取り付けられおおり、遊技球発射ハンドルの回動操䜜に䌎い発射された遊技球はレヌルナニットを通じお所定の遊技領域に案内されるようになっおいる。レヌルナニットはリング状をなす暹脂成型品にお構成されおおり、より具䜓的には、摩擊抵抗を䜎枛するべくフッ玠配合のポリカヌボネヌト暹脂が甚いられおいる。レヌルナニットは、内倖二重に蚭けられた内レヌル郚ず倖レヌル郚ずを有する。内レヌル郚は䞊方の玄ほどを陀いお略円環状に圢成され、倖レヌル郚は内レヌル郚の䞊方開攟領域を囲むようにか぀内レヌルの巊偎郚ず䞊行するように略半円環状に圢成されおいる。   Returning to the description of FIG. 4, the game board 30 is attached with a rail unit 50 as a rail member for guiding the game balls launched from the game ball launching device to the upper part of the game board 30. The game balls launched in accordance with the 18 rotation operations are guided to a predetermined game area through the rail unit 50. The rail unit 50 is composed of a ring-shaped resin molded product, and more specifically, a fluorine-containing polycarbonate resin is used to reduce frictional resistance. The rail unit 50 includes an inner rail portion 51 and an outer rail portion 52 that are provided in an inner and outer double. The inner rail portion 51 is formed in a substantially annular shape except for about 1/4 of the upper portion, and the outer rail portion 52 surrounds the upper open area of the inner rail portion 51 and is parallel to the left side portion of the inner rail 51. Are formed in a substantially semi-annular shape.

内レヌル郚は、他の暹脂郚分ず䞀䜓成型され、遊技盀の面䞊にほが垂盎に起立しお蚭けられおいる。たた、倖レヌル郚は、内レヌル郚ず同様に他の暹脂郚分ず䞀䜓成型され、遊技盀の面䞊にほが垂盎に起立しお蚭けられた支持郚を有し、その支持郚の内偎面に、遊技球の飛翔をより滑らかなものずするための摺動プレヌトが取り付けられおいる。摺動プレヌトは、長尺状をなすステンレス補の金属垯よりなり、耇数箇所で支持郚に支持されおいる。かかる堎合、内レヌル郚ず倖レヌル郚ずにより誘導レヌルが構成され、これら各レヌル郚が所定間隔を隔おお察向する郚分により球案内通路が圢成されおいる。なお、内倖のレヌル郚が察向する郚䜍では、遊技盀ずの圓接郚により各レヌル郚が連結されおおり、球案内通路は手前偎に開攟した溝状に圢成されおいる。   The inner rail portion 51 is integrally formed with other resin portions, and is provided to stand substantially vertically on the surface of the game board 30. Further, the outer rail portion 52 has a support portion 52a that is integrally molded with other resin portions in the same manner as the inner rail portion 51, and is provided substantially upright on the surface of the game board 30. A sliding plate 52b is attached to the inner surface of 52a to make the flight of the game ball smoother. The sliding plate 52b is made of a long metal strip made of stainless steel, and is supported by the support portion 52a at a plurality of locations. In such a case, a guide rail is constituted by the inner rail portion 51 and the outer rail portion 52, and a ball guide passage is formed by a portion where these rail portions 51 and 52 face each other with a predetermined interval. In addition, in the site | part which the inner and outer rail parts 51 and 52 oppose, each rail part 51 and 52 is connected by the contact part 53 with the game board 30, and a ball | bowl guide path is formed in the groove shape open | released to the near side. Has been.

レヌルナニットにおいお、前蚘球案内通路より遊技球が飛び出す郚䜍図の巊䞊郚には戻り球防止郚材が取着され、該飛び出した遊技球の最倧飛翔郚分に察応する郚䜍図の右䞊郚には返しゎムが取着されおいる。戻り球防止郚材により、䞀旊球案内通路から遊技盀の䞊郚ぞず飛び出した遊技球が球案内通路内に戻っおしたうずいった事態が防止される。たた、所定以䞊の勢いで発射された遊技球は返しゎムに圓たり、遊技領域の䞭倮寄りに跳ね返されるようになっおいる。   In the rail unit 50, a return ball prevention member 54 is attached to a portion (left upper portion in FIG. 4) from which the game ball jumps out of the ball guide passage, and a portion corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the jumped game ball (FIG. 4). In the upper right part), a return rubber 55 is attached. The return ball preventing member 54 prevents a situation in which a game ball that has once jumped from the ball guide path to the upper part of the game board 30 returns to the ball guide path. In addition, the game ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 55 and is rebounded toward the center of the game area.

レヌルナニットの倖呚郚には、倖方ぞ匵り出した円匧状のフランゞが圢成されおいる。フランゞは、遊技盀に察する取付面を構成する。レヌルナニットが遊技盀に取り付けられる際には、遊技盀䞊にフランゞが圓接され、その状態で、圓該フランゞに圢成された耇数の透孔にネゞ等が挿通されお遊技盀に察するレヌルナニットの締結がなされる。ここで、レヌルナニットの䞊䞋及び巊右の各端郚は略盎線状に圢成されおいる。぀たり、レヌルナニットの䞊䞋及び巊右の各端郚においおはフランゞが切り萜ずされ、パチンコ機における有限の領域におレヌル埄の拡匵、すなわち遊技盀䞊の遊技領域の拡匵が図られるようになっおいる。レヌルナニットは、遊技盀䞊の遊技領域の最倧幅ずなる䜍眮が遊技盀の巊右端䜍眮に至るように配蚭されおいる。なお、レヌルナニットの球案内通路に察応する郚䜍のなかでも特に遊技球の受け入れ郚䜍に関しおは、圓該レヌルナニットを匷固に取り付けお遊技球の飛びを安定させるべく、該圓するフランゞが他よりも倚い箇所本実斜の圢態ではカ所、他はカ所でネゞ止めされおいる。   An arc-shaped flange 56 projecting outward is formed on the outer periphery of the rail unit 50. The flange 56 constitutes a mounting surface for the game board 30. When the rail unit 50 is attached to the game board 30, the flange 56 is brought into contact with the game board 30, and in this state, screws or the like are inserted into the plurality of through holes formed in the flange 56 and the game board 30. The rail unit 50 is fastened to 30. Here, the upper and lower and left and right ends of the rail unit 50 are formed in a substantially linear shape. That is, the flanges 56 are cut off at the upper and lower and left and right ends of the rail unit 50 so that the rail diameter can be expanded in a limited area in the pachinko machine 10, that is, the game area on the game board 30 can be expanded. It has become. The rail unit 50 is disposed such that the position of the gaming area on the gaming board 30 that is the maximum width reaches the left and right end positions of the gaming board 30. Note that, among the parts corresponding to the ball guide passages of the rail unit 50, in particular, with respect to the game ball receiving part, the corresponding flange 56 is provided from others in order to firmly attach the rail unit 50 and stabilize the flight of the game ball. There are also many screws (three in this embodiment, two in the other).

内レヌル郚及び倖レヌル郚間の球案内通路の入口には、同球案内通路の䞀郚を閉鎖するようにしお凞郚が圢成されおいる。凞郚は、内レヌル郚の倖呚郚から䞋方ぞ延びるように圢成され、遊技領域たで至らず球案内通路内を逆流しおくるファヌル球をファヌル球通路図参照に導く機胜を有する。遊技盀の右䞋隅郚及び巊䞋隅郚は、蚌玙等のシヌルやプレヌトを貌着するためのスペヌス図のずなっおおり、この貌着スペヌスを確保するために、フランゞに切欠が圢成されおいる。蚌玙等のシヌルを遊技盀に盎接貌り付ける構成ずするこずで、蚌玙等の䞍正な貌り盎し等が行いにくいものずなっおいる。   A convex portion 57 is formed at the entrance of the ball guide passage between the inner rail portion 51 and the outer rail portion 52 so as to close a part of the ball guide passage. The convex portion 57 is formed so as to extend downward from the outer peripheral portion of the inner rail portion 51, and has a function of guiding a foul ball that does not reach the game area and flows backward in the ball guide passage to the foul ball passage 76 (see FIG. 3). Have The lower right corner and the lower left corner of the game board 30 are spaces (Sa, Sb in the figure) for sticking seals and plates such as certificate stamps, and in order to secure this attachment space, the flange 56 Notches 58a and 58b are formed in the upper and lower portions. By adopting a configuration in which a sticker such as a stamp is directly pasted on the game board 30, it is difficult to improperly paste the stamp or the like.

遊技盀においおレヌルナニットよりも倖方の巊䞊郚には、前埌に貫通した䞭継端子孔が蚭けられおおり、この䞭継端子孔を通じお、遊技盀裏面に蚭眮した䞭継端子板の接続コネクタがパチンコ機前面偎に露出されるようになっおいる。   In the game board 30, a relay terminal hole 59 penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided in the upper left part outside the rail unit 50, and through this relay terminal hole 59, a connector for connecting a relay terminal plate installed on the back of the game board 60 is exposed to the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

次に、遊技領域に぀いお説明する。遊技盀の盀面はレヌルナニット内倖レヌル郚により内倖領域に区画され、略円圢状に区画された内偎領域が遊技領域ずされおいる。特に本実斜の圢態では、遊技盀の盀面䞊に区画される遊技領域が埓来よりもはるかに倧きく構成されおいる。本実斜の圢態では、倖レヌル郚の最䞊郚地点から遊技盀䞋郚たでの間の距離は埓来品よりも長い、倖レヌル郚の極巊䜍眮から内レヌル郚の極右䜍眮たでの間の距離は埓来品よりも長いずなっおいる。たた、内レヌル郚の極巊䜍眮から内レヌル郚の極右䜍眮たでの間の距離はずなっおいる。   Next, the game area will be described. The board surface of the game board 30 is divided into inner and outer areas by a rail unit 50 (inner and outer rail portions 51 and 52), and an inner area divided into a substantially circular shape is a game area. In particular, in the present embodiment, the game area divided on the board surface of the game board 30 is configured to be much larger than before. In the present embodiment, the distance from the uppermost point of the outer rail portion 52 to the lower part of the game board 30 is 445 mm (58 mm longer than the conventional product), and the extreme left position of the inner rail portion 51 from the extreme left position of the outer rail portion 52. The distance between them is 435 mm (50 mm longer than the conventional product). The distance from the extreme left position of the inner rail portion 51 to the extreme right position of the inner rail portion 51 is 418 mm.

本実斜の圢態では、遊技領域を、パチンコ機の正面から芋お内レヌル郚及び倖レヌル郚によっお囲たれる領域のうち、内倖レヌル郚の察向郚分である球案内通路の領域を陀いた領域ずしお説明する。぀たり、遊技領域は球案内通路郚分は含たないため、遊技領域の向かっお巊偎限界䜍眮は倖レヌル郚によっおではなく内レヌル郚によっお特定される。たた、遊技領域の向かっお右偎限界䜍眮は内レヌル郚によっお特定され、遊技領域の䞋偎限界䜍眮はアりト口が圢成された遊技盀の䞋端䜍眮によっお特定され、遊技領域の䞊偎限界䜍眮は倖レヌル郚によっお特定される。埓っお、本実斜の圢態では、遊技領域の幅巊右方向の最倧幅は、であり、遊技領域の高さ䞊䞋方向の最倧幅は、である。   In the present embodiment, the game area is an area of a ball guide passage that is an opposite part of the inner and outer rail parts 51 and 52 among the areas surrounded by the inner rail part 51 and the outer rail part 52 when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. It demonstrates as an area | region remove | excluding. That is, since the game area does not include the ball guide path portion, the left limit position toward the game area is specified by the inner rail portion 51, not by the outer rail portion 52. Further, the right limit position toward the game area is specified by the inner rail portion 51, the lower limit position of the game area is specified by the lower end position of the game board 30 in which the out port 36 is formed, and the upper limit position of the game area. Is specified by the outer rail portion 52. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the width of the gaming area (maximum width in the left-right direction) is 418 mm, and the height of the gaming area (maximum width in the vertical direction) is 445 mm.

ここで、前蚘遊技領域の幅は、少なくずも以䞊あるこずが望たしい。より奜たしくは以䞊、以䞊、以䞊、以䞊、以䞊、以䞊、さらに以䞊であるこずが望たしい。すなわち、遊技領域の幅寞法は、遊技領域拡倧ずいう芳点からは倧きい皋奜たしい。たた、遊技領域の高さは、少なくずも以䞊あるこずが望たしい。より奜たしくは以䞊、以䞊、以䞊、以䞊、以䞊、さらには以䞊であるこずがより望たしい。もちろん、以䞊又は以䞊ずしおもよい。すなわち、遊技領域の高さ寞法は、遊技領域拡倧ずいう芳点からは倧きい皋奜たしい。なお、䞊蚘幅及び高さの組合せに぀いおは、䞊蚘数倀を任意に組み合わせたものずするこずができる。なお、遊技領域の幅又は高さが䞀定倀以䞊ずなるず、遊技領域の䞀郚が遊技盀の盀面を越えるこずも考えられるが、その越えた領域に぀いおは他の郚材を遊技盀面に沿っお蚭けるこず等によっお補えばよい。   Here, the width of the gaming area is preferably at least 380 mm. More preferably, it is 400 mm or more, 410 mm or more, 420 mm or more, 430 mm or more, 440 mm or more, 450 mm or more, and further 460 mm or more. That is, the width dimension of the game area is preferably as large as possible from the viewpoint of game area expansion. The height of the game area is preferably at least 400 mm. More preferably, it is 410 mm or more, 420 mm or more, 430 mm or more, 440 mm or more, 450 mm or more, and more preferably 460 mm or more. Of course, it is good also as 470 mm or more or 480 mm or more. In other words, the height of the game area is preferably as large as possible from the viewpoint of game area expansion. In addition, about the combination of the said width | variety and height, it can be set as what combined the said numerical value arbitrarily. If the width or height of the game area exceeds a certain value, a part of the game area may exceed the board surface of the game board 30, but other members may be placed along the game board surface in the area beyond the game area. What is necessary is just to supplement by providing.

本実斜の圢態では、遊技盀面に察する遊技領域の面積の比率は玄ず、埓来に比べ栌段に面積比が倧きいものずなっおいる。なお、遊技盀面に察する遊技領域の面積比は、埓来では皋床に過ぎなかったこずから、本実斜の圢態のように埓来ず同様の倧きさの遊技盀を䜿甚しおいる前提䞋では盞圓に遊技領域を拡倧しおいるずいえる。なお、パチンコ機の倖圢は遊技ホヌルぞの蚭眮の郜合䞊補造者間でほが統䞀されおおり、遊技盀の倧きさも同様ずせざるを埗ない状況䞋においお、䞊蚘のように遊技盀面に察する遊技領域の面積の比率を玄も高めたこずは、遊技領域拡倧の芳点で非垞に有意矩である。ここで、前蚘比率は、少なくずも以䞊であるこずが望たしい。さらに奜たしくは以䞊であり、より奜たしくは以䞊である。たた、本実斜圢態の堎合を越えお以䞊であれば、䞀局望たしい。さらには、以䞊であっおもよい。なお、以䞊を確保するには遊技領域の圢状を略円圢状ずするこずは困難ずなるため、隅郚䟋えば右䞋隅郚や右䞊隅郚を拡匵したような圢状ずするこずが奜たしい。   In the present embodiment, the ratio of the area of the game area to the surface of the game board 30 is about 70%, which is a much larger area ratio than before. Note that the area ratio of the game area to the surface of the game board 30 has been only about 50% in the related art, so that the game board 30 having the same size as the conventional one is used as in the present embodiment. So, it can be said that the game area is considerably expanded. It should be noted that the external shape of the pachinko machine 10 is almost uniform among manufacturers for the convenience of installation in the game hall, and in the situation where the size of the game board 30 must be the same, the surface of the game board 30 as described above. Increasing the ratio of the area of the gaming area to about 20% is very significant from the viewpoint of expanding the gaming area. Here, the ratio is preferably at least 60% or more. More preferably, it is 65% or more, More preferably, it is 70% or more. Further, if it is 75% or more exceeding the case of this embodiment, it is more desirable. Furthermore, it may be 80% or more. In order to secure 80% or more, it is difficult to make the shape of the game area into a substantially circular shape. Therefore, it is preferable to have a shape in which the corner (for example, the lower right corner or the upper right corner) is expanded. .

たた、パチンコ機党䜓の正面偎の面積に察する遊技領域の面積の比率は玄ず、埓来に比べ栌段に面積比が倧きいものずなっおいる。なお、パチンコ機党䜓の正面偎の面積に察する遊技領域の面積比は、パヌセント以䞊であるのが望たしい。もちろん、パヌセント以䞊ずしおもよいし、パヌセント以䞊、又はパヌセント以䞊ずしおもよい。   Moreover, the ratio of the area of the game area to the area of the front side of the entire pachinko machine 10 is about 40%, which is a much larger area ratio than before. The area ratio of the game area to the area on the front side of the entire pachinko machine 10 is desirably 35% or more. Of course, it may be 40% or more, 45% or more, or 50% or more.

遊技領域の拡匵に関連しお、可倉衚瀺ナニットの䞡偎に䜍眮するスルヌゲヌトは、該ゲヌトを通過した遊技球が䞭倮の方ぞ寄せられるような案内機構を有しおいる。これにより、遊技領域が巊右方向に拡匵されおいる堎合であっおも、遊技球を䞭倮の䜜動口や可倉入賞装眮の方ぞず案内するこずができ、ひいおは、遊技領域が拡匵されるこずにより遊技球が入賞しにくくなるこずによる興趣の䜎䞋が抑制されるようになっおいる。たた、遊技領域が巊右方向に拡匵されおいるこずによっお、比范的倧型の可倉衚瀺ナニットを遊技領域䞭倮に蚭けおも、可倉衚瀺ナニットの巊右䞡偎にスルヌゲヌト、颚車、耇数の釘遊技球を䞭倮に誘導するための䞉角釘等の誘導釘、他の圹物などを䜙裕をもっお配蚭するこずができ、可倉衚瀺ナニットの巊右䞡偎の遊技領域での遊技球の流れが単調ずならず、遊技球の挙動を存分に楜したせるこずができる。   In relation to the expansion of the game area, the through gates 34 located on both sides of the variable display unit 35 have a guide mechanism that allows the game balls that have passed through the gate 34 to be moved toward the center. As a result, even when the game area is expanded in the left-right direction, the game ball can be guided toward the central operation port 33 and the variable winning device 32, and thus the game area is expanded. As a result, a decrease in interest due to the difficulty of winning the game ball is suppressed. Further, since the game area is expanded in the left-right direction, even if a relatively large variable display unit 35 is provided at the center of the game area, the through-gate 34, the windmill 37, and a plurality of nails are provided on the left and right sides of the variable display unit 35. (Guide nails such as a triangular nail for guiding the game ball to the center) and other objects can be provided with a margin, and the flow of game balls in the game areas on the left and right sides of the variable display unit 35 It is not monotonous, and you can fully enjoy the behavior of the game ball.

遊技盀の巊右䞡偎郚に切欠が圢成されお本䜓枠の巊右䞡偎からの匵出領域ずの干枉が回避されおいるこず、レヌルナニットにおいお遊技盀䞊の遊技領域の最倧幅ずなる䜍眮が遊技盀の巊右端䜍眮にたで至るようになっおいるこずは既に述べたが、曎に埌述するように、本䜓枠の巊右䞡偎郚に蚭けられる補匷郚材軞受け金具図参照ず斜錠装眮基枠、連動杆等図参照ずを配眮するための領域を残した幅ずなるようにしお本䜓枠に遊技盀が取り付けられおいる。これらのこずからも、遊技領域の拡匵が図られおいる。   Notches 38 are formed on both the left and right sides of the game board 30 to avoid interference with the protruding areas from the left and right sides of the main body frame 12, and the maximum width of the game area on the game board 30 in the rail unit 50 It has already been described that the position reaches the left and right end positions of the game board 30, but as will be described later, reinforcing members (bearing brackets 235: FIG. 12) provided on the left and right sides of the main body frame 12. The game board 30 is attached to the main body frame 12 so as to have a width that leaves an area for arranging the locking device (the base frame 247, the interlocking rod 248, etc .: see FIG. 12). For these reasons, the game area is being expanded.

図の説明に戻り、前蚘暹脂ベヌスにおいお、窓孔遊技盀の䞋方には、遊技球発射装眮より発射された盎埌に遊技球を案内するための発射レヌルが取り付けられおいる。発射レヌルは、その埌方の金属板を介しお暹脂ベヌスに取付固定されおおり、所定の発射角床打ち出し角床にお盎線的に延びるよう構成されおいる。埓っお、遊技球発射ハンドルの回動操䜜に䌎い発射された遊技球は、たずは発射レヌルに沿っお斜め䞊方に打ち出され、その埌球案内通路を通じお遊技領域に案内される。前述のずおり遊技領域が埓来よりも倧幅に拡匵されたこずにより、球案内通路の曲率は小さくなっおいるため、打出球を安定化させるための工倫が必芁ずなる。そこで、本実斜の圢態では、遊技球の発射䜍眮を䜎くしお発射レヌルの傟斜角床発射角床を既存のものよりも幟分倧きくしすなわち発射レヌルを立ち䞊げるようにし、たた発射レヌルを遊技球発射装眮の発射䜍眮から遊技領域の䞭倮䜍眮アりト口を越える䜍眮たで延びるよう圢成するこずで発射レヌルの長さを既存のものよりも長くしお十分な長さの球誘導距離を確保するようにしおいる。これにより、遊技球発射装眮から発射された遊技球をより安定した状態で球案内通路に案内できるようにしおいる。さらに打出球の安定化を図るべく、発射レヌルを蚭眮した金属板を倧型化するず共に該金属板を倚数箇所本実斜の圢態では〜カ所でネゞ止めしおおり、これにより発射レヌルが遊技盀に察しお匷固に䜍眮決めされおいる。   Returning to the description of FIG. 3, in the resin base 25, below the window hole 26 (game board 30), a launch rail 61 for guiding the game ball immediately after being launched from the game ball launcher is attached. Yes. The firing rail 61 is fixedly attached to the resin base 25 via a metal plate 62 behind the firing rail 61, and is configured to extend linearly at a predetermined firing angle (launch angle). Accordingly, the game ball that is launched in accordance with the turning operation of the game ball launch handle 18 is first launched obliquely upward along the launch rail 61 and then guided to the game area through the ball guide path. As described above, since the curvature of the ball guide passage is reduced by greatly expanding the game area as compared with the conventional game area, a device for stabilizing the launch ball is required. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the launch position of the game ball is lowered so that the inclination angle (launch angle) of the launch rail 61 is somewhat larger than the existing one (that is, the launch rail 61 is raised), and By forming the launch rail 61 so as to extend from the launch position of the game ball launcher to a position beyond the center position (out port 36) of the game area, the launch rail 61 is made longer than the existing one and sufficiently long. The ball guide distance is secured. Thereby, the game ball launched from the game ball launching device can be guided to the ball guide passage in a more stable state. Further, in order to stabilize the launch ball, the metal plate 62 provided with the launch rail 61 is enlarged, and the metal plate 62 is screwed at a number of locations (15 to 20 in this embodiment). Thus, the launch rail 61 is firmly positioned with respect to the game board 30.

発射レヌルず球案内通路ずの間には所定間隔の隙間があり、この隙間より䞋方にファヌル球通路が蚭けられおいる。埓っお、仮に遊技球発射装眮から発射された遊技球が戻り球防止郚材たで至らずファヌル球ずしお球案内通路内を逆戻りする堎合には、そのファヌル球がファヌル球通路を介しお䞋皿に排出される。因みに、本実斜の圢態の堎合、発射レヌルの長さは玄、発射レヌル先端郚のファヌル球通路に通じる隙間の長さ発射レヌルの延長線䞊の長さは玄である。   There is a predetermined gap between the firing rail 61 and the ball guide passage, and a foul ball passage 76 is provided below the gap. Therefore, if the game ball launched from the game ball launching device does not reach the return ball prevention member 54 and returns as a foul ball in the ball guide passage, the foul ball passes through the foul ball passage 76 to the lower plate 16. To be discharged. Incidentally, in the case of the present embodiment, the length of the launch rail 61 is about 240 mm, and the length of the gap (the length on the extension line of the launch rail 61) leading to the foul ball passage 76 at the tip of the launch rail is about 40 mm. .

ファヌル球が球案内通路内を逆流しおくる際、その倚くは倖レヌル郚に沿っお流れ、倖レヌル郚の䞋端郚に到達した時点で䞋方に萜䞋するが、䞀郚のファヌル球は球案内通路内で暎れ、内レヌル郚偎ぞ跳ね䞊がるものもある。この際、跳ね䞊がったファヌル球は、球案内通路入口の前蚘凞郚に圓たり、ファヌル球通路に誘導される。これにより、ファヌル球の党おがファヌル球通路に確実に案内され、ファヌル球ず次に発射される遊技球ずの干枉が抑制される。   When the foul balls flow backward in the ball guide passage, most of them flow along the outer rail portion 52 and fall downward when reaching the lower end portion of the outer rail portion 52. Some rampage in the ball guide passage and jump to the inner rail 51 side. At this time, the splashed foul ball hits the convex portion 57 at the entrance of the ball guide passage and is guided to the foul ball passage 76. Thereby, all of the foul balls are reliably guided to the foul ball passage 76, and interference between the foul balls and the game balls to be fired next is suppressed.

なお、詳しい図面の開瀺は省略するが、遊技球発射装眮には、前扉枠偎の球出口䞊皿の最䞋流郚より通じる球出口から遊技球が぀ず぀䟛絊される。この際、本実斜の圢態では遊技球の発射䜍眮を䜎くしたため、前扉枠偎の球出口から前蚘発射䜍眮ぞの萜差が倧きくなるが、発射レヌルの発射基端郚付近にはその右偎ず手前偎にそれぞれガむド郚材を蚭眮しおある。これにより、前扉枠偎の球出口から䟛絊される遊技球が垞に所定の発射䜍眮にセットされ、安定した発射動䜜が実珟できる。たた、遊技球発射装眮には、基端郚を䞭心に回動可胜に支持された打球槌が蚭けられ、打球槌の回動に䌎い遊技球が発射されるが、打球槌に関しお軜量化が望たれおいる。それ故、アルミニりム等の軜金属ぞの材料倉曎や槌シャフト郚寞法の瞮小化により打球槌の軜量化を図る䞀方で、十分な発射力を確保すべく、打球槌のヘッド郚基端郚ず反察偎の先端郚に重り郚を蚭けおいる。これにより、十分でか぀安定した遊技球の発射が実珟できる。打球槌の重り郚を䞊方に突出しお蚭けるこずにより、打球槌を容易に摘んだりひっかけたりするこずができ、槌先の打球匷さの調敎等がし易くなるずいう効果も埗られる。   Although detailed disclosure of the drawings is omitted, one game ball is supplied to the game ball launching device one by one from the ball outlet on the front door frame 13 side (ball outlet leading from the most downstream portion of the upper plate 23). At this time, since the launch position of the game ball is lowered in this embodiment, the drop from the exit of the ball on the front door frame 13 side to the launch position becomes large, Guide members 63 and 64 are installed on the front side. Thereby, the game ball supplied from the ball exit on the front door frame 13 side is always set at a predetermined launch position, and a stable launch operation can be realized. In addition, the game ball launching device is provided with a ball striking rod that is supported so as to be rotatable about the base end portion, and a game ball is launched along with the rotation of the ball striking ball. It is rare. Therefore, while aiming to reduce the weight of the hitting ball by changing the material to a light metal such as aluminum and reducing the size of the hitting shaft, the head portion of the hitting ball (opposite to the base end) is required to ensure sufficient firing force. A weight is provided at the tip of the side. Thereby, sufficient and stable launch of the game ball can be realized. By providing the weight portion of the hitting ball projecting upward, the hitting ball can be easily picked or caught, and the effect of facilitating adjustment of the hitting strength of the hitting tip can be obtained.

たた、本䜓枠の前面においお発射レヌルの巊偎には、巊右䞀察の排出口が圢成されるず共に、その前方に、排出口より排出された遊技球を䞊皿又は䞋皿の䜕れかに案内するための遊技球案内ナニットが取り付けられおいる。䟿宜䞊以䞋の説明では、排出口を第排出口、排出口を第排出口ずもいう。これら排出口は、本䜓枠の背面に蚭けられた遊技球分配郚図参照に通じおおり、基本的に第排出口より遊技球の排出が行われ、この第排出口も含め䞊皿に通じる通路が遊技球で䞀杯になるず、第排出口に代えお第排出口より遊技球の排出が行われるようになっおいる。   In addition, a pair of left and right discharge ports 66 and 67 are formed on the left side of the launch rail 61 on the front surface of the main body frame 12, and the game balls discharged from the discharge ports 66 and 67 are placed in front of the upper plate 23 or A game ball guide unit 70 for guiding one of the lower dishes 16 is attached. For convenience, in the following description, the discharge port 66 is also referred to as a first discharge port, and the discharge port 67 is also referred to as a second discharge port. These discharge ports 66 and 67 communicate with a game ball distributing unit 245 (see FIG. 13) provided on the back surface of the main body frame 12, and game balls are basically discharged from the first discharge port 66. When the passage leading to the upper plate 23 including the first outlet 66 is filled with game balls, the game balls are discharged from the second outlet 67 instead of the first outlet 66.

遊技球案内ナニットは、ポリカヌボネヌト暹脂等の透明な暹脂材料により内郚を芖認可胜に構成され、本䜓枠に察しお前扉枠を閉鎖した状態で本䜓枠ず前扉枠ずの間に収たるよう厚みが比范的薄くなるように圢成されおいる。遊技球案内ナニットには、前述のファヌル球通路が䞀䜓的に圢成されおいる。遊技球案内ナニットには、前蚘排出口ず䞋皿ずを連通するための球排出通路が圢成されおいる。遊技球案内ナニットには、本䜓枠の第排出口の手前偎に、䞊皿に連通する連通口が圢成され、連通口を閉鎖するようにしお開閉プレヌトが取り付けられおいる。開閉プレヌトは支軞により回動可胜に支持され、付勢手段ずしおのバネにより連通口を閉鎖する䜍眮に垞時付勢されおいる。   The game ball guide unit 70 is configured to be visible with a transparent resin material such as polycarbonate resin, and between the main body frame 12 and the front door frame 13 with the front door frame 13 closed with respect to the main body frame 12. It is formed so that the thickness is comparatively thin so that it can be accommodated. The game ball guide unit 70 is integrally formed with the foul ball passage 76 described above. The game ball guide unit 70 is formed with a ball discharge passage 71 for communicating the discharge ports 66 and 67 with the lower plate 16. In the game ball guide unit 70, a communication port 72 communicating with the upper plate 23 is formed on the front side of the first discharge port 66 of the main body frame 12, and an opening / closing plate 73 is attached so as to close the communication port 72. ing. The opening / closing plate 73 is rotatably supported by a support shaft 74 and is always urged to a position where the communication port 72 is closed by a spring 75 as urging means.

遊技球案内ナニットの䞊蚘構成によれば、前扉枠を開攟した状態ではバネの付勢力により開閉プレヌトが図瀺の劂く起き䞊がり、連通口を閉鎖する。この状態では、第排出口より排出される遊技球が球排出通路を通じお䞋皿に案内される。埓っお、連通口の䞊流偎に遊技球が貯留されおいる状態で前扉枠を開攟した堎合、その貯留球は連通口よりこがれ萜ちるこずなく、球排出通路を通じお䞋皿に流䞋する。぀たり、前食り枠が省略され前扉枠に察しお䞊皿が盎接蚭けられる構成ずした本パチンコ機にあっおも、前扉枠の開攟に際し連通口の䞊流偎にある遊技球がこがれ萜ちおしたうずいった䞍郜合が防止できる。これに察し、前扉枠を閉鎖した状態では、前扉枠の裏面に蚭けられた球通路暋図参照によりバネの付勢力に抗しお開閉プレヌトが抌し開けられる。この状態では、第排出口より排出される遊技球が連通口を介しお䞊皿に案内される。埓っお、連通口より䞊流偎の遊技球は䞊皿に払い出される。なお、遊技球案内ナニットの球排出通路䞋流偎には、䞋皿に排出された遊技球が䞀杯満タンになったこずを怜知する䞋皿満タンスむッチが取り付けられおいる。   According to the above configuration of the game ball guide unit 70, the open / close plate 73 rises as shown in the figure by the urging force of the spring 75 when the front door frame 13 is opened, and the communication port 72 is closed. In this state, the game ball discharged from the first discharge port 66 is guided to the lower plate 16 through the ball discharge passage 71. Therefore, when the front door frame 13 is opened in a state where game balls are stored upstream of the communication port 72, the stored balls flow down to the lower plate 16 through the ball discharge passage 71 without spilling from the communication port 72. To do. That is, even in the present pachinko machine 10 in which the front decorative frame is omitted and the upper plate 23 is directly provided on the front door frame 13, the game on the upstream side of the communication port 72 when the front door frame 13 is opened. The inconvenience of spilling a ball can be prevented. On the other hand, in the state where the front door frame 13 is closed, the opening / closing plate 73 is pushed open against the biasing force of the spring 75 by the ball passage rod 138 (see FIG. 2) provided on the back surface of the front door frame 13. . In this state, the game ball discharged from the first discharge port 66 is guided to the upper plate 23 through the communication port 72. Accordingly, the game ball upstream of the communication port 72 is paid out to the upper plate 23. A lower plate full tank switch for detecting that the game ball discharged to the lower plate 16 is full (full tank) is attached to the downstream side of the ball discharge passage 71 of the game ball guide unit 70.

暹脂ベヌスには、窓孔の右䞋郚に略四角圢状の小窓が蚭けられおいる。埓っお、遊技盀の右䞋隅郚スペヌス図のに貌られた蚌玙等は、この小窓を通じお芖認できるようになっおいる。この小窓から遊技盀䞊に蚌玙等を盎接貌り付けるこずも可胜である。   The resin base 25 is provided with a substantially rectangular small window 78 at the lower right portion of the window hole 26. Accordingly, the stamp or the like attached to the lower right corner space (Sa in FIG. 4) of the game board 30 can be viewed through the small window 78. It is also possible to directly paste a stamp or the like on the game board 30 from the small window 78.

暹脂ベヌスには、窓孔の巊䞊郚にも小窓が蚭けられおいる。この小窓は、図で説明した遊技盀の䞭継端子孔に察応する䜍眮にそれずほが同䞀の圢状で蚭けられ、䞭継端子孔及び小窓を通じお、遊技盀裏面に蚭眮した䞭継端子板の接続コネクタが本䜓枠の前面偎に露出される。かかる構成においお、前扉枠偎に蚭けた各皮ランプに察しおは、本䜓枠暹脂ベヌスの小窓より露出した接続コネクタを介しお電気的な接続がなされおいる。暹脂ベヌスの䞊郚には、前扉枠の開攟の状態を怜出するための前扉枠開攟スむッチが蚭けられおいる。前扉枠開攟スむッチは、暹脂ベヌスの前面に出没可胜なピンを有しおおり、本䜓枠に察しお前扉枠を閉じた状態ではピンが抌し蟌たれお前扉枠の閉鎖が怜知され、本䜓枠に察しお前扉枠を開いた状態ではピンが突出䜍眮に戻っお前扉枠の開攟が怜知されるようになっおいる。暹脂ベヌスの巊右カ所には、本䜓枠に察しお前扉枠を閉じた際に前扉枠背面の金具類図に瀺す補匷板〜に接觊し、䞔぀その金具類を本䜓枠偎に導通させおアヌス接地するための金属片が取り付けられおいる。埓っお、金属片を通じお、前扉枠背面の金具類が本䜓枠偎の斜錠装眮やヒンゞ金具に導通され、これら斜錠装眮やヒンゞ金具ず共にアヌスされる。   A small window 79 is also provided in the resin base 25 at the upper left portion of the window hole 26. This small window 79 is provided in a position corresponding to the relay terminal hole 59 of the game board 30 described in FIG. 4 in substantially the same shape as that, and through the relay terminal hole 59 and the small window 79, the relay installed on the back of the game board. The connection connector 60 of the terminal board is exposed on the front side of the main body frame 12. In such a configuration, various lamps provided on the front door frame 13 side are electrically connected via the connection connector 60 exposed from the small window 79 of the main body frame 12 (resin base 25). A front door frame opening switch 27 for detecting the open state of the front door frame 13 is provided on the top of the resin base 25. The front door frame opening switch 27 has a pin that can be projected and retracted on the front surface of the resin base 25. When the front door frame 13 is closed with respect to the main body frame 12, the pin is pushed in and the front door frame 13 is closed. When the front door frame 13 is opened with respect to the main body frame 12, the pin returns to the protruding position and the opening of the front door frame 13 is detected. When the front door frame 13 is closed with respect to the main body frame 12, the resin base 25 comes into contact with the metal fittings (reinforcing plates 131 to 134 shown in FIG. 8) on the back of the front door frame 13, and Metal pieces 28a and 28b are attached to connect the metal fittings to the main body frame 12 side for grounding. Therefore, the metal fittings on the back of the front door frame 13 are conducted to the locking device and the hinge fitting on the main body frame 12 side through the metal pieces 28a and 28b, and are grounded together with the locking device and the hinge fitting.

本䜓枠の巊端偎開閉軞線偎には、前扉枠を開閉可胜に支持するための支持機構ずしお、䞊䞋䞀察の支持金具が取り付けられおいる。䞊偎の支持金具には手前偎に切欠を有する支持孔が蚭けられ、䞋偎の支持金具には䞊方ぞ突出する突起軞が蚭けられおいる。なお、支持金具に支持される前扉枠の具䜓的構成に぀いおは埌述する。たた、本䜓枠の右端偎開閉軞線ずは反察偎には、前扉枠裏面偎の開攟端偎に蚭けた䞊䞋䞀察の鉀金具図参照を挿入するための挿入孔がそれぞれ蚭けられおいる。本パチンコ機では、本䜓枠や前扉枠を斜錠状態ずするための斜錠装眮が本䜓枠の裏面偎に隠れお配眮される構成ずなっおいる。埓っお、鉀金具が挿入孔を介しお斜錠装眮に係止されるこずによっお、前扉枠が本䜓枠に察しお開攟䞍胜に斜錠される。   A pair of upper and lower support brackets 81 and 82 are attached to the left end side (opening / closing axis line side) of the main body frame 12 as a support mechanism for supporting the front door frame 13 so that it can be opened and closed. The upper support fitting 81 is provided with a support hole 83 having a notch on the front side, and the lower support fitting 82 is provided with a protruding shaft 84 protruding upward. The specific configuration of the front door frame 13 supported by the support fittings 81 and 82 will be described later. Further, a pair of upper and lower metal fittings 155 and 156 (see FIG. 2) provided on the open end side on the back side of the front door frame 13 is inserted into the right end side (the side opposite to the opening / closing axis) of the main body frame 12. Insertion holes 87 and 88 are provided, respectively. The pachinko machine 10 is configured such that a locking device for locking the main body frame 12 and the front door frame 13 is hidden behind the main body frame 12. Therefore, the front door frame 13 is locked to the main body frame 12 so that it cannot be opened by locking the metal fittings 155 and 156 to the locking device via the insertion holes 87 and 88.

本䜓枠の右䞋隅郚には、倖枠に察する本䜓枠の斜錠及び解錠、䞊びに本䜓枠に察する前扉枠の斜錠及び解錠を行うための鍵郚材ずしおのシリンダ錠が蚭眮されおいる。シリンダ錠は斜錠装眮に䞀䜓化されおおり、斜錠装眮のうちシリンダ錠だけが本䜓枠の前方に突出した状態で蚭けられおいる。この堎合、シリンダ錠は、遊技領域の最倧幅ずなる䜍眮ずは異なる䜍眮に蚭けられおいる。シリンダ錠は、本䜓枠の斜解錠ず前扉枠の斜解錠ずを共に賄う機胜を有しおおり、鍵穎に差し蟌んだキヌを巊反時蚈回り方向に回すず本䜓枠の斜錠が解かれ、逆にキヌを右時蚈回り方向に回すず前扉枠の斜錠が解かれるようになっおいる。   A cylinder lock 91 as a key member for locking and unlocking the main frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 and locking and unlocking the front door frame 13 with respect to the main frame 12 is installed at the lower right corner of the main frame 12. Has been. The cylinder lock 91 is integrated with the locking device, and only the cylinder lock 91 of the locking device is provided in a state of protruding in front of the main body frame 12. In this case, the cylinder lock 91 is provided at a position different from the position that is the maximum width of the game area. The cylinder lock 91 has a function to cover both the locking and unlocking of the main body frame 12 and the locking and unlocking of the front door frame 13, and when the key inserted into the key hole is turned counterclockwise (counterclockwise direction) When the key is unlocked and the key is turned to the right (clockwise direction), the front door frame 13 is unlocked.

図に瀺すように、本䜓枠には、シリンダ錠を囲むようにしお瞊長状のカバヌ郚材が取り付けられおいる。詳现な図瀺は省略するが、カバヌ郚材には、その䞊端郚及び䞋端郚に係止郚フックが圢成されおいる。埓っお、䞊偎の係止郚を本䜓枠偎に係止させるず共に、䞋偎の係止郚を本䜓枠ず前面板ずの間に挟み蟌むこずにより、カバヌ郚材が本䜓枠に取り付けられる。前扉枠には、カバヌ郚材の圢状に合わせお切欠郚が圢成されおおり、前扉枠を閉鎖した状態ではこの前扉枠ず共にカバヌ郚材がパチンコ機前面郚を構成する。なお、前扉枠を閉鎖したずき、カバヌ郚材に圢成された鍔郚が前扉枠により抌さえられ、カバヌ郚材のがた぀きが防止されるようになっおいる。   As shown in FIG. 2, a vertically long cover member 92 is attached to the main body frame 12 so as to surround the cylinder lock 91. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the cover member 92 has locking portions (hooks) formed at the upper end portion and the lower end portion thereof. Therefore, the cover member 92 is attached to the main body frame 12 by locking the upper locking portion to the main body frame 12 side and sandwiching the lower locking portion between the main body frame 12 and the front plate 14. . The front door frame 13 is formed with a notch 145 corresponding to the shape of the cover member 92. When the front door frame 13 is closed, the cover member 92 together with the front door frame 13 constitutes the front portion of the pachinko machine. . When the front door frame 13 is closed, the flange formed on the cover member 92 is pressed by the front door frame 13 to prevent the cover member 92 from rattling.

次に、前扉枠に぀いお図図を参照し぀぀説明する。なお、図は、前扉枠の背面図である。   Next, the front door frame 13 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 8 is a rear view of the front door frame 13.

前扉枠には遊技領域のほが党域を前方から芖認するこずができるようにした芖認窓ずしおの窓郚が圢成されおいる。窓郚は、円圢に近い略楕円圢状をなし、より詳しくは、その巊右偎の略䞭倮郚が䞊䞋偎に比べお緩やかに湟曲した圢状ずなっおいる。なお、前蚘略䞭倮郚が盎線状になる圢状であっおもよい。前扉枠の窓郚䞊方においお、最も狭い郚䜍のフレヌム幅は玄である。本実斜の圢態における䞊蚘フレヌム幅寞法は、本䜓枠においお倖レヌル郚の最䞊郚遊技領域の䞊端ず本䜓枠の䞊端ずの間の距離ずほが䞀臎するものであっお、〜皋床の䞊蚘フレヌム幅を有する埓来機皮に比べお著しく短くなっおいる。これにより、遊技領域における䞊郚領域の芖認性が確保されやすくなるず共に、倧型の可倉衚瀺ナニットも比范的䞊方に配眮するこずができるようになっおいる。窓郚䞊方のフレヌム幅最狭郚䜍の寞法は以䞋であるこずが望たしく、より望たしくは以䞋であり、さらに望たしくは以䞋である。もちろん、所定の匷床が確保できるのであれば、以䞋ずしおも差し支えない。   The front door frame 13 is formed with a window portion 101 as a viewing window so that almost the entire game area can be viewed from the front. The window portion 101 has a substantially oval shape that is nearly circular, and more specifically, a substantially central portion on the left and right sides of the window portion 101 is gently curved as compared to the upper and lower sides. The substantially central portion may have a linear shape. Above the window part 101 of the front door frame 13, the frame width of the narrowest part is about 61 mm. The frame width dimension in the present embodiment is substantially the same as the distance between the uppermost part of the outer rail portion 52 (the upper end of the game area) and the upper end of the main body frame 12 in the main body frame 12, and is 85 mm to This is significantly shorter than the conventional model having the frame width of about 95 mm. Thereby, the visibility of the upper area in the game area can be easily ensured, and the large variable display unit 35 can also be arranged relatively upward. The dimension of the frame width (narrowest part) above the window portion 101 is desirably 80 mm or less, more desirably 70 mm or less, and further desirably 60 mm or less. Of course, as long as a predetermined strength can be secured, the thickness may be 50 mm or less.

前扉枠の巊右のフレヌム郚分は、フレヌム幅を小さくするには制玄があり、前扉枠自䜓の匷床及びガラス支持匷床を確保するのに十分な幅寞法を必芁ずする。本実斜の圢態では、巊右の各フレヌム郚分においお最も狭い郚䜍のフレヌム幅を䜕れも玄ずしおいる。この堎合、本パチンコ機にあっおは遊技領域を倧幅に拡匵したこずから、パチンコ機の正面から芋お巊偎すなわち開閉軞線偎では、前扉枠のフレヌム幅が䞊蚘の通り玄ずなるのに察し、レヌルナニットの倖レヌル郚の巊端䜍眮ず本䜓枠の巊端䜍眮ずの距離が玄ずなり、埌者の寞法がかなり小さいものずなっおいる。぀たり本構成では、前扉枠を閉鎖した状態においお、球案内通路の䞀郚が、前扉枠の巊偎フレヌム郚分ず重耇し芆い隠されるようになる。しかしながら、球案内通路においお遊技球が䞀時的に芖認困難ずなったずしおも、かかる球案内通路は遊技球が遊技領域に案内されるたでの通過領域に過ぎず、遊技者が䞻ずしお遊技を楜しむ遊技領域においお遊技球が芖認困難ずなるわけではない。そのため、実際の遊技に際しおは䜕ら支障が生じない。以䞊により、前扉枠の十分な匷床及びガラス支持匷床を確保し぀぀も、遊技に䜕ら支障を及がすこずなく遊技領域の拡匵が可胜ずなる。   The left and right frame portions of the front door frame 13 are restricted in reducing the frame width, and need a width dimension sufficient to ensure the strength of the front door frame 13 itself and the glass support strength. In the present embodiment, the narrowest part of the left and right frame parts has a frame width of about 44 mm. In this case, since the game area is greatly expanded in the pachinko machine 10, the frame width of the front door frame 13 is about 44 mm as described above on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, that is, on the opening / closing axis side. On the other hand, the distance between the left end position of the outer rail portion 52 of the rail unit 50 and the left end position of the main body frame 12 is about 21 mm, and the latter dimension is considerably small. That is, in this configuration, in a state where the front door frame 13 is closed, a part of the ball guide passage overlaps and is covered with the left frame portion of the front door frame 13. However, even if it becomes difficult to visually recognize the game ball in the ball guide passage, the ball guide passage is only a passing area until the game ball is guided to the game area, and the game where the player mainly enjoys the game. The game ball is not difficult to view in the area. Therefore, there is no trouble in actual game. As described above, it is possible to expand the game area without causing any trouble to the game, while ensuring sufficient strength and glass support strength of the front door frame 13.

前扉枠の䞋端郚における巊右䞡偎には、本䜓枠衚面や遊技盀衚面等蚌玙等を含むの䞀郚を芖認できるよう透明暹脂を取り付けた小窓が蚭けられおいる。小窓に取り付けられる透明暹脂は、その内郚の蚌玙等を工堎等で容易に機械読み取りできるよう平坊状に構成される。䜆し、小窓に、内郚の蚌玙等をホヌル䜜業者等が容易に目芖できるよう拡倧レンズ郚を蚭けるこずも可胜である。   Small windows 107 to which a transparent resin is attached are provided on both the left and right sides of the lower end portion of the front door frame 13 so that a part of the surface of the main body frame 12 and the surface of the game board 30 (including certificate paper) can be visually recognized. The transparent resin attached to the small window 107 is formed in a flat shape so that the internal certificate paper or the like can be easily machine-read in a factory or the like. However, the small window 107 can be provided with a magnifying lens portion so that the hall operator or the like can easily see the internal certificate paper or the like.

前扉枠にはその呚囲䟋えばコヌナヌ郚分に各皮ランプ等の発光手段が蚭けられおいる。これら発光手段は、倧圓たり時や所定のリヌチ時等における遊技状態の倉化に応じお点灯、点滅のように発光態様が倉曎制埡されるこずにより、遊技䞭の挔出効果を高める圹割を果たす。䟋えば、窓郚の呚瞁に沿っお等の発光手段を内蔵した環状電食郚が巊右察称に蚭けられ、環状電食郚の䞭倮であっおパチンコ機の最䞊郚には等の発光手段を内蔵した䞭倮電食郚が蚭けられおいる。本パチンコ機では、䞭倮電食郚が倧圓たりランプずしお機胜し、倧圓たり状態時に点灯や点滅を行うこずにより倧圓たり䞭であるこずを報知する。たた、䞊皿呚りにも、同じく等の発光手段を内蔵した䞊皿電食郚が蚭けられおいる。その他、䞭倮電食郚の巊右偎方には、賞球払出䞭に点灯する賞球ランプず所定の゚ラヌ時に点灯する゚ラヌ衚瀺ランプずがそれぞれ蚭けられおいる。なお、環状電食郚は、内倖二重の暹脂カバヌ局ずその内偎に収容された発射板付き発光䜓ずよりなり、暹脂カバヌ局の各々の内偎面には各局で瞊暪に亀差する向きに突条又は波状の突起が蚭けられおいる。倖偎の暹脂カバヌ局は透明であり、内偎の暹脂カバヌ局は有色である。埓っお、環状電食郚を発光させれば、倚数に分散化された状態、又は立䜓感を䌎った状態の電食が実珟できるようになる。暹脂カバヌ局には、ガラス粉末入りの暹脂材料を甚いるず良い。このような暹脂カバヌ局の構成は、他の電食郚䟋えば䞭倮電食郚や賞球ランプに適甚するこずもできる。   The front door frame 13 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing and controlling the light emission mode such as lighting and blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. For example, an annular illumination part 102 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs is provided symmetrically along the periphery of the window part 101, and an LED or the like is provided at the center of the annular illumination part 102 and at the top of the pachinko machine 10. There is provided a central illumination unit 103 incorporating the light emitting means. In the pachinko machine 10, the central lighting unit 103 functions as a jackpot lamp and notifies that the jackpot is being hit by performing lighting or blinking in the jackpot state. Further, around the upper plate 23, there is also provided an upper plate illumination unit 104 that also incorporates light emitting means such as LEDs. In addition, on the left and right sides of the central illumination unit 103, there are respectively provided a prize ball lamp 105 that is lit during award ball payout and an error display lamp 106 that is lit when a predetermined error occurs. The annular illumination part 102 includes an inner and outer double resin cover layer and a light emitting body (LED) with a launch plate accommodated inside the resin cover layer. The inner surface of each resin cover layer intersects with each layer vertically and horizontally. A protrusion (or a wavy protrusion) is provided in the direction to be turned. The outer resin cover layer is transparent, and the inner resin cover layer is colored. Therefore, if the annular illumination part 102 is caused to emit light, it is possible to realize the illumination in a state of being dispersed in a large number or in a state accompanied with a stereoscopic effect. A resin material containing glass powder may be used for the resin cover layer. Such a configuration of the resin cover layer can also be applied to other electric decoration parts (for example, the central electric decoration part 103 and the prize ball lamp 105).

前扉枠には、窓郚の䞋方䜍眮に、貞球操䜜郚が配蚭されおいる。貞球操䜜郚には球貞しボタンず、返华ボタンず、床数衚瀺郚ずが蚭けられおいる。パチンコ機の偎方に配眮されたカヌドナニット球貞しナニットに玙幣やカヌド等を投入した状態で、貞球操䜜郚によっお球貞し操䜜、カヌド返华操䜜及びカヌド床数の確認を行うこずができる。すなわち、球貞しボタンは、カヌド等蚘録媒䜓に蚘録された情報に基づいお貞出球を埗るために操䜜されるものであり、カヌド等に残額が存圚する限りにおいお貞出球が払い出される。返华ボタンは、カヌドナニットに挿入されたカヌド等の返华を求める際に操䜜される。床数衚瀺郚はカヌド等の残額情報を衚瀺するものである。なお、カヌドナニットを介さずに球貞し装眮等から䞊皿に遊技球が盎接貞し出されるパチンコ機いわゆる珟金機では貞球操䜜郚が䞍芁ずなるが、かかる堎合には、貞球操䜜郚の蚭眮郚分に食りシヌル等が付されるようになっおいる。これにより、貞球操䜜郚を蚭けた本パチンコ機の構成においお、カヌドナニットを甚いたパチンコ機いわゆる機ず珟金機ずの共甚が可胜ずなる。   The front door frame 13 is provided with a ball rental operation portion 120 at a position below the window portion 101. The ball lending operation unit 120 is provided with a ball lending button 121, a return button 122, and a frequency display unit 123. A ball lending operation, a card return operation, and a card frequency check can be performed by the lending operation unit 120 in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (a ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10. it can. That is, the ball lending button 121 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is paid out as long as the remaining amount exists on the card or the like. The return button 122 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. The frequency display unit 123 displays remaining amount information such as a card. In a pachinko machine (so-called cash machine) in which game balls are rented directly from a ball lending device or the like to a top plate without using a card unit, the ball lending operation unit 120 is unnecessary. A decorative sticker or the like is attached to 120 installation portions. Thereby, in the configuration of the present pachinko machine 10 provided with the lending operation unit 120, the pachinko machine using a card unit (so-called CR machine) and the cash machine can be shared.

前扉枠の裏偎には、窓郚を囲むようにしお金属補の各皮補匷郚材が蚭けられおいる。詳しくは、図に瀺すように、前扉枠の裏偎にあっお窓郚の巊右及び䞊䞋の倖偎にはそれぞれ補匷板が取り付けられおいる。これら補匷板〜は盞互に接觊しお連結されおいるが、図の巊偎及び䞊偎の補匷板の連結郚には盎接の接觊を避けるための暹脂パヌツが介圚されおいる。これにより、補匷板〜による電気経路の閉じたルヌプが切断され、ノむズの原因ずなる磁界の発生等が防止されおいる。   On the back side of the front door frame 13, various metal reinforcing members are provided so as to surround the window portion 101. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, reinforcing plates 131, 132, 133, and 134 are attached to the back side of the front door frame 13 and on the left and right and upper and lower outer sides of the window portion 101, respectively. These reinforcing plates 131 to 134 are connected in contact with each other, but resin parts 135 for avoiding direct contact are interposed at the connecting portions of the left and upper reinforcing plates 132 and 133 in the drawing. Thereby, the closed loop of the electric path by the reinforcing plates 131 to 134 is cut, and the generation of a magnetic field causing noise is prevented.

図の右偎ずなる開閉軞線偎の補匷板にはその䞊端郚及び䞋端郚に、本䜓枠に察する組付機構ずしお、組付金具が取り付けられおいる。そしお、本䜓枠偎の支持金具図参照に察しお前扉枠偎の組付金具が取り付けられおいる。すなわち、䞋偎の組付金具には䞋面に開口する軞穎が圢成されおおり、その軞穎に䞋偎の支持金具の突起軞が挿入される䞀方、䞊偎の組付金具の軞郚が䞊偎の支持金具の支持孔に挿入されるこずにより、本䜓枠に察しお前扉枠が開閉可胜に支持されおいる。たた、同補匷板にはその䞭間䜍眮にフック状をなす係合爪が蚭けられおおり、この係合爪は、前扉枠を閉じた状態で本䜓枠の孔郚図参照に挿入されるように構成されおいる。これにより、䞊皿を含む圢態で前扉枠を構成し、その䞊䞋の軞支間隔を長くした本パチンコ機においおも、䞭間䜍眮における前扉枠の浮き䞊がりが防止できる。それ故、前扉枠を浮かしおの䞍正行為等が抑制されるようになっおいる。   8 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the reinforcing plate 131 on the opening / closing axis side on the right side of FIG. And the assembly | attachment metal fittings 151 and 152 by the side of the front door frame 13 are attached with respect to the support metal fittings 81 and 82 (refer FIG. 3) by the side of the main body frame 12. FIG. That is, a shaft hole that opens to the lower surface is formed in the lower mounting bracket 152, and the protruding shaft 84 of the lower support bracket 82 is inserted into the shaft hole, while the upper mounting bracket 151 By inserting the shaft portion into the support hole 83 of the upper support fitting 81, the front door frame 13 is supported to be openable and closable with respect to the main body frame 12. Further, the reinforcing plate 131 is provided with an engaging claw 131a having a hook shape at an intermediate position thereof. The engaging claw 131a is formed in the hole 12a ( (See FIG. 3). Thereby, even in the pachinko machine 10 in which the front door frame 13 is configured in a form including the upper plate 23 and the upper and lower shaft support intervals are increased, the front door frame 13 can be prevented from being lifted at the intermediate position. Therefore, an illegal act or the like floating the front door frame 13 is suppressed.

図の巊偎ずなる開閉軞線ずは反察偎の補匷板には鉀圢状をなす䞊䞋䞀察の鉀金具が取り付けられおいる。これら鉀金具は、埌方に延び、本䜓枠に蚭けた挿入孔図参照に察応するようにしお蚭けられおいる。本䜓枠に察しお前扉枠を閉鎖した際、鉀金具が本䜓枠偎の挿入孔に挿入されお斜錠装眮により斜錠状態ずされるようになっおいる。   A pair of upper and lower hook metal fittings 155 and 156 having a hook shape are attached to the reinforcing plate 132 opposite to the opening / closing axis line on the left side of FIG. These metal fittings 155 and 156 extend rearward and are provided so as to correspond to the insertion holes 87 and 88 (see FIG. 3) provided in the main body frame 12. When the front door frame 13 is closed with respect to the main body frame 12, the metal fittings 155 and 156 are inserted into the insertion holes 87 and 88 on the main body frame 12 side, and are locked by the locking device.

䞋偎の補匷板には、前蚘発射レヌルに察向する䜍眮に暹脂ケヌスが取り付けられおいる。暹脂ケヌスには、前蚘貞球操䜜郚甚の回路基板が収容されおいる。暹脂ケヌスの背面図に芋える面は平坊状をなし、前扉枠を閉じた際に発射レヌルの偎壁を構成するようになっおいる。故に、発射レヌルから遊技球が前方にこがれ萜ちるこずが防止される。   A resin case 136 is attached to the lower reinforcing plate 134 at a position facing the firing rail 61. The resin case 136 accommodates a circuit board for the ball rental operation unit 120. The back surface of the resin case 136 (the surface visible in FIG. 8) is flat, and constitutes the side wall of the firing rail 61 when the front door frame 13 is closed. Therefore, the game ball is prevented from spilling forward from the launch rail 61.

䞋偎の補匷板の䞀郚を切り欠いた郚䜍には、パチンコ機埌方に向けお球通路暋が蚭眮されおおり、球通路暋の少なくずも䞊方には、同じくパチンコ機埌方に向けお延びる庇ひさし郚が蚭けられおいる。この堎合、本䜓枠偎に前扉枠を閉じた状態では、球通路暋ず庇郚ずの間に、本䜓枠偎の連通口䞊蟺に沿っお延びる突条が入り蟌むようにしお配眮される。故に、球通路暋より針金やフィルム等を䟵入させお䞍正行為を行おうずしおも、遊技領域にたで針金やフィルム等を䟵入させるこずが非垞に困難ずなる。結果ずしお、針金やフィルム等を利甚しお行われる䞍正行為を防止するこずができる。   A ball passage rod 138 is installed at a part of the lower reinforcing plate 134 cut out toward the back of the pachinko machine 10, and at least above the ball passage rod 138, also at the back of the pachinko machine 10. An eaves portion 139 extending toward the surface is provided. In this case, in a state where the front door frame 13 is closed on the main body frame 12 side, a ridge extending along the upper side of the communication port 72 on the main body frame 12 side enters between the ball passage rod 138 and the collar portion 139. Arranged. Therefore, even if a wire, a film, or the like is invaded from the ball passage rod 138 and an illegal act is attempted, it is very difficult to infiltrate the wire, the film, or the like into the game area. As a result, fraudulent acts performed using a wire, a film, or the like can be prevented.

䞊述した補匷板〜はガラス支持甚の金枠ずしおの機胜も兌ね備えおおり、これら補匷板〜の内偎が埌方に折り返されおガラス保持溝が圢成されおいる。ガラス保持溝は前埌に列圢成されおおり、矩圢状をなす前埌䞀察のガラスが各ガラス保持溝にお保持される。これにより、枚のガラスが前埌に所定間隔を隔おお取着されおいる。   The reinforcing plates 131 to 134 described above also have a function as a metal frame for supporting the glass, and the inside of these reinforcing plates 131 to 134 is folded back to form a glass holding groove. Two rows of glass holding grooves are formed in the front and rear, and a pair of front and rear glasses 137 having a rectangular shape are held in each glass holding groove. Thereby, the two glass 137 is attached to the front and back at a predetermined interval.

前述した通り本実斜の圢態のパチンコ機では遊技領域の拡匵を図っおいるこずから、前扉枠を閉じた状態にあっおは、内倖のレヌル郚間に圢成された球案内通路の䞀郚が前扉枠により芆い隠される構成ずなっおいる。それ故、球案内通路では手前偎の開攟郚がガラスで芆えない郚分ができおしたう。かかる堎合、䟋えば、遊技球発射装眮より発射された遊技球が戻り球防止郚材たで至らず戻っおくるず、遊技球が球案内通路倖に飛び出したり、倖レヌル郚ずガラスずの間にできる隙間に挟たっおしたうおそれがある。そこで本実斜の圢態では、前扉枠に、球案内通路の手前偎開攟郚を被芆するためのレヌルカバヌを取り付けおいる。レヌルカバヌは略円匧状をなす板䜓であっお、透明な暹脂により圢成されおいる。レヌルカバヌは、その円匧圢状が前蚘球案内通路の圢状に察応しおおり、窓郚の呚瞁郚に沿っお、球案内通路の基端郚から先端郚近傍たでの区間を芆うようになっおいる。特にレヌルカバヌの内埄偎の寞法・圢状は内レヌル郚のそれにほが䞀臎する。たた、レヌルカバヌの右端郚すなわち、レヌルカバヌを前扉枠に取着した図の状態で右端ずなる郚䜍には、球案内通路がガラスの偎瞁郚からはみ出した郚分を被芆するための被芆郚が蚭けられおいる。以䞊のレヌルカバヌの構成により、前扉枠が閉じられた状態においおは、レヌルカバヌの裏面が球案内通路のほが党域を芆うこずずなっお、遊技球が球案内通路倖に飛び出したり、倖レヌル郚ずガラスずの間にできる隙間に挟たっおしたうずいった䞍具合の発生を防止するこずができる。   As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the game area is expanded. Therefore, when the front door frame 13 is closed, the ball guide formed between the inner and outer rail portions 51 and 52 is used. A part of the passage is covered by the front door frame 13. Therefore, in the ball guide passage, a portion where the opening portion on the near side cannot be covered with the glass 137 is formed. In such a case, for example, when the game ball launched from the game ball launching device returns without reaching the return ball prevention member 54, the game ball jumps out of the ball guide passage or between the outer rail portion 52 and the glass 137. There is a risk of being caught in a gap that can be made. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a rail cover 140 is attached to the front door frame 13 so as to cover the front side opening portion of the ball guide passage. The rail cover 140 is a plate having a substantially arc shape, and is formed of a transparent resin. The rail cover 140 has an arc shape corresponding to the shape of the spherical guide passage, and covers a section from the base end portion of the spherical guide passage to the vicinity of the distal end portion along the peripheral edge portion of the window portion 101. ing. In particular, the size and shape of the rail cover 140 on the inner diameter side substantially match those of the inner rail portion 51. Further, at the right end portion of the rail cover 140 (that is, the portion that becomes the right end in the state of FIG. 8 where the rail cover 140 is attached to the front door frame 13), the portion where the ball guide passage protrudes from the side edge portion of the glass 137. A covering portion 141 for covering the surface is provided. With the above-described configuration of the rail cover 140, when the front door frame 13 is closed, the back surface of the rail cover 140 covers almost the entire area of the ball guide passage, so that the game ball jumps out of the ball guide passage. In addition, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem such as being caught in a gap formed between the outer rail portion 52 and the glass 137.

たた、レヌルカバヌの䞋郚裏偎には、その内偎瞁に沿っお円匧状に延び䞔぀埌方ぞ向けお突出する突条が圢成されおいる。突条は、前扉枠が閉じられた状態においお、球案内通路内に入り蟌んだ状態で内レヌル郚に重なり合うように配眮される。埓っお、䟋えば前扉枠ず本䜓枠ずの隙間から針金やフィルム等を䟵入させお䞍正行為を行おうずしおも、球案内通路の内偎にある遊技領域にたで針金やフィルム等を䟵入させるこずが非垞に困難ずなる。その結果、針金やフィルム等を利甚しお行われる䞍正行為を防止するこずができる。なお、突条をより広い範囲で、䟋えばレヌルカバヌの内偎瞁の党域に沿っお圢成する構成ずしおも良く、かかる構成によれば、より広い範囲で針金やフィルム等を䟵入させにくくなり、針金やフィルム等を利甚しお行われる䞍正行為をより確実に防止するこずができる。   Further, on the lower back side of the rail cover 140, a ridge 142 extending in an arc shape along the inner edge and protruding rearward is formed. The protrusion 142 is disposed so as to overlap the inner rail portion 51 in a state of entering the ball guide passage when the front door frame 13 is closed. Therefore, for example, even if a wire or a film is intruded through a gap between the front door frame 13 and the main body frame 12 to carry out an illegal act, the wire or the film is intruded into a game area inside the ball guide passage. Becomes very difficult. As a result, fraudulent acts performed using a wire, a film, or the like can be prevented. The protrusion 142 may be formed in a wider range, for example, along the entire area of the inner edge of the rail cover 140. According to such a configuration, it becomes difficult to infiltrate a wire, a film, or the like in a wider range, It is possible to more reliably prevent fraudulent acts that are performed using wires or films.

次に、パチンコ機の背面の構成を説明する。なお、図はパチンコ機の背面図、図はパチンコ機の背面構成を䞻芁郚品毎に分解しお瀺す分解斜芖図である。   Next, the configuration of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 9 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view showing the rear structure of the pachinko machine 10 for each major part.

たず、パチンコ機の背面構成に぀いお党䜓の抂芁を説明する。パチンコ機の背面偎には、各皮制埡装眮各皮制埡基板が䞊䞋巊右に䞊べられるようにしお又は前埌に重ねられるようにしお配眮されるずずもに、遊技球を䟛絊するための遊技球䟛絊装眮払出機構や暹脂補の保護カバヌ等が取り付けられおいる。本実斜の圢態では、各皮制埡装眮を぀の取付台に分けお搭茉しお぀の制埡基板ナニットを構成し、それら制埡基板ナニットを個別に本䜓枠又は遊技盀の裏面に装着するようにしおいる。この堎合、䞻制埡装眮䞻基板ず音声ランプ制埡装眮音声ランプ制埡基板ずを䞀方の取付台に搭茉しおナニット化するず共に、払出制埡装眮払出制埡基板、発射制埡装眮発射制埡基板及び電源装眮電源基板を他方の取付台に搭茉しおナニット化しおいる。以䞋においおは、䟿宜䞊、前者のナニットを「第制埡基板ナニット」ず称し、埌者のナニットを「第制埡基板ナニット」ず称するこずずする。たた、払出機構及び保護カバヌもナニットずしお䞀䜓化され、䞀般に暹脂郚分を裏パックず称するこずもあるため、ここではそのナニットを「裏パックナニット」ず称する。各ナニット〜の詳现な構成に぀いおは埌述する。   First, an overall outline of the rear configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. On the back side of the pachinko machine 10, various control devices (various control boards) are arranged so as to be lined up and down, left and right, or overlapped in the front and rear, and a game ball supply device for supplying game balls (Discharge mechanism), a protective cover made of resin, and the like are attached. In the present embodiment, the various control devices are separately mounted on two mounting bases to form two control board units, and these control board units are individually attached to the main body frame 12 or the back of the game board 30. ing. In this case, the main controller 271 (main board) and the audio lamp controller 272 (audio lamp control board) are mounted on one mounting base to form a unit, and the payout controller 311 (payout control board) and launch control. The apparatus 312 (launch control board) and the power supply apparatus 313 (power supply board) are mounted on the other mounting base to form a unit. Hereinafter, for the sake of convenience, the former unit is referred to as a “first control board unit 201”, and the latter unit is referred to as a “second control board unit 202”. Further, since the dispensing mechanism and the protective cover are integrated as one unit, and the resin portion is generally referred to as a back pack, the unit is referred to as a “back pack unit 203” here. The detailed configuration of each unit 201 to 203 will be described later.

第制埡基板ナニット、第制埡基板ナニット及び裏パックナニットは、ナニット単䜍で䜕ら工具等を甚いずに着脱できるよう構成されるずずもに、䞀郚に支軞郚を蚭けお本䜓枠又は遊技盀の裏面に察しお展開できる構成ずなっおいる。これは、各ナニット〜やその他構成が前埌に重ねお配眮された堎合に隠れた郚䜍を容易に確認するこずを可胜ずするための工倫でもある。実際には、図の抂略図に瀺すように、略字状をなす第制埡基板ナニットはパチンコ機のほが䞭倮に配眮され、その䞋方に第制埡基板ナニットが配眮されおいる。たた、第制埡基板ナニットに䞀郚重耇する領域に、裏パックナニットが配眮されおいる。   The first control board unit 201, the second control board unit 202, and the back pack unit 203 are configured to be detachable without using any tools or the like in units of units, and are provided with a support shaft part in a part to form the main body frame 12. Or it has the composition which can be developed to the back of game board 30. This is also a device for making it possible to easily check a hidden portion when the units 201 to 203 and other components are arranged one behind the other. Actually, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 11, the first control board unit 201 having a substantially L-shape is arranged at substantially the center of the pachinko machine 10, and the second control board unit 202 is arranged therebelow. Yes. Further, the back pack unit 203 is disposed in a region partially overlapping with the first control board unit 201.

第制埡基板ナニットにはパチンコ機の背面から芋お巊端郚に支軞郚が蚭けられ、その支軞郚による軞線を䞭心に第制埡基板ナニットが回動可胜ずなっおいる。たた、第制埡基板ナニットには、その右端郚すなわち支軞郚の反察偎ずなる開攟端偎に、ナむラッチ登録商暙等よりなる締結郚が蚭けられるず共に䞊端郚に係止爪郚が蚭けられおおり、これら締結郚及び係止爪郚によっお第制埡基板ナニットがパチンコ機本䜓の裏面に沿った状態に保持されるようになっおいる。たた、第制埡基板ナニットにはパチンコ機の背面から芋お右端郚に支軞郚が蚭けられ、その支軞郚による軞線を䞭心に第制埡基板ナニットが回動可胜ずなっおいる。たた、第制埡基板ナニットには、その巊端郚すなわち支軞郚の反察偎ずなる開攟端偎に、ナむラッチ等よりなる締結郚が蚭けられおおり、この締結郚によっお第制埡基板ナニットがパチンコ機本䜓の裏面に沿った状態に保持されるようになっおいる。さらに、裏パックナニットにはパチンコ機の背面から芋お右端郚に支軞郚が蚭けられ、その支軞郚による軞線を䞭心に裏パックナニットが回動可胜ずなっおいる。たた、裏パックナニットには、その巊端郚すなわち支軞郚の反察偎ずなる開攟端偎にナむラッチ等よりなる締結郚が蚭けられるずずもに、䞊端郚及び䞋端郚にそれぞれ回動匏の係止郚が蚭けられおおり、これら締結郚及び係止郚によっお裏パックナニットがパチンコ機本䜓の裏面に沿った状態に保持されるようになっおいる。   The first control board unit 201 is provided with a support shaft part M1 at the left end as viewed from the back of the pachinko machine 10, and the first control board unit 201 can be rotated around the axis A by the support shaft part M1. ing. Further, the first control board unit 201 is provided with a fastening portion M2 made of Nylatch (registered trademark) on the right end portion thereof, that is, on the open end side opposite to the support shaft portion M1, and at the upper end portion with a locking claw. A portion M3 is provided, and the first control board unit 201 is held along the back surface of the main body of the pachinko machine 10 by the fastening portion M2 and the locking claw portion M3. Further, the second control board unit 202 is provided with a support shaft part M4 at the right end when viewed from the back of the pachinko machine 10, and the second control board unit 202 can be rotated around the axis B by the support shaft part M4. It has become. Further, the second control board unit 202 is provided with a fastening portion M5 made of a ny latch or the like on the left end portion thereof, that is, the open end side opposite to the support shaft portion M4, and the second control board unit 202 performs the second control. The substrate unit 202 is held in a state along the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 main body. Further, the back pack unit 203 is provided with a support shaft portion M6 at the right end when viewed from the back of the pachinko machine 10, and the back pack unit 203 is rotatable about an axis C by the support shaft portion M6. . Further, the back pack unit 203 is provided with a fastening portion M7 made of a ny latch or the like on the left end portion thereof, that is, on the open end side opposite to the support shaft portion M6, and at the upper end portion and the lower end portion, respectively, a rotating engagement member. Stop portions M8 and M9 are provided, and the back pack unit 203 is held along the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 main body by the fastening portions M7 and the locking portions M8 and M9.

各ナニット〜を回動可胜に支持する支軞郚は、各ナニット〜をパチンコ機の裏面から開いた状態で容易に取り倖し可胜なヒンゞ構造ずなっおいる。簡単に説明するず、第制埡基板ナニットに぀いおは、締結郚の締結及び係止爪郚の係止を解陀するず共に、圓該ナニットを軞線を䞭心に回動させお展開し、その状態で持ち䞊げる。これにより、裏パックナニットがない前提であれば、第制埡基板ナニットを取り倖すこずができる。たた、第制埡基板ナニットに぀いおは、締結郚の締結を解陀するず共に、圓該ナニットを軞線を䞭心に回動させお展開し、その状態で持ち䞊げる。これにより、第制埡基板ナニットを取り倖すこずができる。さらに、裏パックナニットに぀いおは、締結郚の締結及び係止郚の係止を解陀するず共に、圓該ナニットを軞線を䞭心に回動させお展開し、その状態で持ち䞊げる。これにより、裏パックナニットを取り倖すこずができる。   The support shaft portions M1, M4, and M6 that rotatably support the units 201 to 203 have a hinge structure that can be easily removed while the units 201 to 203 are opened from the back surface of the pachinko machine 10. Briefly, the first control board unit 201 is developed by releasing the fastening of the fastening part M2 and the locking claw part M3, rotating the unit 201 around the axis A, and expanding the unit 201. Lift in condition. Thereby, if there is no backpack unit 203, the first control board unit 201 can be removed. Further, with respect to the second control board unit 202, the fastening of the fastening portion M5 is released, the unit 202 is rotated about the axis B, is unfolded, and is lifted in that state. Thereby, the 2nd control board unit 202 can be removed. Further, with respect to the back pack unit 203, the fastening portion M7 is fastened and the locking portions M8 and M9 are unlocked, the unit 203 is rotated about the axis C, and is unfolded, and lifted in that state. Thereby, the back pack unit 203 can be removed.

ここで、各ナニット〜の展開方向は同䞀でなく、第制埡基板ナニットは、パチンコ機の背面から芋お巊開きになるのに察し、第制埡基板ナニット及び裏パックナニットは、同右開きになるよう構成されおいる。この堎合、第制埡基板ナニットは、裏パックナニットに䞀郚重耇しお蚭けられるため、裏パックナニットを開かないこずには第制埡基板ナニットを取り倖すこずが䞍可胜であり、さらに蚀うず、第制埡基板ナニット及び裏パックナニットが各々逆方向に展開する構成であるため、裏パックナニットを所定角床以䞊に倧きく開いた状態又は同ナニットを取り倖した状態でなければ第制埡基板ナニットを取り倖すこずが䞍可胜である。埓っお、第制埡基板ナニットを取り倖すこずに着目するず、他のナニットに比べお取り倖しが困難な構成ずなっおいる。さらに、斜錠装眮をキヌ操䜜しお倖枠に察しお本䜓枠を開攟しなければ、裏パックナニットを開くこずができない構成ずなっおいるため、より䞀局第制埡基板ナニットの取り倖しが困難なものずなっおいる。より具䜓的な構成に぀いおは埌述する。   Here, the unfolding directions of the units 201 to 203 are not the same, and the first control board unit 201 opens to the left when viewed from the back of the pachinko machine 10, whereas the second control board unit 202 and the back pack unit. 203 is configured to open to the right. In this case, since the first control board unit 201 is partially overlapped with the back pack unit 203, it is impossible to remove the first control board unit 201 without opening the back pack unit 203. Furthermore, since the first control board unit 201 and the back pack unit 203 are configured to expand in opposite directions, the back pack unit 203 must be opened largely beyond a predetermined angle or the unit 203 must be removed. For example, the first control board unit 201 cannot be removed. Accordingly, when attention is paid to removing the first control board unit 201, it is difficult to remove compared to the other units 202 and 203. Furthermore, since the back pack unit 203 cannot be opened unless the main body frame 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11 by key operation of the locking device, the first control board unit 201 is further removed. Has become difficult. A more specific configuration will be described later.

次に、本䜓枠及び遊技盀の裏面構成を説明する。なお、図は本䜓枠に遊技盀を組み付けた状態でか぀前蚘各ナニット〜等を取り倖した状態の構成を瀺す背面図、図は本䜓枠を埌方より芋た斜芖図、図は遊技盀を埌方より芋た斜芖図である。   Next, the back surface structure of the main body frame 12 and the game board 30 is demonstrated. 12 is a rear view showing the configuration of the state in which the game board 30 is assembled to the main body frame 12 and the units 201 to 203 are removed, and FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the main body frame 12 as viewed from the rear. FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the game board 30 as viewed from the rear.

遊技盀は、暹脂ベヌスに囲たれた四角枠状の蚭眮領域に裏面偎より蚭眮され、本䜓枠に蚭けられた耇数本実斜の圢態ではカ所の係止固定具によっお埌方ぞ脱萜しないように固定されおいる。係止固定具は手動で回動操䜜するこずができ、固定䜍眮ロック䜍眮ず固定解陀䜍眮アンロック䜍眮ずに切り換えるこずができるよう構成されおいる。図にはロック状態を瀺す。巊右カ所の係止固定具は金属片を折り曲げ圢成した型の金具であり、遊技盀の固定状態で本䜓枠の倖方ぞ匵り出さないよう構成されおいる。なお、䞋郚カ所の係止固定具は合成暹脂補の型の留め具である。   The game board 30 is installed in a square frame-shaped installation area surrounded by the resin base 25 from the back side, and a plurality (four in this embodiment) of locking fixtures 211 and 212 provided on the main body frame 12. It is fixed so as not to fall backward. The locking fixtures 211 and 212 can be manually rotated, and can be switched between a fixed position (lock position) and a fixed release position (unlock position). FIG. 12 shows a locked state. The left and right three locking fixtures 211 are L-shaped fittings formed by bending metal pieces, and are configured not to protrude outward from the main body frame 12 when the game board 30 is fixed. Note that the locking fixture 212 at one lower portion is an I-shaped fastener made of synthetic resin.

遊技盀の䞭倮に配眮される可倉衚瀺ナニットには、センタヌフレヌム図参照を背埌から芆う合成暹脂補のフレヌムカバヌが埌方に突出しお蚭けられおおり、そのフレヌムカバヌの埌端に、第図柄衚瀺装眮ず衚瀺制埡手段ずしおの衚瀺制埡装眮ずが前埌に重ねられた状態で着脱可胜に取り付けられおいる。フレヌムカバヌ内には、センタヌフレヌムに内蔵された等を駆動するための制埡基板などが配蚭されおいる。   The variable display unit 35 disposed in the center of the game board 30 is provided with a synthetic resin frame cover 213 that covers the center frame 43 (see FIG. 4) from the back. At the rear end, the first symbol display device 41 and the display control device 214 as display control means are detachably attached in a state where they are overlapped in the front-rear direction. In the frame cover 213, an LED control board for driving LEDs and the like built in the center frame 43 are disposed.

遊技盀の裏面には、可倉衚瀺ナニットを取り囲むようにしお集合板ナニットが蚭けられおいる。集合板ナニットは、薄板状の枠䜓ずしお䟋えば暹脂等の合成暹脂により成圢されるベヌスを有し、そのベヌス面が遊技盀の裏面に圓接されるようにしお取り付けられおいる。集合板ナニットには、各皮入賞口に入賞した遊技球を回収するための遊技球回収機構や、各皮入賞口等ぞの遊技球の入賞を怜知するための入賞怜知機構などが蚭けられおいる。   A collective board unit 215 is provided on the back surface of the game board 30 so as to surround the variable display unit 35. The collective board unit 215 has a base formed of a synthetic resin such as an ABS resin as a thin plate-like frame body, and is attached so that the base surface is in contact with the back surface of the game board 30. The collective board unit 215 is provided with a game ball collecting mechanism for collecting game balls won in various winning ports, a winning detection mechanism for detecting winning of game balls in various winning ports, and the like. .

遊技球回収機構に぀いお説明するず、集合板ナニットの䞋方には、前蚘䞀般入賞口、可倉入賞装眮、䜜動口の遊技盀開口郚に察応し䞔぀䞋流偎でカ所に集合する回収通路が圢成されおいる。たた、遊技盀の䞋方には、本䜓枠にポリカヌボネヌト暹脂等の合成暹脂補の排出通路盀が取り付けられおおり、排出通路盀には排出球をパチンコ機倖郚の䟋えば遊技ホヌルの島蚭備等ぞ案内するための排出通路が圢成されおいる。埓っお、図に仮想線で䟋瀺するように、䞀般入賞口等に入賞した遊技球は䜕れも集合板ナニットの回収通路を介しお集合し、さらに排出通路盀の排出通路を介しおパチンコ機倖郚に排出される。なお、アりト口も同様に排出通路に通じおおり、䜕れの入賞口にも入賞しなかった遊技球も排出通路を介しおパチンコ機倖郚に排出される。䞊蚘構成では、遊技盀の䞋端面を境界にしお、䞊方に集合板ナニット回収通路が、䞋方に排出通路盀排出通路が蚭けられおおり、排出通路盀が遊技盀に察しお前埌方向に重耇しおいない。埓っお、遊技盀を本䜓枠から取り倖す際においお、排出通路盀が遊技盀取り倖しの劚げになるずいった䞍郜合が生じるこずもない。   The game ball collecting mechanism will be described below. A collecting passage corresponding to the game board opening of the general winning port 31, the variable winning device 32, and the operating port 33 and gathered at one place downstream of the collecting plate unit 215. 216 is formed. In addition, a discharge passage board 217 made of synthetic resin such as polycarbonate resin is attached to the main body frame 12 below the game board 30, and the discharge ball is placed on the discharge passage board 217, for example, in a game hall outside the pachinko machine 10. A discharge passage 218 is formed to guide the island facility or the like. Accordingly, as illustrated in phantom lines in FIG. 12, all the game balls won in the general winning opening 31 and the like are gathered through the collection passage 216 of the gathering plate unit 215, and the discharge passage 218 of the discharge passage board 217 is further collected. Through the pachinko machine 10. Similarly, the out port 36 leads to the discharge passage 218, and the game balls that have not won any prize opening are also discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge passage 218. In the above configuration, with the lower end surface of the game board 30 as a boundary, the collective plate unit 215 (collection passage 216) is provided on the upper side, and the discharge passage board 217 (discharge passage 218) is provided on the lower side. There is no overlap in the front-rear direction with respect to the game board 30. Therefore, when the game board 30 is removed from the main body frame 12, there is no inconvenience that the discharge passage board 17 prevents the game board from being removed.

なお、排出通路盀は、パチンコ機前面の䞊皿の裏偎に配眮されおおり、䞊皿に至る球排出口図の球通路暋より針金やフィルム等を差し蟌み、さらにその針金やフィルム等を本䜓枠ず排出通路盀ずの隙間を通じお遊技領域偎に䟵入させるずいった䞍正行為が考えられる。そこで、本パチンコ機では、図に瀺すように、排出通路盀には、球通路暋の䞊郚䜍眮に察応する高さ䜍眮に、本䜓枠に重なり合うようにしおパチンコ機前方に延びるプレヌトを蚭けた。埓っお、本䜓枠ず排出通路盀ずの隙間から針金やフィルム等を䟵入させようずしおもそれがプレヌトにお阻害され、遊技領域にたで針金やフィルム等を䟵入させるこずが非垞に困難ずなる。その結果、針金やフィルム等を利甚しお可倉入賞装眮を匷制的に開攟する等の䞍正行為を防止するこずができる。   The discharge passage board 217 is disposed on the back side of the upper plate 23 in front of the pachinko machine 10, and a wire, a film, or the like is inserted from a ball discharge port (ball passage rod 138 in FIG. 2) leading to the upper plate 23. An illegal act such as allowing the wire, film or the like to enter the game area through the gap between the main body frame 12 and the discharge passage board 217 can be considered. Therefore, in the present pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 13, the discharge passage board 217 is placed in front of the pachinko machine 10 so as to overlap the main body frame 12 at a height position corresponding to the upper position of the ball passage rod 138. An extending plate 219 was provided. Therefore, even if it tries to infiltrate a wire, a film, etc. from the clearance gap between the main body frame 12 and the discharge passage board 217, it will be obstructed by the plate 219, and it will be very difficult to infiltrate a wire, a film, etc. to a game area. Become. As a result, an illegal act such as forcibly opening the variable winning device 32 using a wire, a film, or the like can be prevented.

入賞怜知機構に぀いお説明するず、集合板ナニットには、遊技盀衚偎の䞀般入賞口ず察応する䜍眮に入賞口スむッチが蚭けられ、可倉入賞装眮ず察応する䜍眮に特定領域スむッチ及びカりントスむッチが蚭けられおいる。特定領域スむッチは、倧圓たり䞭に可倉入賞装眮ぞ入賞した遊技球が特定領域に入ったこずを刀定するスむッチである。特定領域ずはラりンドの曎新可吊を刀定するための領域であり、ゟヌンずも称されおいる。カりントスむッチは、可倉入賞装眮に入賞した遊技球の数をカりントするスむッチである。たた、䜜動口に察応する䜍眮には䜜動口ぞの遊技球の入賞を怜知する䜜動口スむッチが蚭けられ、スルヌゲヌトに察応する䜍眮にはスルヌゲヌトの遊技球の通過を怜知するゲヌトスむッチが蚭けられおいる。入賞口スむッチ及びゲヌトスむッチは電気配線を通じお盀面䞭継基板に接続され、特定領域スむッチ及びカりントスむッチは倧入賞口䞭継基板に接続されおいる。そしお、盀面䞭継基板及び倧入賞口䞭継基板が䞻制埡装眮に接続されおいる。䜜動口スむッチは䞭継基板を介さずに盎接䞻制埡装眮に接続されおいる。その他図瀺は省略するが、可倉入賞装眮には、倧入賞口の開閉扉を開攟するための倧入賞口゜レノむドず、入賞球を特定領域かその他の領域に振り分けるための振分板を駆動する入賞球振分板゜レノむドずが蚭けられ、䜜動口には、それに付随する電動圹物を開攟するための䜜動口゜レノむドが蚭けられおいる。   Explaining the winning detection mechanism, the collective board unit 215 is provided with a winning port switch 221 at a position corresponding to the general winning port 31 on the front side of the game board 30, and a specific area switch 222 and a position corresponding to the variable winning device 32. A count switch 223 is provided. The specific area switch 222 is a switch that determines that a game ball that has won the variable winning device 32 during the jackpot has entered a specific area. The specific area is an area for determining whether or not a round can be updated, and is also referred to as a V zone. The count switch 223 is a switch that counts the number of game balls won in the variable winning device 32. In addition, an operation port switch 224 that detects a winning of a game ball to the operation port 33 is provided at a position corresponding to the operation port 33, and a passage of the game ball of the through gate 34 is detected at a position corresponding to the through gate 34. A gate switch 225 is provided. The prize opening switch 221 and the gate switch 225 are connected to the board relay board 226 through electric wiring, and the specific area switch 222 and the count switch 223 are connected to the big prize opening relay board 227. The board surface relay board 226 and the special winning opening relay board 227 are connected to the main controller 271. The operation port switch 224 is directly connected to the main controller 271 without using a relay board. Although not shown in the drawings, the variable winning device 32 is driven with a large winning opening solenoid for opening the opening / closing door of the large winning opening and a distribution plate for distributing the winning balls to a specific area or other areas. A winning ball sorting plate solenoid is provided, and the operating port 33 is provided with an operating port solenoid for opening an electric accessory attached thereto.

䞊蚘入賞怜知機構にお各々怜出された怜出結果は䞻制埡装眮に取り蟌たれ、該䞻制埡装眮よりその郜床の入賞状況に応じた払出指什遊技球の払出個数が払出制埡装眮に送信される。そしお、払出制埡装眮の出力により所定数の遊技球の払出が実行されるようになっおいる。ここで、埓来のいわゆる蚌拠球方匏では、各皮入賞口に入賞した遊技球を入賞球凊理装眮に䞀旊集め、その入賞球凊理装眮で入賞球の存圚を぀ず぀順番に確認した䞊で払出を行うようにしおいたが、本実斜の圢態のパチンコ機では、各皮入賞口毎に遊技球の入賞を電気的に怜知しお払出が盎ちに行われるようにしおいるため、払い出す遊技球が倚量にあっおもその払出をいち早く実斜するこずが可胜ずなるずずもに、入賞球凊理装眮が䞍芁ずなる。   The detection results detected by the winning detection mechanism are taken into the main control device 271, and a payout command (the number of game balls to be paid out) corresponding to the winning situation at each time is sent from the main control device 271 to the payout control device 311. Sent. Then, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out by the output of the payout control device 311. Here, in the conventional so-called evidence ball system, the game balls won in various winning openings are once collected in a winning ball processing device, and the winning ball processing device confirms the presence of the winning balls one by one and then pays out. However, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, a lot of game balls are paid out because the winning of the game balls is electrically detected for each prize opening and the payout is immediately performed. In this case, the payout can be performed promptly, and a winning ball processing apparatus is not required.

集合板ナニットには、その右䞊郚に盀甚倖郚端子板が蚭けられおいる。盀甚倖郚端子板には、第図柄の倉動が停止確定する毎に信号出力するための出力端子ず、倧圓たり䞭又は第図柄の倉動時間短瞮䞭に信号出力するための出力端子ず、倧圓たり䞭に信号出力するための出力端子ずが蚭けられおいる。そしお、これらの出力端子を通じお、遊技ホヌル偎の管理制埡装眮に察しお遊技遊技盀偎の状態に関する信号が出力される。盀甚倖郚端子板は、取り倖し容易な状態で集合板ナニットに取り付けられおいる。なお、図に瀺すように、本䜓枠裏偎の巊䞋郚には、打球槌等を備えるセットハンドル及び発射モヌタが蚭けられおいる。   The collective board unit 215 is provided with a board external terminal board 230 at the upper right part thereof. The panel external terminal board 230 has an output terminal for outputting a signal every time the variation of the first symbol is stopped (determined), and an output terminal for outputting a signal during a big hit or during the reduction of the variation time of the first symbol. And an output terminal for outputting a signal during the jackpot. And, through these output terminals, a signal relating to the game (the state on the game board 30 side) is output to the management control device on the game hall side. The board external terminal board 230 is attached to the assembly board unit 215 in an easily removable state. As shown in FIG. 12, a set handle 228 and a firing motor 229 including a hitting ball basket are provided on the lower left side on the back side of the main body frame 12.

集合板ナニットには、第制埡基板ナニットを取り付けるための取付機構が蚭けられおいる。具䜓的には、この取付機構ずしお、遊技盀の裏面から芋お巊䞋隅郚には䞊䞋方向に延びる軞受け金具が蚭けられ、この軞受け金具には同䞀軞線䞊に䞊䞋䞀察の軞受け孔が圢成されおいる。たた、遊技盀においお、軞受け金具の右方には䞊䞋䞀察の被締結孔具䜓的にはナむラッチの取付孔が蚭けられ、軞受け金具の䞊方には係止爪片が蚭けられおいる。   The assembly plate unit 215 is provided with an attachment mechanism for attaching the first control board unit 201. Specifically, as this mounting mechanism, a bearing bracket 231 extending in the vertical direction is provided in the lower left corner portion when viewed from the back surface of the game board 30, and the bearing bracket 231 has a pair of upper and lower bearing holes 231 a on the same axis. Is formed. In the game board 30, a pair of upper and lower fastening holes (specifically, a mounting hole for a ny latch) 232 is provided on the right side of the bearing fitting 231, and a locking claw piece 233 is provided above the bearing fitting 231. It has been.

本䜓枠の裏面には、第制埡基板ナニットや裏パックナニットを取り付けるための取付機構が蚭けられおいる。具䜓的には、本䜓枠にはその右端郚に長尺状の軞受け金具が取り付けられおいる。この軞受け金具は補匷郚材ずしおも機胜する。図に瀺すように、軞受け金具は遊技盀よりも䞋方ぞ延びる長尺板状の金具本䜓を有し、その金具本䜓より埌方ぞ起立させるようにしお、䞋郚カ所に第制埡基板ナニット甚の軞受け郚が圢成されるず共に、䞊郚カ所に裏パックナニット甚の軞受け郚が圢成されおいる。これら軞受け郚にはそれぞれ同軞の軞受け孔が圢成されおいる。なお、第制埡基板ナニット甚の軞受け郚ず裏パックナニット甚の軞受け郚ずを各々個別の軞受け金具で構成するこずも可胜である。その他、第制埡基板ナニット甚の取付機構ずしお、本䜓枠には、遊技盀蚭眮領域よりも䞋方巊端郚に䞊䞋䞀察の被締結孔具䜓的には、ナむラッチの取付孔が蚭けられおいる。たた、裏パックナニット甚の取付機構ずしお、本䜓枠には、遊技盀蚭眮領域の巊端郚に䞊䞋䞀察の被締結孔具䜓的には、ナむラッチの取付孔が蚭けられおいる。本䜓枠においお遊技盀の巊䞊方、右寄り䞊方及び右寄り䞋方の各䜍眮には、遊技盀ずの間に裏パックナニットを挟み蟌んで支持するための回動匏の固定具がそれぞれ蚭けられおいる。なお、裏パックナニットは、その䞊郚に倧量の遊技球を貯留するこずから、裏パックナニットの䞊郚を支持するための固定具に関しおは特に十分な匷床を持぀構成ずするのが望たしく、本実斜の圢態では回動匏の固定具を甚いおいる。   An attachment mechanism for attaching the second control board unit 202 and the back pack unit 203 is provided on the back surface of the main body frame 12. Specifically, a long bearing fitting 235 is attached to the right end of the main body frame 12. The bearing fitting 235 also functions as a reinforcing member. As shown in FIG. 15, the bearing fitting 235 has a long plate-like fitting main body 236 that extends downward from the game board 30, and is raised to the rear from the fitting main body 236 so as to be second in two places. Bearing portions 237 for the control board unit 202 are formed, and bearing portions 238 for the back pack unit 203 are formed at two upper portions. Coaxial bearing holes are formed in the bearing portions 237 and 238, respectively. Note that the bearing portion 237 for the second control board unit 202 and the bearing portion 238 for the back pack unit 203 may be configured by individual bearing fittings. In addition, as a mounting mechanism for the second control board unit 202, the main body frame 12 has a pair of upper and lower fastening holes (specifically, mounting holes for a ny latch) 239 at the left end below the game board 30 installation area. Is provided. In addition, as a mounting mechanism for the back pack unit 203, the main body frame 12 is provided with a pair of upper and lower fastening holes (specifically, mounting holes for a ny latch) 240 at the left end of the game board 30 installation area. . Rotating fixtures 241, 242 for sandwiching and supporting the back pack unit 203 with the game board 30 at positions on the upper left, upper right and lower right of the game board 30 in the main body frame 12. 243 is provided. Since the back pack unit 203 stores a large amount of game balls in its upper part, the fixtures 241 and 242 for supporting the upper part of the back pack unit 203 should have a particularly strong strength. Desirably, a rotating fixture is used in the present embodiment.

䞊蚘の劂く本䜓枠の巊右䞀偎郚図では右偎郚には長尺状の軞受け金具が蚭けられる䞀方、本䜓枠の巊右他偎郚図では巊偎郚には斜錠装眮が蚭けられおいる。斜錠装眮は、䞊䞋方向に延び本䜓枠に固定された基枠ず、その基枠に察しお䞊䞋方向に移動可胜に組み付けられた長尺状の連動杆ずを備え、基枠の䞋郚に前蚘シリンダ錠が䞀䜓化されおいる。連動杆は、シリンダ錠の操䜜により䞊䞋いずれかの方向に移動する。連動杆には、鉀圢状をなす䞊䞋䞀察の鉀金具が蚭けられおおり、倖枠に察しお本䜓枠を閉鎖した際には、鉀金具が倖枠偎の支持金具図瀺略に係止され、斜錠装眮により斜錠状態ずされるようになっおいる。この堎合、シリンダ錠の操䜜によっお連動杆が䞊方向に移動するず、倖枠に察する本䜓枠の斜錠が解陀される。逆に、シリンダ錠の操䜜によっお連動杆が䞋方向に移動するず、本䜓枠に察する前扉枠の斜錠が解陀される。   As described above, a long bearing fitting 235 is provided on one of the left and right sides (the right side in FIG. 12) of the main body frame 12, while the left and right other sides (the left side in FIG. 12) of the main body frame 12 are locked. A device is provided. The locking device includes a base frame 247 that extends in the vertical direction and is fixed to the main body frame 12, and a long interlocking rod 248 that is assembled to the base frame 247 so as to be movable in the vertical direction. The cylinder lock 91 is integrated with the lower part of the cylinder. The interlocking rod 248 moves in either the up or down direction by operating the cylinder lock 91. The interlocking bar 248 is provided with a pair of upper and lower bar brackets 249 having a hook shape. When the main body frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the bar bracket 249 is supported by a support bracket (on the outer frame 11 side). (Not shown) and locked by a locking device. In this case, when the interlocking rod 248 moves upward by the operation of the cylinder lock 91, the locking of the main body frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 is released. On the contrary, when the interlocking rod 248 moves downward by the operation of the cylinder lock 91, the locking of the front door frame 13 with respect to the main body frame 12 is released.

なお、本䜓枠の巊右偎郚に軞受け金具ず斜錠装眮基枠、連動杆等ずが振り分けられる䞊蚘構成においお、これら軞受け金具及び斜錠装眮基枠、連動杆等を配眮するための領域を残した幅ずなるようにしお、本䜓枠に前蚘遊技盀が取り付けられおいる。これによっおも遊技領域の拡匵が図られおいるこずは前述した通りである。   In the above configuration in which the bearing bracket 235 and the locking device (base frame 247, interlocking rod 248, etc.) are distributed to the left and right sides of the main body frame 12, these bearing bracket 235 and locking device (base frame 247, interlocking rod 248, etc.) are arranged. The game board 30 is attached to the main body frame 12 so as to have a width that leaves an area for placing a). As described above, the game area is also expanded by this.

本䜓枠の背面における遊技盀の右䞋郚には、埌述する払出機構より払い出される遊技球を䞊皿、䞋皿又は排出通路の䜕れかに振り分けるための遊技球分配郚が蚭けられおいる。遊技球分配郚は、巊偎の開口郚が第排出口を介しお䞊皿に通じ、䞭倮の開口郚が第排出口を介しお䞋皿に通じ、右偎の開口郚が排出通路に通じるように、各通路が圢成されおいる。遊技球分配郚は、本䜓枠に察しおネゞ等により匷固に取り付けられおいる。埓っお、遊技球分配郚の蚭眮郚䜍における浮き䞊がりが防止され、隙間から針金やフィルム等を䟵入させるこずによる䞍正行為が防止できるようになっおいる。なお、本䜓枠の䞋端郚には、奥壁パネルの裏偎に蚭眮されたスピヌカの背埌を囲むための合成暹脂補のスピヌカボックスが取り付けられおおり、スピヌカボックスがスピヌカ音を埌方ぞ逃さないように機胜するこずで䜎音域の音質改善が図られおいる。   In the lower right portion of the game board 30 on the back surface of the main body frame 12, a game ball distribution unit 245 for distributing game balls paid out by a payout mechanism, which will be described later, to any of the upper plate 23, the lower plate 16 or the discharge passage 218 is provided. It has been. The game ball distribution unit 245 has a left opening 245a that communicates with the upper plate 23 through the first discharge port 66, and a central opening 245b that communicates with the lower plate 16 through the second discharge port 67, and the right opening. Each passage is formed so that the portion 245c communicates with the discharge passage 218. The game ball distribution unit 245 is firmly attached to the main body frame 12 with screws or the like. Therefore, the floating at the installation site of the game ball distributing unit 245 is prevented, and an illegal act caused by entering a wire, a film, or the like from the gap can be prevented. Note that a synthetic resin speaker box 246 is attached to the lower end portion of the main body frame 12 to surround the back of the speaker 20 installed on the back side of the back wall panel 17, and the speaker box 246 transmits the speaker sound to the rear. The sound quality in the low frequency range is improved by functioning so as not to miss.

次に、第制埡基板ナニットの構成を図〜図に基づいお説明する。図は第制埡基板ナニットの正面図、図は同ナニットの斜芖図、図は同ナニットの分解斜芖図、図は同ナニットを裏面から芋た分解斜芖図である。   Next, the configuration of the first control board unit 201 will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 is a front view of the first control board unit 201, FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the unit 201, FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the unit 201, and FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the unit 201 viewed from the back. .

第制埡基板ナニットは略字状をなす取付台を有し、取付台に䞻制埡装眮ず音声ランプ制埡装眮ずが搭茉されおいる。䞻制埡装眮は、䞻たる制埡を叞る、遊技プログラムを蚘憶した、遊技の進行に応じた必芁なデヌタを蚘憶する、各皮機噚ずの連絡をずるポヌト、各皮抜遞の際に甚いられる乱数発生噚、時間蚈数や同期を図る堎合などに䜿甚されるクロックパルス発生回路等を含む䞻基板を具備しおおり、䞻基板が透明暹脂材料等よりなる被包手段ずしおの基板ボックスに収容されお構成されおいる。なお、基板ボックスは、略盎方䜓圢状のボックスベヌスず該ボックスベヌスの開口郚を芆うボックスカバヌずを備えおいる。これらボックスベヌスずボックスカバヌずは封印手段ずしおの封印ナニットによっお開封䞍胜に連結され、これにより基板ボックスが封印されおいる。   The first control board unit 201 has a mounting base 251 having a substantially L shape, and the main control device 271 and the sound lamp control device 272 are mounted on the mounting base 251. The main control device 271 includes a CPU that controls the main control, a ROM that stores a game program, a RAM that stores necessary data according to the progress of the game, a port for communicating with various devices, and a random number used in various lotteries. A main substrate including a generator, a clock pulse generation circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. is provided, and the main substrate is accommodated in a substrate box 273 as an encapsulating means made of a transparent resin material or the like. Configured. The substrate box 273 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected so as not to be unsealed by a sealing unit 274 as sealing means, whereby the substrate box 273 is sealed.

封印ナニットはボックスベヌスずボックスカバヌずを開封䞍胜に連結する構成であれば任意の構成が適甚できるが、ここでは図等に瀺すように、぀の封印郚材が連結された構成ずなっおおり、この封印郚材の長孔に係止爪を挿入するこずでボックスベヌスずボックスカバヌずが開封䞍胜に連結されるようになっおいる。封印ナニットによる封印凊理は、その封印埌の䞍正な開封を防止し、たた䞇䞀䞍正開封が行われおもそのような事態を早期に䞔぀容易に発芋可胜ずするものであっお、䞀旊開封した埌でも再床封印凊理を行うこず自䜓は可胜である。すなわち、封印ナニットを構成する぀の封印郚材のうち、少なくずも䞀぀の封印郚材の長孔に係止爪を挿入するこずにより封印凊理が行われる。そしお、収容した䞻基板の䞍具合発生の際や䞻基板の怜査の際など基板ボックスを開封する堎合には、係止爪が挿入された封印郚材ず他の封印郚材ずの連結を切断する。その埌、再床封印凊理する堎合は他の封印郚材の長孔に係止爪を挿入する。基板ボックスの開封を行った旚の履歎を圓該基板ボックスに残しおおけば、基板ボックスを芋るこずで䞍正な開封が行われた旚が容易に発芋できる。   As long as the sealing unit 274 is configured to connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be unsealed, any configuration can be applied. Here, as shown in FIG. 17 and the like, five sealing members are connected. The box base and the box cover are connected so as not to be opened by inserting a locking claw into the long hole of the sealing member. Sealing processing by the sealing unit 274 prevents unauthorized opening after the sealing, and makes it possible to detect such a situation quickly and easily even if unauthorized opening is performed. It is possible to perform the sealing process again even after it has been performed. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting the locking claw into the long hole of at least one sealing member among the five sealing members constituting the sealing unit 274. When the substrate box 273 is opened, such as when a failure occurs in the accommodated main substrate or when the main substrate is inspected, the connection between the sealing member into which the locking claw is inserted and the other sealing member is disconnected. Thereafter, when the sealing process is performed again, the locking claws are inserted into the long holes of the other sealing members. If the history of opening the substrate box 273 is left in the substrate box 273, it can be easily found that the unauthorized opening has been performed by looking at the substrate box 273.

音声ランプ制埡装眮は、䟋えば䞻制埡装眮又は衚瀺制埡装眮からの指瀺に埓い音声やランプ衚瀺の制埡を叞るや、その他、、各皮ポヌト等を含む音声ランプ制埡基板を具備しおおり、音声ランプ制埡基板が透明暹脂材料等よりなる基板ボックスに収容されお構成されおいる。音声ランプ制埡装眮䞊には電源䞭継基板が搭茉されおおり、電源装眮の電源が電源䞭継基板を介しお衚瀺制埡装眮及び音声ランプ制埡装眮にそれぞれ䟛絊されるようになっおいる。぀たり、衚瀺制埡装眮及び音声ランプ制埡装眮には各々独立しお電源が䟛絊される。   The sound lamp control device 272 includes, for example, a CPU for controlling sound and lamp display in accordance with instructions from the main control device 271 or the display control device 214, and a sound lamp control board including ROM, RAM, various ports, and the like. The sound lamp control board is housed in a board box 275 made of a transparent resin material or the like. A power relay board 276 is mounted on the sound lamp control device 272, and the power of the power supply device 313 is supplied to the display control device 214 and the sound lamp control device 272 via the power relay board 276, respectively. Yes. That is, power is independently supplied to the display control device 214 and the sound lamp control device 272.

取付台は、ポリカヌボネヌト暹脂等の合成暹脂補であり、䟋えば緑や青等に着色されお䞍透明ずされおいる。䜆し、取付台は無色透明又は半透明であっおもよい。取付台の衚面には平坊状をなす぀の基板搭茉面が蚭けられおいる。これら基板搭茉面は瞊暪に盎亀する向きに延び、前埌方向に段差をもっお圢成されおいる。基板搭茉面の䞊瞁郚及び䞋瞁郚にはそれぞれ、基板搭茉面より起立した起立郚が䞀䜓成圢されおいる。そしお、暪長の基板搭茉面䞊に䞻制埡装眮が配眮されるず共に、瞊長の基板搭茉面䞊に音声ランプ制埡装眮が配眮される。このずき、䞻制埡装眮は、䞊䞋の偎郚が起立郚にお支えられる。たた、音声ランプ制埡装眮は、耇数箇所でネゞ等により基板搭茉面に固定される。   The mounting base 251 is made of a synthetic resin such as a polycarbonate resin, and is colored opaque, for example, green or blue. However, the mounting base 251 may be colorless and transparent or translucent. Two flat substrate mounting surfaces 252 and 253 are provided on the surface of the mounting base 251. These substrate mounting surfaces 252 and 253 extend in a direction orthogonal to the length and breadth, and are formed with a step in the front-rear direction. Standing portions 254 erected from the substrate mounting surface 252 are integrally formed on the upper edge portion and the lower edge portion of the substrate mounting surface 252, respectively. The main controller 271 is disposed on the horizontally long substrate mounting surface 252 and the sound lamp controller 272 is disposed on the vertically long substrate mounting surface 253. At this time, the upper and lower sides of main controller 271 are supported by upright portions 254. The sound lamp control device 172 is fixed to the board mounting surface 253 with screws or the like at a plurality of locations.

ここで、図及び図に瀺すように、基板搭茉面には、巊右カ所に暪長圢状の貫通孔が圢成されおいる。䞀方、䞻制埡装眮の基板ボックスには、その裏面の巊右カ所に回動操䜜匏の固定具が蚭けられおいる。䞻制埡装眮を基板搭茉面に搭茉する際には、基板搭茉面の貫通孔に固定具が挿通されるように䞻制埡基板を茉眮し、その状態で固定具を回動操䜜するこずで䞻制埡装眮がロックされる。埓っお、䞻制埡装眮は第制埡基板ナニットの裏面偎から固定具をロック解陀しなければ取り倖しできないため、基板取り倖し等の䞍正行為に察しお抑止効果が埗られる。   Here, as shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the substrate mounting surface 252 is formed with horizontally elongated through holes 256 at two positions on the left and right. On the other hand, the substrate box 273 of the main control device 271 is provided with rotationally operable fixtures 277 at two places on the left and right sides of the back surface thereof. When the main controller 271 is mounted on the board mounting surface 252, the main control board 271 is placed so that the fixing tool 277 is inserted into the through hole 256 of the board mounting surface 252, and the fixing tool 277 is placed in this state. The main control device 271 is locked by the turning operation. Accordingly, since the main control device 271 cannot be removed unless the lock 277 is unlocked from the back side of the first control board unit 201, a deterrent effect such as board removal can be obtained.

たた、取付台においお、䞻基板甚の基板搭茉面の䞋方には、基板搭茉面の裏面空間に通じる開口を遮蔜するための遮蔜郚が蚭けられおいる。埓っお、基板搭茉面の䞋方より取付台の裏面に手などを差し入れるこずが阻止され、固定具のロック状態を䞍正に解陀するこずができないようになっおいる。たた、第制埡基板ナニットをパチンコ機裏面に搭茉した状態では、圓該ナニットの䞊郚が裏パックナニットにより芆われるため、やはり取付台の裏面に手などを差し入れるこずが阻止され、固定具のロック状態を䞍正に解陀するこずができないようになっおいる。   In addition, in the mounting base 251, a shielding portion 257 for shielding an opening leading to the back space of the substrate mounting surface 252 is provided below the substrate mounting surface 252 for the main substrate. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent a hand or the like from being inserted into the back surface of the mounting base 251 from below the substrate mounting surface 252 so that the locked state of the fixture 277 cannot be illegally released. Further, when the first control board unit 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10, the upper portion of the unit 201 is covered with the back pack unit 203, so that it is also prevented that a hand or the like is inserted into the back surface of the mounting base 251. The locked state of the fixture 277 cannot be illegally released.

前述した通り、第制埡基板ナニットは、裏パックナニットを所定角床以䞊に倧きく開いた状態又は同ナニットを取り倖した状態でなければ取り倖すこずが䞍可胜であり、たた、斜錠装眮を正しくキヌ操䜜しお倖枠に察しお本䜓枠を開攟しなければ、裏パックナニットを開くこずができない構成ずなっおいる。぀たり、本䜓枠を開くこずができなければ、結果的に第制埡基板ナニットを回動させたり取り倖すこずができず、ひいおは䞻制埡装眮の取り倖しも䞍可胜ずなる。それ故、䞻制埡装眮の䞍正な茉せ替えや盗難等を効果的に防止するこずができる。   As described above, the first control board unit 201 cannot be removed unless the back pack unit 203 is opened at a predetermined angle or larger, or the unit 203 is not removed. The backpack unit 203 cannot be opened unless the main body frame 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11 by key operation. That is, if the main body frame 12 cannot be opened, the first control board unit 201 cannot be rotated or removed as a result, and the main controller 271 cannot be removed. Therefore, unauthorized replacement or theft of the main controller 271 can be effectively prevented.

䞻制埡装眮は、パチンコ機裏面から芋お手前偎に配眮され、音声ランプ制埡装眮はその奥偎に配眮される。この堎合、基板搭茉面が前埌方向に段差をもっお圢成されおいるため、これら基板搭茉面に䞻制埡装眮及び音声ランプ制埡装眮を搭茉した状態においお各制埡装眮はその䞀郚を前埌に重ねお配眮される。぀たり、図等にも芋られるように、䞻制埡装眮はその䞀郚本実斜の圢態では皋床が浮いた状態で配眮される。故に、䞻制埡装眮に重なる領域たで音声ランプ制埡装眮を拡匵するこずが可胜ずなり、たた別の芋方をすれば音声ランプ制埡装眮に重なる領域たで䞻制埡装眮を拡匵するこずが可胜ずなり、パチンコ機ずいう限られた倧きさの䞭にあっおも、各制埡基板の倧型化に良奜に察凊できるずずもに、各制埡装眮を効率良く蚭眮できる。たた、第制埡基板ナニットを遊技盀に装着した状態では、基板搭茉面の埌方にスペヌスが確保され、可倉入賞装眮やその電気配線等が無理なく蚭眮できるようになっおいる。なお、基板搭茉面の裏面には栌子状のリブが蚭けられおおり、䞻制埡基板の支持匷床が高められおいる。   The main control device 271 is arranged on the front side when viewed from the back of the pachinko machine 10, and the sound lamp control device 272 is arranged on the back side. In this case, since the substrate mounting surfaces 252 and 253 are formed with steps in the front-rear direction, the control devices 271 and 272 are mounted in a state where the main controller 271 and the sound lamp controller 272 are mounted on the substrate mounting surfaces 252 and 253. Are arranged with part of them stacked one after the other. That is, as can be seen in FIG. 17 and the like, the main controller 271 is arranged in a state where a part thereof (about 1/3 in this embodiment) is floated. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 272 can be extended to a region overlapping the main control device 271. From another viewpoint, the main control device 271 can be extended to a region overlapping the voice lamp control device 272. Even within the limited size of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to satisfactorily cope with the increase in size of the control boards 271 and 272, and the control devices 271 and 272 can be installed efficiently. Further, when the first control board unit 201 is mounted on the game board 30, a space is secured behind the board mounting surface 252 so that the variable winning device 32 and its electric wiring can be installed without difficulty. Note that lattice-like ribs 258 are provided on the back surface of the substrate mounting surface 252 to enhance the support strength of the main control substrate 271.

取付台の巊端面には䞊䞋䞀察の掛止ピンが蚭けられおおり、この掛止ピンを前蚘軞受け金具に取り付けるこずで、第制埡基板ナニットが遊技盀に察しお回動可胜に片持ち支持される。取付台の右端郚には前蚘被締結孔にはめ蟌たれる締結具ずしお䞊䞋䞀察のナむラッチが蚭けられおいる。取付台の䞊端郚には前蚘係止爪片が係止される長孔が蚭けられおいる。埓っお、ナむラッチを被締結孔にはめ蟌むず共に、長孔に係止爪片を係止させるこずで、第制埡基板ナニットが遊技盀に固定される。なお、軞受け金具及び掛止ピンが前蚘支軞郚に、被締結孔及びナむラッチが前蚘締結郚に、係止爪片及び長孔が前蚘係止爪郚に、それぞれ盞圓する。   A pair of upper and lower retaining pins 261 are provided on the left end surface of the mounting base 251, and the first control board unit 201 is rotated with respect to the game board 30 by attaching the retaining pins 261 to the bearing fitting 231. Cantilevered so that it can move. A pair of upper and lower nai latches 262 are provided at the right end of the mounting base 251 as fasteners to be fitted into the fastening holes 232. A long hole 263 in which the locking claw piece 233 is locked is provided at the upper end of the mounting base 251. Therefore, the first control board unit 201 is fixed to the game board 30 by fitting the nai latch 262 into the fastening hole 232 and locking the locking claw piece 233 in the long hole 263. It should be noted that the bearing fitting 231 and the latch pin 261 are in the support shaft portion M1, the fastening hole 232 and the ny latch 262 are in the fastening portion M2, and the locking claw piece 233 and the long hole 263 are in the locking claw portion M3. Each corresponds.

次に、第制埡基板ナニットの構成を図〜図に基づいお説明する。図は第制埡基板ナニットの正面図、図は同ナニットの斜芖図、図は同ナニットの分解斜芖図である。   Next, the configuration of the second control board unit 202 will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 is a front view of the second control board unit 202, FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the unit 202, and FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the unit 202.

第制埡基板ナニットは暪長圢状をなす取付台を有し、取付台に払出制埡装眮、発射制埡装眮、電源装眮及びカヌドナニット接続基板が搭茉されおいる。払出制埡装眮及び発射制埡装眮は制埡の䞭枢をなすや、その他、、各皮ポヌト等を含む制埡基板を具備しおいる。払出制埡装眮の払出制埡基板により、賞品球や貞出球の払出が制埡される。発射制埡装眮の発射制埡基板により、遊技者による遊技球発射ハンドルの操䜜に埓い発射モヌタの制埡が行われる。たた、電源装眮の電源基板により、各皮制埡装眮等で芁する所定の電源電圧が生成され出力される。カヌドナニット接続基板は、パチンコ機前面の貞球操䜜郚及び図瀺しないカヌドナニットに電気的に接続され、䞻ずしお遊技者による球貞し操䜜の指什を取り蟌んでそれを払出制埡装眮に出力するものである。なお、カヌドナニットを介さずに球貞し装眮等から䞊皿に遊技球が盎接貞し出される珟金機では、カヌドナニット接続基板は䞍芁である。   The second control board unit 202 has a horizontally long mounting base 301 on which a payout control device 311, a firing control device 312, a power supply device 313 and a card unit connection board 314 are mounted. The payout control device 311 and the launch control device 312 are provided with a control board including a central control CPU, ROM, RAM, various ports, and the like. The payout control board of the payout control device 311 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The launch control board of the launch control device 312 controls the launch motor 229 in accordance with the operation of the game ball launch handle 18 by the player. In addition, a predetermined power supply voltage required by various control devices or the like is generated and output by the power supply board of the power supply device 313. The card unit connection board 314 is electrically connected to the ball lending operation unit 120 on the front surface of the pachinko machine and a card unit (not shown). It is. Note that the card unit connection board 314 is not necessary in a cash machine in which game balls are rented directly from the ball lending device or the like to the upper plate without using a card unit.

䞊蚘払出制埡装眮、発射制埡装眮、電源装眮及びカヌドナニット接続基板は、透明暹脂材料等よりなる基板ボックスにそれぞれ収容されお構成されおいる。特に、払出制埡装眮では、䞻制埡装眮ず同様、被包手段を構成する基板ボックスがボックスベヌスずボックスカバヌずを備え、それらが封印手段ずしおの封印ナニットによっお開封䞍胜に連結され、これにより基板ボックスが封印されおいる。払出制埡装眮には状態埩垰スむッチが蚭けられおいる。䟋えば、埌述する払出モヌタの球詰たり等、払出゚ラヌの発生時においお状態埩垰スむッチが抌䞋されるず、払出モヌタが正逆回転され、球詰たりの解消正垞状態ぞの埩垰が図られるようになっおいる。電源装眮には消去スむッチが蚭けられおいる。本パチンコ機は各皮デヌタのバックアップ機胜を有しおおり、䞇䞀停電が発生した際でも停電時の状態を保持し、停電からの埩垰埩電の際には停電時の状態に埩垰できるようになっおいる。埓っお、䟋えば遊技ホヌルの営業終了の堎合のように通垞手順で電源を遮断するず遮断前の状態が蚘憶保持されるが、消去スむッチを抌しながら電源を投入するず、デヌタが初期化されるようになっおいる。   The payout control device 311, the firing control device 312, the power supply device 313, and the card unit connection substrate 314 are respectively configured to be accommodated in substrate boxes 315, 316, 317, and 318 made of a transparent resin material or the like. In particular, in the payout control device 311, as with the main control device 271, the substrate box 315 constituting the enclosing means includes a box base and a box cover, and these are connected so as not to be opened by a sealing unit 319 as a sealing means, As a result, the substrate box 315 is sealed. The payout control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 321. For example, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of a payout motor, which will be described later, the payout motor is rotated in the forward and reverse directions to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state). It has become. The power supply device 313 is provided with a RAM erase switch 323. This pachinko machine 10 has a backup function for various data, and even if a power failure occurs, it retains the state at the time of the power failure and returns to the state at the time of the power failure at the time of recovery from the power failure (power recovery). It can be done. Therefore, for example, when the power supply is shut down by a normal procedure, for example, when the game hall is closed, the state before the shutdown is stored and retained. However, if the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323, the RAM data is initialized. It is like that.

取付台は䟋えば無色透明な暹脂成型品よりなり、その衚面に平坊状をなす基板搭茉面が蚭けられおいる。基板搭茉面には、発射制埡装眮、電源装眮及びカヌドナニット接続基板が暪䞊びずなった状態で搭茉され、ネゞ等で固定されおいる。電源装眮の基板ボックス䞊には略平板状の台座プレヌトが茉眮されるずずもに台座プレヌト䞊に払出制埡装眮が搭茉され、ネゞ等で固定されおいる。払出制埡装眮ず電源装眮ずの間には台座プレヌトが介圚するため、䟋えばノむズ陀去甚の金属プレヌト等を蚭眮するには台座プレヌトに金属プレヌト等を取り付ければ良く、ノむズ察策が簡単に実珟できる。   The mounting base 301 is made of, for example, a colorless and transparent resin molded product, and a flat board mounting surface 302 is provided on the surface thereof. On the board mounting surface 302, the firing control device 312, the power supply device 313, and the card unit connection board 314 are mounted side by side and fixed with screws or the like. A substantially flat pedestal plate 303 is placed on the substrate box 317 of the power supply device 313, and a payout control device 311 is mounted on the pedestal plate 303 and fixed with screws or the like. Since the pedestal plate 303 is interposed between the payout control device 311 and the power supply device 313, for example, in order to install a metal plate for noise removal, the metal plate or the like may be attached to the pedestal plate 303, and noise countermeasures are simple. Can be realized.

取付台には、パチンコ機埌方からみお右端郚に䞊䞋䞀察の掛止ピンが蚭けられおおり、掛止ピンを前蚘軞受け郚に䞊方から挿通させるこずで、第制埡基板ナニットが本䜓枠に察しお回動可胜に片持ち支持される。取付台の巊端郚には締結具ずしお䞊䞋䞀察のナむラッチが蚭けられおおり、ナむラッチを前蚘被締結孔にはめ蟌むこずで、第制埡基板ナニットが本䜓枠に固定される。なお、軞受け郚及び掛止ピンが前蚘支軞郚に、被締結孔及びナむラッチが前蚘締結郚に、それぞれ盞圓する。   The mounting base 301 is provided with a pair of upper and lower latching pins 305 at the right end when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the second control board unit is inserted into the bearing 237 from above by inserting the latching pins 305 from above. 202 is cantilevered so as to be rotatable with respect to the main body frame 12. A pair of upper and lower nail latches 306 are provided as fasteners at the left end of the mounting base 301, and the second control board unit 202 is fixed to the main body frame 12 by fitting the nail latch 306 into the tightened hole 239. The bearing portion 237 and the latch pin 305 correspond to the support shaft portion M4, and the fastened hole 239 and the ny latch 306 correspond to the fastening portion M5, respectively.

次に、裏パックナニットの構成を図〜図に基づいお説明する。図は裏パックナニットの正面図、図は裏パックナニットの分解斜芖図である。図はタンクレヌルの分解斜芖図である。   Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 is a front view of the back pack unit 203, and FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view of the back pack unit 203. FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail.

裏パックナニットは、裏パックず遊技球の払出機構郚ずが䞀䜓化されるこずにより構成されおいる。裏パックは䟋えば暹脂等の合成暹脂により䞀䜓成型されおおり、略平坊状のベヌス郚ず、パチンコ機埌方に突出し暪長の略盎方䜓圢状をなす保護カバヌ郚ずを有する。保護カバヌ郚は巊右偎面及び䞊面が閉鎖され䞔぀䞋面のみが開攟された圢状をなし、少なくずも可倉衚瀺ナニットを囲むのに十分な倧きさを有する。䜆し、本実斜の圢態では、前述の音声ランプ制埡装眮も䜵せお囲む構成ずなっおいる。保護カバヌ郚の背面には倚数の通気孔が蚭けられおいる。通気孔は各々が長孔状をなし、それぞれの通気孔が比范的近い䜍眮で隣り合うよう蚭けられおいる。埓っお、隣り合う通気孔間にある暹脂郚分を切断するこずにより、裏パックの背面を容易に開口させるこずができる。぀たり、通気孔間の暹脂郚分を切断しおその内郚の衚瀺制埡装眮等を露出させるこずで、所定の怜定等を容易に実斜するこずができるようになっおいる。   The back pack unit 203 is configured by integrating a back pack 351 and a game ball payout mechanism 352. The back pack 351 is integrally formed of, for example, a synthetic resin such as ABS resin, and includes a substantially flat base portion 353 and a protective cover portion 354 that protrudes rearward of the pachinko machine 10 and has a horizontally long substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 354 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and only the lower surface is opened, and has a size sufficient to surround at least the variable display unit 35. However, in this embodiment, the above-described sound lamp control device 272 is also enclosed. A large number of ventilation holes 354 a are provided on the back surface of the protective cover portion 354. The vent holes 354a are each formed in a long hole shape, and are provided so that the respective vent holes 354a are adjacent to each other at relatively close positions. Therefore, the back surface of the back pack 351 can be easily opened by cutting the resin portion between the adjacent vent holes 354a. That is, a predetermined test or the like can be easily performed by cutting the resin portion between the air holes 354a and exposing the display control device 214 and the like inside the resin portion.

裏パックのベヌス郚には、保護カバヌ郚を迂回するようにしお払出機構郚が配蚭されおいる。すなわち、裏パックの最䞊郚には䞊方に開口したタンクが蚭けられおおり、タンクには遊技ホヌルの島蚭備から䟛絊される遊技球が逐次補絊される。タンクの䞋方には、䟋えば暪方向列条の球通路を有し䞋流偎に向けお緩やかに傟斜するタンクレヌルが連結され、タンクレヌルの䞋流偎には䞊䞋方向に延びるケヌスレヌルが連結されおいる。払出装眮はケヌスレヌルの最䞋流郚に蚭けられ、払出制埡装眮の制埡により払出モヌタが駆動されお必芁個数の遊技球の払出が適宜行われる。払出装眮より払い出された遊技球は払出通路等を通じお前蚘䞊皿等に䟛絊される。なお、図瀺は省略するが、ケヌスレヌルの䞊流郚には、タンクやタンクレヌルから䟛絊される遊技球の有無を怜出するタンク球無しセンサが蚭けられおいる。たた、払出装眮には、払出モヌタの回転を怜出する払出回転センサず、払い出される遊技球数をカりントする払出カりントスむッチずが蚭けられおいる。

タンクレヌルには、圓該タンクレヌルに振動を付加するためのバむブレヌタが取り付けられおいる。バむブレヌタは、バむブモヌタずそのバむブモヌタを収容する合成暹脂補のケヌスずによりナニット化されおおり、本の脚郚でタンクレヌルに取り付けられおいる。埓っお、仮にタンクレヌル付近で球詰たりが生じた際、バむブレヌタが駆動されるこずで球詰たりが解消されるようになっおいる。
A payout mechanism portion 352 is disposed on the base portion 353 of the back pack 351 so as to bypass the protective cover portion 354. That is, a tank 355 opened upward is provided at the uppermost portion of the back pack 351, and game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 355. Below the tank 355, for example, a tank rail 356 having two rows (two rows) of ball passages in the horizontal direction and gently inclined toward the downstream side is connected, and the tank rail 356 extends in the vertical direction on the downstream side. A case rail 357 is connected. The payout device 358 is provided in the most downstream portion of the case rail 357, and the payout motor 358a is driven by the control of the payout control device 311 so that a required number of game balls are paid out appropriately. The game balls paid out from the payout device 358 are supplied to the upper plate 23 and the like through the payout passage 359 and the like. Although not shown in the figure, a tank ball absence sensor that detects the presence or absence of a game ball supplied from the tank 355 or the tank rail 356 is provided upstream of the case rail 357. The payout device 358 is provided with a payout rotation sensor that detects the rotation of the payout motor 358a and a payout count switch that counts the number of game balls to be paid out.

A vibrator 360 for applying vibration to the tank rail 356 is attached to the tank rail 356. Vibrator 360 is unitized by a vibrator motor and a synthetic resin case that accommodates the vibrator motor, and is attached to tank rail 356 by two legs 360a. Therefore, if a ball clogging occurs near the tank rail 356, the vibrator 360 is driven to eliminate the ball clogging.

タンクレヌルの構成぀いお詳述するず、図に瀺すように、タンクレヌルは䞊方に開口した長尺暋状をなすレヌル本䜓を有しおいる。レヌル本䜓の䞊流郚には球面状の球受郚が圢成され、球受郚によりタンクより萜䞋しおきた遊技球が円滑にレヌル本䜓内に取り蟌たれるようになっおいる。レヌル本䜓には長手方向に延びる仕切壁が蚭けられおおり、仕切壁により遊技球が二手に分流されるようになっおいる。仕切壁により仕切られた条の球通路は遊技球の盎埄よりも僅かに幅広ずなっおいる。仕切壁により仕切られた各球通路の底面には、筋又は筋の突条が蚭けられるず共に、その突条の偎方に塵埃を萜䞋させるための開口郚が蚭けられおいる。レヌル本䜓には、その䞋流偎半分皋床の倩井郚分を芆うようにしお敎流板が配蚭されおいる。敎流板は、䞋流偎ほどタンクレヌル内の球通路高さを制限するよう匓なりに反った圢状をしおおり、その䞋面には長手方向に延びる凞郚が圢成されおいる。これにより、タンクレヌル内を流れる各遊技球は最終的には䞊䞋に積み重なるこずなく䞋流偎に流出する。埓っお、タンクレヌルに倚量の遊技球が流れ蟌んできおも、遊技球の噛み蟌みが防止され、タンクレヌル内における球詰たりが発生し難くなっおいる。なお、レヌル本䜓が垯電防止のために黒色の導電性ポリカヌボネヌト暹脂により成圢されるのに察し、敎流板は球詰たり等を目芖で確認できるように透明のポリカヌボネヌト暹脂により成圢されおいる。敎流板は着脱可胜に蚭けられおおり、圓該敎流板を取り倖すこずによりタンクレヌル内のメンテナンスが容易に実斜できるようになっおいる。敎流板には、遊技球の流䞋を阻止するための手動匏のストッパが取り付けられおいる。   The configuration of the tank rail 356 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 25, the tank rail 356 has a rail body 361 having a long bowl shape opened upward. A spherical ball receiving portion 362 is formed in the upstream portion of the rail main body 361 so that the game ball dropped from the tank 355 by the ball receiving portion 362 is smoothly taken into the rail main body 361. The rail body 361 is provided with a partition wall 363 extending in the longitudinal direction, and the game balls are divided into two hands by the partition wall 363. The two ball passages partitioned by the partition wall 363 are slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball. On the bottom surface of each spherical passage partitioned by the partition wall 363, one or two ridges 364 are provided, and an opening 365 for dropping dust is provided on the side of the ridge 364. Yes. The rail body 361 is provided with a rectifying plate 367 so as to cover the ceiling portion of the downstream half. The rectifying plate 367 has a bow shape so as to limit the height of the ball passage in the tank rail 356 toward the downstream side, and a convex portion 368 extending in the longitudinal direction is formed on the lower surface thereof. Thereby, each game ball flowing in the tank rail 356 finally flows out downstream without being stacked up and down. Therefore, even if a large amount of game balls flow into the tank rail 356, the game balls are prevented from being bitten and the ball clogging in the tank rail 356 is difficult to occur. The rail main body 361 is formed of a black conductive polycarbonate resin to prevent electrification, while the rectifying plate 367 is formed of a transparent polycarbonate resin so that a clogging of a ball can be visually confirmed. The rectifying plate 367 is detachably provided. By removing the rectifying plate 367, maintenance in the tank rail 356 can be easily performed. A manual stopper 369 for preventing the game ball from flowing down is attached to the current plate 367.

図図の説明に戻り、払出機構郚には、払出制埡装眮から払出装眮ぞの払出指什の信号を䞭継する払出䞭継基板が蚭眮されるず共に、倖郚より䞻電源を取り蟌むための電源スむッチ基板が蚭眮されおいる。電源スむッチ基板には、電圧倉換噚を介しお䟋えば亀流ボルトの䞻電源が䟛絊され、電源スむッチの切替操䜜により電源又は電源ずされるようになっおいる。   Returning to the description of FIG. 23 and FIG. 24, the payout mechanism unit 352 is provided with a payout relay board 381 that relays a payout command signal from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358 and takes in the main power from the outside. A power switch board 382 is installed. The power switch board 382 is supplied with, for example, AC 24 volt main power via a voltage converter, and is turned on or off by switching the power switch 382a.

タンクから払出通路に至るたでの払出機構郚は䜕れも導電性を有する合成暹脂材料、䟋えば導電性ポリカヌボネヌト暹脂にお成圢され、その䞀郚におアヌスされおいる。これにより、遊技球の垯電によるノむズの発生が抑制されるようになっおいる。   The discharge mechanism 352 from the tank 355 to the discharge passage 359 is formed of a conductive synthetic resin material such as a conductive polycarbonate resin, and is grounded at a part thereof. Thereby, generation | occurrence | production of the noise by charging of a game ball is suppressed.

裏パックには、その右䞊郚に枠甚倖郚端子板が蚭けられおいる。枠甚倖郚端子板には、タンクやタンクレヌルで遊技球が䞍足した堎合に信号出力するための出力端子、所定個数の賞球を払い出す毎に信号出力するための出力端子、所定個数の遊技球を貞し出す毎に信号出力するための出力端子、本䜓枠の開攟時に信号出力するための出力端子、及び前扉枠の開攟時に信号出力するための出力端子が蚭けられおいる。そしお、これらの出力端子を通じお、遊技ホヌル偎の管理制埡装眮に察しお枠偎の状態に関する信号が出力される。なお、所定個数の遊技球を貞し出す毎に信号出力するための出力端子はいわゆる珟金機においおは䞍芁である。   The back pack 351 is provided with a frame external terminal plate 390 on the upper right portion thereof. The frame external terminal plate 390 has an output terminal for outputting a signal when there is a shortage of game balls in the tank 355 or the tank rail 356, an output terminal for outputting a signal every time a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, An output terminal for outputting a signal each time a number of game balls are lent, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the main body frame 12 is opened, and an output terminal for outputting a signal when the front door frame 13 is opened are provided. . And the signal regarding the state on the frame side is output to the management control device on the game hall side through these output terminals. Note that an output terminal for outputting a signal every time a predetermined number of game balls are lent out is not necessary in a so-called cash machine.

裏パックには、枠甚倖郚端子板に隣接しお略四角圢状の窓郚が蚭けられおいる。埓っお、裏パックナニットを本䜓枠に取り付けた状態では、窓郚を通じお遊技盀裏面の盀甚倖郚端子板が露出し、裏パックナニットを装着したたたで盀甚倖郚端子板の操䜜を行うこずができるようになっおいる。前述のずおり、盀甚倖郚端子板は取り倖し容易な状態で集合板ナニットに取り付けられおいるこずから、盀甚倖郚端子板の配線を接続したたたで、窓郚を介しお圓該盀甚倖郚端子板を取り出すこずも可胜ずなる。裏パックの右䞊郚には本䜓枠の開攟の状態を怜出するための本䜓枠開攟スむッチが蚭けられおおり、倖枠に察しお本䜓枠を閉じた状態では圓該スむッチの金属接点が閉じお本䜓枠の閉鎖が怜知され、倖枠に察しお本䜓枠を開いた状態では金属接点が開いお本䜓枠の開攟が怜知されるようになっおいる。   The back pack 351 is provided with a substantially rectangular window 391 adjacent to the frame external terminal plate 390. Therefore, in a state where the back pack unit 103 is attached to the main body frame 12, the board external terminal plate 230 on the back side of the game board 30 is exposed through the window portion 391, and the board external terminal plate 230 remains attached with the back pack unit 103 attached. Can be operated. As described above, since the board external terminal plate 230 is attached to the collective board unit 215 in an easily removable state, the board external terminal board 230 is connected to the board via the window portion 391 while being connected. The external terminal plate 230 can be taken out. A main body frame opening switch 392 for detecting the open state of the main body frame 12 is provided at the upper right portion of the back pack 351. When the main body frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the metal of the switch 392 is provided. The contact is closed and the closing of the main body frame 12 is detected. When the main body frame 12 is opened relative to the outer frame 11, the metal contact is opened and the opening of the main body frame 12 is detected.

裏パックには、パチンコ機埌方からみお右端郚に䞊䞋䞀察の掛止ピンが蚭けられおおり、掛止ピンを前蚘軞受け郚に䞊方から挿通させるこずで、裏パックナニットが本䜓枠に察しお回動可胜に片持ち支持される。裏パックには、巊端郚に締結具ずしお䞊䞋䞀察のナむラッチが蚭けられるず共に、䞊端郚に係止孔が蚭けられおおり、ナむラッチを前蚘被締結孔にはめ蟌むず共に、係止孔に前蚘固定具を挿入した䞊で圓該固定具を回動操䜜するこずで、裏パックナニットが本䜓枠に固定される。たた、前蚘固定具によっおも裏パックナニットが本䜓枠に固定される。なお、軞受け郚及び掛止ピンが前蚘支軞郚に、被締結孔及びナむラッチが前蚘締結郚に、固定具及び係止孔が前蚘係止郚に、それぞれ盞圓する。たた、固定具が前蚘係止郚に盞圓する。   The back pack 351 is provided with a pair of upper and lower latch pins 385 at the right end when viewed from the back of the pachinko machine 10. By inserting the latch pins 385 into the bearing portion 238 from above, the back pack unit 203 is mounted. The body frame 12 is cantilevered so as to be rotatable. The back pack 351 is provided with a pair of upper and lower nai latches 386 as fasteners at the left end portion, and is provided with a locking hole 387 at the upper end portion. The nai latch 386 is fitted into the tightened hole 240 and the locking hole. The back pack unit 203 is fixed to the main body frame 12 by rotating the fixing tool 242 after inserting the fixing tool 242 into 387. Further, the back pack unit 203 is also fixed to the main body frame 12 by the fixing tools 241 and 243. The bearing portion 238 and the latch pin 385 correspond to the support shaft portion M6, the fastened hole 240 and the ny latch 386 correspond to the fastening portion M7, and the fixture 242 and the locking hole 387 correspond to the locking portion M8, respectively. To do. Further, the fixture 243 corresponds to the locking portion M9.

次に、本パチンコ機の電気的構成に぀いお、図のブロック図に基づいお説明する。   Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described based on the block diagram of FIG.

䞻制埡装眮には、挔算装眮であるチップマむコンずしおのが搭茉されおいる。には、該により実行される各皮の制埡プログラムや固定倀デヌタを蚘憶したず、その内に蚘憶される制埡プログラムの実行に際しお各皮のデヌタ等を䞀時的に蚘憶するためのメモリであるず、割蟌回路やタむマ回路、デヌタ送受信回路などの各皮回路が内蔵されおいる。   The main controller 271 is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The CPU 501 includes a ROM 502 that stores various control programs executed by the CPU 501 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 502 is executed. A RAM 503 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated.

は、パチンコ機の電源の遮断埌においおも電源装眮からバックアップ電圧が䟛絊されおデヌタを保持バックアップできる構成ずなっおおり、には、各皮のデヌタ等を䞀時的に蚘憶するためのメモリや゚リアの他に、バックアップ゚リアが蚭けられおいる。   The RAM 503 is configured to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. The RAM 503 temporarily stores various data and the like. In addition to the memory and area for this purpose, a backup area 503a is provided.

バックアップ゚リアは、停電などの発生により電源が遮断された堎合においお、電源遮断時停電発生時を含む。以䞋同様のスタックポむンタや、各レゞスタ、等の倀を蚘憶しおおくための゚リアであり、電源投入時停電解消による電源投入を含む。以䞋同様には、バックアップ゚リアの情報に基づいおパチンコ機の状態が電源遮断前の状態に埩垰できるようになっおいる。バックアップ゚リアぞの曞き蟌みは割蟌み凊理図参照によっお電源遮断時に実行され、バックアップ゚リアに曞き蟌たれた各倀の埩垰は電源投入時のメむン凊理図参照においお実行される。なお、の端子ノンマスカブル割蟌端子には、停電等の発生による電源遮断時に、停電監芖回路からの停電信号が入力されるように構成されおおり、停電の発生により停電時凊理ずしおの割蟌み凊理が即座に実行される。   The backup area 503a stores values such as a stack pointer, each register, I / O, etc. when the power is shut down (including when a power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The area of the pachinko machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power cut-off based on the information in the backup area 503a when the power is turned on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation). Yes. Writing to the backup area 503a is executed when the power is shut off by the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 38), and restoration of each value written in the backup area 503a is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 31) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The NMI interrupt process as a process is immediately executed.

䞻制埡装眮のには、アドレスバス及びデヌタバスで構成されるバスラむンを介しお入出力ポヌトが接続されおいる。入出力ポヌトには、埌述する消去スむッチ回路、払出制埡装眮、衚瀺制埡装眮や、その他図瀺しないスむッチ矀などが接続されおいる。   An input / output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 of the main control device 271 via a bus line 504 including an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 505 is connected to a RAM erasing switch circuit 543, a payout control device 311, a display control device 214, and other switches not shown.

払出制埡装眮は、払出モヌタにより賞球や貞し球の払出制埡を行うものである。挔算装眮であるは、そのにより実行される制埡プログラムや固定倀デヌタ等を蚘憶したず、ワヌクメモリ等ずしお䜿甚されるずを備えおいる。   The payout control device 311 controls payout of prize balls and rental balls by a payout motor 358a. The CPU 511 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 512 that stores a control program executed by the CPU 511, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 513 that is used as a work memory or the like.

払出制埡装眮のは、䞻制埡装眮のず同様に、パチンコ機の電源の遮断埌においおも電源装眮からバックアップ電圧が䟛絊されおデヌタを保持バックアップできる構成ずなっおおり、には、各皮のデヌタ等を䞀時的に蚘憶するためのメモリや゚リアの他に、バックアップ゚リアが蚭けられおいる。   The RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 is configured to hold (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 313 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, like the RAM 503 of the main control device 271. The RAM 513 is provided with a backup area 513a in addition to a memory and an area for temporarily storing various data.

バックアップ゚リアは、停電などの発生により電源が遮断された堎合においお、電源遮断時のスタックポむンタや、各レゞスタ、等の倀を蚘憶しおおくための゚リアであり、電源投入時には、このバックアップ゚リアの情報に基づいおパチンコ機の状態が電源遮断前の状態に埩垰できるようになっおいる。バックアップ゚リアぞの曞き蟌みは割蟌み凊理によっお電源遮断時に実行され、バックアップ゚リアに曞き蟌たれた各倀の埩垰は電源投入時のメむン凊理においお実行される。なお、䞻制埡装眮のず同様、の端子にも、停電等の発生による電源遮断時に停電監芖回路から停電信号が入力されるように構成されおおり、停電の発生により、割蟌み凊理が即座に実行されるようになっおいる。   The backup area 513a is an area for storing the stack pointer, each register, I / O, and the like when the power is shut down when the power is shut down due to a power failure or the like. Based on the information in the backup area 513a, the state of the pachinko machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power is shut off. Writing to the backup area 513a is executed when the power is shut off by the NMI interrupt process, and restoration of each value written to the backup area 513a is executed in the main process when the power is turned on. As with the CPU 501 of the main controller 271, the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The NMI interrupt process is immediately executed.

払出制埡装眮のには、アドレスバス及びデヌタバスで構成されるバスラむンを介しお入出力ポヌトが接続されおいる。入出力ポヌトには、消去スむッチ回路、䞻制埡装眮、発射制埡装眮、払出モヌタなどがそれぞれ接続されおいる。   An input / output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 via a bus line 514 including an address bus and a data bus. A RAM erase switch circuit 543, a main control device 271, a firing control device 312, a payout motor 358a, and the like are connected to the input / output port 515, respectively.

発射制埡装眮は、発射モヌタによる遊技球の発射を蚱可又は犁止するものであり、発射モヌタは、所定条件が敎っおいる堎合に駆動が蚱可される。具䜓的には、払出制埡装眮から発射蚱可信号が出力されおいるこず、遊技者が遊技球発射ハンドルに觊れおいるこずをセンサ信号により怜出しおいるこず、発射を停止させるための発射停止スむッチが操䜜されおいないこずを条件に、発射モヌタが駆動され、遊技球発射ハンドルの操䜜量に応じた匷さで遊技球が発射される。   The launch control device 312 permits or prohibits the launch of the game ball by the launch motor 229, and the launch motor 229 is permitted to drive when a predetermined condition is met. Specifically, it is detected by a sensor signal that a firing permission signal is output from the payout control device 311, the player is touching the game ball launch handle 18, and a launch for stopping the launch. On condition that the stop switch is not operated, the launch motor 229 is driven, and the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the game ball launch handle 18.

衚瀺制埡装眮は、䞻制埡装眮から送信される図柄衚瀺コマンドに基づいお第図柄衚瀺装眮における第図柄特別図柄の倉動衚瀺、及び第図柄衚瀺装眮における第図柄普通図柄の倉動衚瀺を制埡するものである。䜆し、衚瀺制埡装眮に぀いお第図柄の衚瀺制埡にかかる構成は埌述する。たたその他に、衚瀺制埡装眮は、音声ランプ制埡装眮に察しお制埡コマンドを送信し、音声ランプ制埡装眮は、衚瀺制埡装眮から受信した制埡コマンドに埓っお各皮ランプ、スピヌカの制埡や、第図柄衚瀺装眮の衚瀺画面䞊に蚭けられた右扉及び巊扉の駆動を制埡する。   Based on the symbol display command transmitted from the main controller 271, the display control device 214 displays the variation of the first symbol (special symbol) on the first symbol display device 41 and the second symbol (second symbol on the second symbol display device 42). This is to control the variation display of normal symbols. However, the configuration related to the display control of the first symbol of the display control device 214 will be described later. In addition, the display control device 214 transmits a control command to the audio lamp control device 272. The audio lamp control device 272 controls various lamps and speakers according to the control command received from the display control device 214, 1 The drive of the right door 171 and the left door 172 provided on the display screen of the symbol display device 41 is controlled.

電源装眮は、パチンコ機の各郚に電源を䟛絊するための電源郚ず、停電等による電源遮断を監芖する停電監芖回路ず、消去スむッチに接続されおなる消去スむッチ回路ずを備えおいる。電源郚は、図瀺しない電源経路を通じお、䞻制埡装眮や払出制埡装眮等に察しお各々に必芁な動䜜電源を䟛絊する。その抂芁ずしおは、電源郚は、倖郚より䟛絊される亀流ボルト電源を取り蟌み、各皮スむッチやモヌタ等を駆動するための電源、ロゞック甚の電源、バックアップ甚のバックアップ電源などを生成し、これら電源、電源及びバックアップ電源を䞻制埡装眮や払出制埡装眮等に察しお䟛絊する。なお、発射制埡装眮に察しおは払出制埡装眮を介しお動䜜電源電源、電源等が䟛絊される。   The power supply device 313 includes a power supply unit 541 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 542 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 connected to the RAM erase switch 323. And. The power supply unit 541 supplies necessary operating power to the main control device 271 and the payout control device 311 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 541 takes in an AC 24 volt power supply supplied from the outside, and generates a + 12V power supply for driving various switches and motors, a + 5V power supply for logic, a backup power supply for RAM backup, and the like. Then, these + 12V power supply, + 5V power supply and backup power supply are supplied to the main control device 271 and the payout control device 311. Note that operation power (+12 V power, +5 V power, etc.) is supplied to the launch control device 312 via the payout control device 311.

停電監芖回路は、停電等の発生による電源遮断時に、䞻制埡装眮の及び払出制埡装眮のの各端子ぞ停電信号を出力するための回路である。停電監芖回路は、電源郚から出力される最倧電圧である盎流安定ボルトの電圧を監芖し、この電圧がボルト未満になった堎合に停電電源遮断の発生ず刀断しお、停電信号を䞻制埡装眮及び払出制埡装眮ぞ出力する。停電信号の出力によっお、䞻制埡装眮及び払出制埡装眮は、停電の発生を認識し、割蟌み凊理を実行する。なお、電源郚は、盎流安定ボルトの電圧がボルト未満になった埌においおも、割蟌み凊理の実行に充分な時間の間、制埡系の駆動電圧であるボルトの出力を正垞倀に維持するように構成されおいる。よっお、䞻制埡装眮及び払出制埡装眮は、割蟌み凊理を正垞に実行し完了するこずができる。   The power failure monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main control device 271 and the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 542 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volts, it is determined that a power failure (power shutdown) occurs. The power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 271 and the payout controller 311. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 271 and the payout controller 311 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 541 outputs the output of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, to a normal value for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Configured to maintain. Therefore, the main control device 271 and the payout control device 311 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing.

消去スむッチ回路は、消去スむッチのスむッチ信号を取り蟌み、そのスむッチの状態に応じお䞻制埡装眮及び払出制埡装眮のバックアップデヌタをクリアするための消去信号を出力する回路である。消去スむッチが抌䞋された際、消去スむッチ回路は、䞻制埡装眮及び払出制埡装眮に察しお消去信号を出力する。これにより、消去スむッチが抌された状態でパチンコ機の電源が投入されるず、䞻制埡装眮及び払出制埡装眮においおそれぞれのバックアップ゚リアのデヌタがクリアされる。   The RAM erase switch circuit 543 receives a switch signal of the RAM erase switch 323, and outputs a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data of the main controller 271 and the payout controller 311 in accordance with the state of the switch 323. It is. When the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erase switch circuit 543 outputs a RAM erase signal SG2 to the main controller 271 and the payout controller 311. Thereby, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the data in the backup areas 503a and 513a is cleared in the main controller 271 and the payout controller 311.

次に、衚瀺制埡装眮に぀いお第図柄特別図柄の衚瀺制埡にかかる構成を図に基づいお説明する。   Next, the structure concerning the display control of the first symbol (special symbol) of the display control device 214 will be described with reference to FIG.

図に瀺すように、衚瀺制埡装眮は、、プログラム、ワヌク、ビデオディスプレむプロセッサ、ビデオ、キャラクタ及び入力ポヌトを備えおいる。衚瀺制埡装眮のは、䞻制埡装眮から送信されおくる図柄衚瀺コマンド停止図柄コマンド、倉動パタヌンコマンド、確定コマンド等を入力ポヌトを介しお受信するずずもに、受信コマンドを解析し又は受信コマンドに基づき所定の挔算凊理を行っおの制埡具䜓的にはに察する内郚コマンドの生成を実斜する。プログラムは、により実行される各皮の制埡プログラムや固定倀デヌタを蚘憶するためのメモリであり、背景画像甚の圢匏画像デヌタも䜵せお蚘憶保持されおいる。ワヌクは、による各皮プログラムの実行時に䜿甚されるワヌクデヌタやフラグ等を䞀時的に蚘憶するためのメモリである。   As shown in FIG. 27, the display control device 214 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video display processor (VDP) 524, a video RAM 525, a character ROM 526, and an input port 527. The CPU 521 of the display control device 214 receives the symbol display command (stop symbol command, variation pattern command, confirmation command, etc.) transmitted from the main control device 271 via the input port 527 and analyzes the received command or Based on the received command, predetermined arithmetic processing is performed to control the VDP 524 (specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 524). The program ROM 522 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the CPU 521 and fixed value data, and also stores and holds JPEG format image data for background images. The work RAM 523 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when the CPU 521 executes various programs.

は、第図柄衚瀺装眮に組み蟌たれたドラむバ液晶駆動回路を盎接操䜜する䞀皮の描画回路である。はチップ化されおいるため「描画チップ」ずも呌ばれ、その実䜓は、描画凊理専甚のファヌムりェアを内蔵したマむコンチップずでも蚀うべきものである。は、、ビデオ等のそれぞれのタむミングを調敎しおデヌタの読み曞きに介圚するずずもに、ビデオに蚘憶される衚瀺デヌタを、キャラクタから所定のタむミングで読み出しお第図柄衚瀺装眮に衚瀺させる。   The VDP 524 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an LCD driver (liquid crystal driving circuit) incorporated in the first symbol display device 41. Since the VDP 524 is formed as an IC chip, it is also called a “drawing chip”, and the substance of the VDP 524 can be said to be a microcomputer chip with a dedicated firmware for drawing processing. The VDP 524 adjusts the respective timings of the CPU 521, the video RAM 525, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads display data stored in the video RAM 525 from the character ROM 526 at a predetermined timing to the first symbol display device 41. Display.

ビデオは、第図柄衚瀺装眮に衚瀺される衚瀺デヌタを蚘憶するためのメモリであり、ビデオの内容を曞き替えるこずにより第図柄衚瀺装眮の衚瀺内容が倉曎される。キャラクタは、第図柄衚瀺装眮に衚瀺される図柄などのキャラクタデヌタを蚘憶するための画像デヌタラむブラリずしおの圹割を担うものである。このキャラクタには、各皮の衚瀺図柄のビットマップ圢匏画像デヌタ、ビットマップ画像の各ドットでの衚珟色を決定する際に参照する色パレットテヌブル等が保持されおいる。特に、ビットマップ圢匏の図柄画像デヌタにはそれぞれ図柄コヌド図柄番号が付䞎されおおり、コマンドレベルでは各図柄画像を図柄コヌドだけで管理可胜ずしおいる。なお、キャラクタを耇数蚭け、各キャラクタに分担しお画像デヌタ等を蚘憶させおおくこずも可胜である。たた、前蚘プログラムに蚘憶した背景画像甚の圢匏画像デヌタをキャラクタに蚘憶する構成ずするこずも可胜である。   The video RAM 525 is a memory for storing display data displayed on the first symbol display device 41, and the display contents of the first symbol display device 41 are changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 525. The character ROM 526 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the first symbol display device 41. The character ROM 526 holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. In particular, a symbol code (symbol number) is assigned to each symbol image data in the bitmap format, and each symbol image can be managed only by the symbol code at the command level. Note that a plurality of character ROMs 526 may be provided, and image data and the like may be stored in each character ROM 526 in a shared manner. Further, it is also possible to store the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 522 in the character ROM 526.

ここで、第図柄衚瀺装眮に衚瀺される第図柄ず、同第図柄衚瀺装眮における衚瀺画面䞊の衚瀺内容ずに぀いお図図に基づいお説明する。図は、第図柄たる耇数の図柄を個々に瀺す図面である。図は、第図柄衚瀺装眮の衚瀺画面を瀺す図面であり、には衚瀺画面内の領域区分蚭定ず有効ラむン蚭定ずを、には実際の図柄をはめ蟌んだ衚瀺内容を瀺す。   Here, the 1st symbol displayed on the 1st symbol display apparatus 41 and the display content on the display screen in the 1st symbol display apparatus 41 are demonstrated based on FIG. 28, FIG. FIG. 28 is a drawing individually showing a plurality of symbols as the first symbol. FIG. 29 is a drawing showing the display screen G of the first symbol display device 41, where (a) shows the area division setting and effective line setting in the display screen G, and (b) shows the actual symbol. Show the display contents.

図の〜に瀺すように、第図柄は、「」〜「」の数字を各々付した皮類の䞻図柄ず、花びら圢状の絵図柄からなる皮類の副図柄ずにより構成されおいる。詳しくは、各䞻図柄では、朚箱よりなる埌方図柄の䞊に「」〜「」の数字が付されおおり、そのうち奇数番号の䞻図柄では、朚箱の前偎面ほが䞀杯に各々の数字番号が倧きく付されおいる。これに察し、偶数番号の䞻図柄では、朚箱の前偎面ほが䞀杯に描かれたお守り、颚呂敷、ヘルメット、鉋、やかんずいった付属図柄の暪に各々の数字番号が比范的小さく付されおいる。この堎合、奇数番号が付された䞻図柄は「高確率図柄」に盞圓し、圓該高確率図柄が揃うこずで特別遊技状態たる倧圓たり状態に突入し、さらにその埌、高確率状態に移行する。たた、偶数番号が付された䞻図柄は「䜎確率図柄」に盞圓し、圓該䜎確率図柄が揃うこずで倧圓たり状態に移行するが、かかる堎合には高確率状態には移行しない。なお、高確率状態ずは、第図柄の組み合わせが予め定められた確率倉動図柄の組み合わせによっお倧圓たりになり付加䟡倀ずしおその埌の倧圓たり確率がアップした状態、いわゆる確倉の時をいい、通垞状態䜎確率状態ずはそのような確倉状態でない時をいう。   As shown in (a) to (k) of FIG. 28, the first symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers “0” to “9” and one type of petal-shaped symbols. It consists of sub-designs. Specifically, in each main symbol, numbers “0” to “9” are attached on the rear symbol made of a wooden box, of which the odd symbols (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) Each numerical number is assigned to the front side of the wooden box. On the other hand, in the main symbols of even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8), each of the main symbols beside the attached symbols such as amulet, furoshiki, helmet, bag, kettle drawn on the front side of the wooden box. Numeric numbers are relatively small. In this case, the main symbol to which the odd number (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) is attached corresponds to the “high probability symbol”, and when the high probability symbol is aligned, the big game state that is a special gaming state is entered, After that, it shifts to a high probability state. In addition, the main symbol with an even number (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) corresponds to a “low probability symbol”, and when the low probability symbol is aligned, it shifts to a jackpot state. It does not transition to a high probability state. The high probability state refers to a state in which the combination of the first symbol is a big hit by a predetermined combination of probability variation symbols, and the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as added value, that is, a so-called probable change. (Probability state) refers to a time when such a probability variation state is not present.

遊技者は、高確率図柄で第図柄が揃うこず、すなわち第図柄の倉動停止時に䞻図柄に付された数字が高確率番号奇数番号であるこずを期埅しお遊技を行うが、圓該高確率図柄では数字図柄が倧きく描かれおおり高確率であるこずが匷調されおいるため、遊技の興趣が高められる。   The player plays the game with the expectation that the first symbol is aligned with a high probability symbol, that is, the number attached to the main symbol when the fluctuation of the first symbol is stopped is a high probability number (odd number). In the high-probability symbol, the numerical symbol is drawn large and it is emphasized that the probability is high. Therefore, the interest of the game is enhanced.

次に、第図柄衚瀺装眮の衚瀺画面に぀いお説明する。図のに瀺すように、第図柄衚瀺装眮の衚瀺画面は、倧きくは䞊䞋に分割され、䞋が第図柄を倉動衚瀺する䞻衚瀺領域、それ以倖䞊が予告挔出やキャラクタを衚瀺する副衚瀺領域ずなっおいる。䞻衚瀺領域が「第の衚瀺領域」に盞圓し、副衚瀺領域が「第の衚瀺領域」に盞圓する。   Next, the display screen G of the first symbol display device 41 will be described. As shown in FIG. 29 (a), the display screen G of the first symbol display device 41 is roughly divided into two vertically, and the lower 2/3 is the main display region Rm in which the first symbol is variably displayed. (Upper 1/3) is a sub display area Rs for displaying a notice effect and a character. The main display area Rm corresponds to the “first display area”, and the sub display area Rs corresponds to the “second display area”.

䞻衚瀺領域には、巊・䞭・右の぀の図柄列が蚭定されおおり、各図柄列〜に、前述した第図柄が芏定の順序で衚瀺される。すなわち、各図柄列〜では、数字の昇順又は降順に䞻図柄が配列されるず共に各䞻図柄の間に副図柄が぀ず぀配されおいる。このずき、各図柄列〜には、個の䞻図柄及び個の副図柄からなる蚈個の第図柄が蚭定されおいる。そしお、䞻衚瀺領域では、各図柄列〜に個の第図柄が呚期性をもっお䞊から䞋ぞずスクロヌルするように倉動衚瀺される。特に、巊図柄列においおは䞻図柄の数字が降順に珟れ、䞭図柄列及び右図柄列においおは䞻図柄の数字が昇順に珟れるように配列されおいる。たた、䞻衚瀺領域には、各図柄列〜毎に䞊・䞭・䞋の段に第図柄が衚瀺され、結果ずしお段×列の蚈個の第図柄が衚瀺されるようになっおいる。   In the main display area Rm, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of left, middle, and right are set, and the above-described first symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between the main symbols. At this time, a total of 20 first symbols including 10 main symbols and 10 sub symbols are set in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In the main display region Rm, 20 first symbols are variably displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 so as to scroll from top to bottom with periodicity. In particular, the numbers of main symbols appear in descending order in the left symbol row Z1, and the numbers of main symbols appear in ascending order in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3. In the main display area Rm, the first symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. As a result, a total of nine first symbols in three rows × three rows are displayed. It has come to be.

䞻衚瀺領域には、぀の有効ラむン、すなわち䞊ラむン、䞭ラむン、䞋ラむン、右䞊がりラむン、巊䞊がりラむンが蚭定されおいる。そしお、毎回の遊技に際しおは、巊図柄列→右図柄列→䞭図柄列の順に第図柄の倉動衚瀺が停止され、図柄確定した時に第図柄がいずれかの有効ラむン䞊に倧圓たり図柄の組合せ本実斜の圢態では、同䞀の䞻図柄の組合せで揃えば倧圓たりずしお倧圓たり動画が衚瀺されるようになっおいる。   In the main display area Rm, five effective lines, that is, an upper line L1, a middle line L2, a lower line L3, a right rising line L4, and a left rising line L5 are set. In each game, the variable display of the first symbol is stopped in the order of the left symbol column Z1 → the right symbol column Z3 → the middle symbol column Z2, and when the symbol is confirmed, the first symbol is a big hit on any active line. If a combination of symbols (in this embodiment, the same combination of main symbols) is arranged, a jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

たた、副衚瀺領域は、䞻衚瀺領域よりも䞊方においお暪長に蚭けられおおり、さらに領域に等区分されおいる。この堎合、副衚瀺領域の領域のうち、右偎の領域が第予告領域、巊偎の領域が第予告領域、䞭倮の領域が第予告領域ずなっおいる。第予告領域及び第予告領域は、前述した右扉及び巊扉図参照に重なり合う領域であっお、右扉及び巊扉が配蚭された状態では、第予告領域は右扉により隠され、第予告領域は巊扉により隠されるようになっおいる。これに察しお、第予告領域は、右扉及び巊扉に重なり合うこずがなく、垞に遊技者により芖認できる衚瀺領域ずなっおいる。   The sub display area Rs is horizontally long above the main display area Rm, and is further equally divided into three areas. In this case, of the three areas of the sub display area Rs, the right area is the first notice area Rs1, the left area is the second notice area Rs2, and the center area is the third notice area Rs3. The first notice area Rs1 and the second notice area Rs2 are areas that overlap the right door 171 and the left door 172 (see FIG. 5) described above, and in the state where the right door 171 and the left door 172 are disposed, The first warning area Rs1 is hidden by the right door 171 and the second warning area Rs2 is hidden by the left door 172. On the other hand, the third notice area Rs3 does not overlap the right door 171 and the left door 172, and is a display area that can always be viewed by the player.

実際の衚瀺画面では、図のに瀺すように、䞻衚瀺領域に第図柄の䞻図柄ず副図柄ずが合蚈個衚瀺される。なお、同図には任意の衚瀺状態を瀺す。たた、副衚瀺領域においお、右扉及び巊扉が配蚭された状態では第予告領域及び第予告領域が隠され、その衚瀺内容は芖認できない。そしお、右扉が開攟されるこずで第予告領域が珟出し、圓該第予告領域においお所定の予告挔出が行われる。たた、巊扉が開攟されるこずで第予告領域が珟出し、圓該第予告領域においお所定の予告挔出が行われる。第予告領域では、通垞は所定のキャラクタ図ではハチマキを付けた少幎キャラクタが所定動䜜するような衚瀺が行われる。そしお、必芁に応じお圓該キャラクタ等による予告挔出が行われる。   On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 29 (b), a total of nine main symbols and sub-designs of the first symbol are displayed in the main display area Rm. The figure shows an arbitrary display state. Further, in the sub display area Rs, when the right door 171 and the left door 172 are disposed, the first notice area Rs1 and the second notice area Rs2 are hidden, and the display contents cannot be visually recognized. When the right door 171 is opened, the first notice area Rs1 appears, and a predetermined notice effect is performed in the first notice area Rs1. In addition, the second notice area Rs2 appears when the left door 172 is opened, and a predetermined notice effect is performed in the second notice area Rs2. In the third warning area Rs3, a display is normally performed so that a predetermined character (a boy character with a bee stick in the figure) performs a predetermined operation. And the notice effect by the said character etc. is performed as needed.

䞊蚘の通り、第図柄衚瀺装眮の衚瀺画面は、原則ずしおは䞻衚瀺領域ず副衚瀺領域ずに領域区分されおいるが、各衚瀺領域を跚ぐようにしお、或いは䞻衚瀺領域ず副衚瀺領域の少なくずも䞀郚ずを䞀぀に統合するようにしお衚瀺挔出を行うこずもできるようになっおいる。䟋えば、所定のリヌチ発生埌には、䞻衚瀺領域ず副衚瀺領域ずの領域区分をなくしお各衚瀺領域を合わせお぀の衚瀺領域ずし、圓該衚瀺領域を甚いおの衚瀺挔出が行われる。䜆し、リヌチ発生埌の衚瀺圢態等に぀いおは埌で詳述する。

因みに、本実斜の圢態では、右扉及び巊扉はその背埌を透芖できない構成ずなっおいるが、䟋えば右扉及び巊扉を半透明玠材で構成し、圓該右扉及び巊扉を通じおその背埌の画像ががんやり又は埮かに透芖できるようにしおもよい。この堎合、右扉及び巊扉に隠れた状態でも第予告領域及び第予告領域で衚瀺挔出を行うようにする。するず、右扉及び巊扉により第予告領域及び第予告領域が隠されおいおも、その背埌の挔出が埮かに透芖でき、倧圓たり状態に移行するこずぞの期埅を遊技者に䞎えるこずなどができる。
As described above, the display screen G of the first symbol display device 41 is divided into the main display region Rm and the sub display region Rs in principle, but it straddles each display region Rm, Rs, or A display effect can also be performed by integrating at least a part of the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs. For example, after a predetermined reach occurs, the display area Rm and Rs are combined into one display area by eliminating the area division between the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs, and a display effect using the display area is achieved. Done. However, the display form after the occurrence of reach will be described in detail later.

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the right door 171 and the left door 172 cannot be seen through the back, but for example, the right door 171 and the left door 172 are made of a translucent material, and the right door 171 and the left door 172 The image behind the door 172 may be blurred or slightly transparent. In this case, display effects are performed in the first notice area Rs1 and the second notice area Rs2 even in a state where the right door 171 and the left door 172 are hidden. Then, even if the first notice area Rs1 and the second notice area Rs2 are concealed by the right door 171 and the left door 172, the player can expect the expectation to shift to the big hit state by slightly seeing the effects behind them. Can be given to

次に、䞊蚘の劂く構成されたパチンコ機の動䜜に぀いお説明する。   Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

本実斜の圢態では、䞻制埡装眮内のは、遊技に際し各皮カりンタ情報を甚いお、倧圓たり抜遞や第図柄衚瀺装眮の図柄衚瀺の蚭定などを行うこずずしおおり、具䜓的には、図に瀺すように、倧圓たりの抜遞に䜿甚する倧圓たり乱数カりンタず、第図柄衚瀺装眮の倧圓たり図柄の遞択に䜿甚する倧圓たり図柄カりンタず、第図柄衚瀺装眮が倖れ倉動する際のリヌチ抜遞に䜿甚するリヌチ乱数カりンタず、倧圓たり乱数カりンタの初期倀蚭定に䜿甚する乱数初期倀カりンタず、第図柄衚瀺装眮の倉動パタヌン遞択に䜿甚する倉動皮別カりンタず、巊列、䞭列及び右列の各倖れ図柄の蚭定に䜿甚する巊・䞭・右の各倖れ図柄カりンタずを甚いるこずずしおいる。   In the present embodiment, the CPU 501 in the main control device 271 uses various counter information during the game to perform jackpot lottery, setting the symbol display of the first symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, As shown in FIG. 30, when the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, the jackpot symbol counter C2 used for the selection of the jackpot symbol of the first symbol display device 41, and the first symbol display device 41 are fluctuated and fluctuated. Reach random number counter C3 used for reach lottery, random number initial value counter CINI used for initial value setting of jackpot random number counter C1, variation type counters CS1 and CS2 used for variation pattern selection of the first symbol display device 41, , Left, middle and right out symbol counters CL, CM, CR used to set each out symbol in the left, middle and right columns It is set to be there.

このうち、カりンタ〜は、その曎新の郜床前回倀にが加算され、最倧倀に達した埌に戻るルヌプカりンタずなっおいる。たた、倖れ図柄カりンタは、内のレゞスタリフレッシュレゞスタを甚いおレゞスタ倀が加算され、結果的に数倀がランダムに倉化する構成ずなっおいる。各カりンタは短時間間隔で曎新され、その曎新倀がの所定領域に蚭定されたカりンタ甚バッファに適宜栌玍される。には、぀の実行゚リアず぀の保留゚リア保留第〜第゚リアずからなる保留球栌玍゚リアが蚭けられおおり、これらの各゚リアには、䜜動口ぞの遊技球の入賞履歎に合わせお、倧圓たり乱数カりンタ、倧圓たり図柄カりンタ及びリヌチ乱数カりンタの各倀が時系列的に栌玍されるようになっおいる。   Among these, the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS1, and CS2 are loop counters that each add 1 to the previous value and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Further, the out symbol counters CL, CM, CR are configured such that register values are added using an R register (refresh register) in the CPU 501, and as a result, numerical values change randomly. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503. The RAM 503 is provided with a holding ball storage area composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). In each of these areas, a game ball to the operation port 33 is provided. According to the winning history, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot symbol counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in time series.

各カりンタに぀いお詳しくは、倧圓たり乱数カりンタは、䟋えば〜の範囲内で順にず぀加算され、最倧倀぀たりに達した埌に戻る構成ずなっおいる。特に倧圓たり乱数カりンタが呚した堎合、その時点の乱数初期倀カりンタの倀が圓該倧圓たり乱数カりンタの初期倀ずしお読み蟌たれる。なお、乱数初期倀カりンタは、倧圓たり乱数カりンタず同様のルヌプカりンタであり倀〜、タむマ割蟌み毎に回曎新されるず共に通垞凊理の残䜙時間内で繰り返し曎新される。倧圓たり乱数カりンタは定期的に本実斜の圢態ではタむマ割蟌み毎に1
回曎新され、遊技球が䜜動口に入賞したタむミングでの保留球栌玍゚リアに栌玍される。倧圓たりずなる乱数の倀の数は、䜎確率時ず高確率時ずで皮類蚭定されおおり、䜎確率時に倧圓たりずなる乱数の倀の数はで、その倀は「」であり、高確率時に倧圓たりずなる乱数の倀の数はで、その倀は「」である。
For details of each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured such that, for example, 1 is sequentially added within a range of 0 to 676, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 676), it returns to 0. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 676), and is updated once for each timer interruption and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of normal processing. The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically (in this embodiment, 1 per timer interrupt).
Updated) and stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 at the timing when the game ball wins the operation port 33. The number of random number values that are jackpots is set at low probability and high probability, and the number of random numbers that are jackpots at low probability is 2, and the value is “337,673”. There are 10 random numbers that are big hits at high probability, and the values are “67, 131, 199, 269, 337, 401, 463, 523, 601, 661”.

倧圓たり図柄カりンタは、倧圓たりの際、第図柄衚瀺装眮の倉動停止時の図柄を決定するものであり、本実斜の圢態では、第図柄衚瀺装眮においお有効ラむンがラむンであり、特定図柄䞻図柄が通り蚭定されおいるこずから、個〜のカりンタ倀が甚意されおいる。すなわち、倧圓たり図柄カりンタは、〜の範囲内で順にず぀加算され、最倧倀぀たりに達した埌に戻る構成ずなっおいる。倧圓たり図柄カりンタは定期的に本実斜の圢態ではタむマ割蟌み毎に回曎新され、遊技球が䜜動口に入賞したタむミングでの保留球栌玍゚リアに栌玍される。   The jackpot symbol counter C2 determines the symbol at the time of fluctuation stop of the first symbol display device 41 in the case of a jackpot, and in the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 41 has five effective lines, Since ten specific symbols (main symbols) are set, 50 counter values (0 to 49) are prepared. That is, the jackpot symbol counter C2 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 49, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 49) and then returns to 0. The jackpot symbol counter C2 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in the present embodiment), and stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 at the timing when the game ball wins the operation port 33.

リヌチ乱数カりンタは、䟋えば〜の範囲内で順にず぀加算され、最倧倀぀たりに達した埌に戻る構成ずなっおいる。本実斜の圢態では、リヌチ乱数カりンタによっお、リヌチ発生した埌最終停止図柄がリヌチ図柄の前埌に぀だけずれお停止する「前埌倖れリヌチ」ず、同じくリヌチ発生した埌最終停止図柄がリヌチ図柄の前埌以倖で停止する「前埌倖れ以倖リヌチ」ず、リヌチ発生しない「完党倖れ」ずを抜遞するこずずしおおり、䟋えば、が前埌倖れリヌチに該圓し、〜が前埌倖れ以倖リヌチに該圓し、〜が完党倖れに該圓する。なお、リヌチの抜遞は、第図柄衚瀺装眮の抜遞確率の状態や倉動開始時の䜜動保留球数等に応じお各々個別に蚭定されるものであっおも良い。リヌチ乱数カりンタは定期的に本実斜の圢態ではタむマ割蟌み毎に回曎新され、遊技球が䜜動口に入賞したタむミングでの保留球栌玍゚リアに栌玍される。   For example, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 238) and then returns to 0. In the present embodiment, the reach random number counter C3 causes the last stop symbol to stop after the reach has occurred by shifting the last stop symbol by one before and after the reach symbol, and the last stop symbol after the reach has also occurred. “Reach other than front / rear out” and stop “completely out” where no reach occurs, for example, C3 = 0, 1 corresponds to front / rear reach, and C3 = 2-21 It corresponds to the reach other than the front and rear deviation, and C3 = 22 to 238 corresponds to the complete deviation. The reach lottery may be set individually according to the state of the lottery probability of the first symbol display device 41, the number of suspended balls at the start of change, and the like. The reach random number counter C3 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in this embodiment), and stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 at the timing when the game ball wins the operation port 33.

぀の倉動皮別カりンタのうち、䞀方の倉動皮別カりンタは、䟋えば〜の範囲内で順にず぀加算され、最倧倀぀たりに達した埌に戻る構成ずなっおおり、他方の倉動皮別カりンタは、䟋えば〜の範囲内で順にず぀加算され、最倧倀぀たりに達した埌に戻る構成ずなっおいる。以䞋の説明では、を「第倉動皮別カりンタ」、を「第倉動皮別カりンタ」ずもいう。第倉動皮別カりンタによっお、いわゆるノヌマルリヌチ、スヌパヌリヌチ、プレミアムリヌチ等、第図柄のリヌチ皮別やその他倧たかな図柄倉動態様が決定され、第倉動皮別カりンタによっお、リヌチ発生埌に最終停止図柄本実斜の圢態では䞭図柄が停止するたでの経過時間蚀い換えれば、倉動図柄数などより现かな図柄倉動態様が決定される。埓っお、これらの倉動皮別カりンタを組み合わせるこずで、倉動パタヌンの倚皮倚様化を容易に実珟できる。たた、第倉動皮別カりンタだけで図柄倉動態様を決定したり、第倉動皮別カりンタず停止図柄ずの組み合わせで同じく図柄倉動態様を決定したりするこずも可胜である。倉動皮別カりンタは、埌述する通垞凊理が回実行される毎に回曎新され、圓該通垞凊理内の残䜙時間内でも繰り返し曎新される。そしお、第図柄衚瀺装眮による第図柄の倉動開始時における倉動パタヌン決定に際しお倉動皮別カりンタのバッファ倀が取埗される。   Of the two variation type counters CS1 and CS2, one variation type counter CS1 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 198) and then returns to 0. On the other hand, the other variation type counter CS2 is, for example, incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 240, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 240). In the following description, CS1 is also referred to as “first variation type counter”, and CS2 is also referred to as “second variation type counter”. The first variation type counter CS1 determines the reach type of the first symbol such as so-called normal reach, super reach, premium reach, and other rough symbol variation modes, and the second variation type counter CS2 determines the final stop symbol ( In the present embodiment, a more detailed symbol variation mode such as an elapsed time (in other words, the number of variation symbols) until the middle symbol) stops is determined. Therefore, a variety of variation patterns can be easily realized by combining these variation type counters CS1 and CS2. It is also possible to determine the symbol variation mode only by the first variation type counter CS1, or to determine the symbol variation mode similarly by combining the first variation type counter CS1 and the stop symbol. The variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once every time a normal process to be described later is executed once, and are repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are acquired when the variation pattern is determined when the first symbol display device 41 starts the variation of the first symbol.

巊・䞭・右の各倖れ図柄カりンタは、倧圓たり抜遞が倖れずなった時に巊列第図柄、䞭列第図柄、右列第図柄の倖れ停止図柄を決定するためのものであり、各列では䞻図柄及び副図柄の合わせおの第図柄の䜕れかが衚瀺されるこずから、各々に個〜のカりンタ倀が甚意されおいる。倖れ図柄カりンタにより巊図柄列の䞊・䞭・䞋段の各図柄が決定され、倖れ図柄カりンタにより䞭図柄列の䞊・䞭・䞋段の各図柄が決定され、倖れ図柄カりンタにより右図柄列の䞊・䞭・䞋段の各図柄が決定される。   The left, middle and right off symbol counters CL, CM, and CR determine the stop symbol of the left row 1st symbol, the middle row 1st symbol, the right row 1st symbol when the big hit lottery is missed. In each column, any one of the 20 first symbols in total including the main symbol and the sub symbol is displayed, so 20 counter values (0 to 19) are prepared for each. The left, upper, middle, and lower symbols are determined by the out symbol counter CL, the upper, middle, and lower symbols are determined by the out symbol counter CM, and the right symbol column is determined by the out symbol counter CR. The top, middle and bottom symbols are determined.

本実斜の圢態では、に内蔵のレゞスタの数倀を甚いるこずにより各カりンタの倀をランダムに曎新する構成ずしおいる。すなわち、各倖れ図柄カりンタの曎新時には、前回倀にレゞスタの䞋䜍ビットの倀が加算され、その加算結果が最倧倀を超えた堎合に枛算されお今回倀が決定される。各倖れ図柄カりンタは曎新時期が重ならないようにしお通垞凊理内で曎新され、それら倖れ図柄カりンタの組み合わせが、の前埌倖れリヌチ図柄バッファ、前埌倖れ以倖リヌチ図柄バッファ及び完党倖れ図柄バッファの䜕れかに栌玍される。そしお、第図柄の倉動開始時における倉動パタヌン決定に際し、リヌチ乱数カりンタの倀に応じお前埌倖れリヌチ図柄バッファ、前埌倖れ以倖リヌチ図柄バッファ及び完党倖れ図柄バッファの䜕れかのバッファ倀が取埗される。   In the present embodiment, the values of the counters CL, CM, and CR are randomly updated by using the value of the R register built in the CPU 501. That is, when each outlier symbol counter CL, CM, CR is updated, the lower 3 bits of the R register are added to the previous value, and when the addition result exceeds the maximum value, 20 is subtracted to determine the current value. The Each outlier symbol counter CL, CM, CR is updated within the normal process so that the update times do not overlap, and the combination of these outlier symbol counters CL, CM, CR is the reach of the RAM 503 front / rear reach symbol buffer, reach other than front / rear out It is stored in either the symbol buffer or the completely off symbol buffer. Then, when determining the variation pattern at the time of starting the variation of the first symbol, the buffer value of any one of the front and rear outreach symbol buffer, the reach symbol buffer other than front and rear outlier, and the completely out symbol symbol buffer is acquired according to the value of the reach random number counter C3. The

なお、各カりンタの倧きさや範囲は䞀䟋にすぎず任意に倉曎できる。䜆し、䞍芏則性を重芖すれば、倧圓たり乱数カりンタ、リヌチ乱数カりンタ、倉動皮別カりンタの倧きさは䜕れも異なる玠数ずし、いかなる堎合にも同期しない数倀ずしおおくのが望たしい。たた、図瀺は省略するが、第図柄衚瀺装眮の抜遞には第図柄乱数カりンタが甚いられる。第図柄乱数カりンタは、䟋えば〜の範囲内で順にず぀加算され、最倧倀぀たりに達した埌に戻るルヌプカりンタずしお構成されおいる。第図柄乱数カりンタは定期的に本実斜の圢態ではタむマ割蟌み毎に回曎新され、遊技球が巊右䜕れかのスルヌゲヌトを通過したこずが怜知された時に取埗される。圓遞するこずずなる乱数の倀の数はあり、その範囲は「〜」である。   In addition, the magnitude | size and range of each counter are only examples, and can be changed arbitrarily. However, if importance is attached to irregularity, it is desirable that the jackpot random number counter C1, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are all different prime numbers and are not synchronized in any case. Although not shown, the second symbol random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 42. The second symbol random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 250, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). The second symbol random number counter C4 is periodically updated (once every timer interruption in the present embodiment), and is acquired when it is detected that the game ball has passed through either the left or right through gate 34. The number of random number values to be won is 149, and the range is “5 to 153”.

次いで、䞻制埡装眮内のにより実行される各制埡凊理を図〜図のフロヌチャヌトを参照しながら説明する。かかるの凊理ずしおは倧別しお、電源投入に䌎い起動されるメむン凊理ず、定期的に本実斜の圢態では呚期で起動されるタむマ割蟌み凊理ず、端子ノンマスカブル端子ぞの停電信号の入力により起動される割蟌み凊理ずがあり、説明の䟿宜䞊、はじめにタむマ割蟌み凊理ず割蟌み凊理ずを説明し、その埌メむン凊理を説明する。   Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main controller 271 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the CPU 501 is roughly divided into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 msec), and power failure to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). There is NMI interrupt processing activated by signal input. For convenience of explanation, first, timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be described, and then main processing will be described.

図は、タむマ割蟌み凊理を瀺すフロヌチャヌトであり、本凊理は䞻制埡装眮のにより䟋えば毎に実行される。   FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. This process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main controller 271 every 2 msec, for example.

図においお、ステップでは、各皮入賞スむッチの読み蟌み凊理を実行する。すなわち、䞻制埡装眮に接続されおいる各皮スむッチ䜆し、消去スむッチを陀くの状態を読み蟌むず共に、圓該スむッチの状態を刀定しお怜出情報入賞怜知情報を保存する。   In FIG. 36, in step S601, various winning switch reading processes are executed. That is, the state of various switches (except for the RAM erase switch 323) connected to the main controller 271 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

その埌、ステップでは、乱数初期倀カりンタの曎新を実行する。具䜓的には、乱数初期倀カりンタをむンクリメントするず共に、そのカりンタ倀が最倧倀本実斜の圢態ではに達した際にクリアする。そしお、乱数初期倀カりンタの曎新倀を、の該圓するバッファ領域に栌玍する。続くステップでは、倧圓たり乱数カりンタ、倧圓たり図柄カりンタ及びリヌチ乱数カりンタの曎新を実行する。具䜓的には、倧圓たり乱数カりンタ、倧圓たり図柄カりンタ及びリヌチ乱数カりンタをそれぞれむンクリメントするず共に、それらのカりンタ倀が最倧倀本実斜の圢態ではそれぞれ、に達した際それぞれにクリアする。そしお、各カりンタ〜の曎新倀を、の該圓するバッファ領域に栌玍する。   Thereafter, in step S602, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (676 in the present embodiment). Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503. In the subsequent step S603, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit symbol counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot symbol counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values reach the maximum values (in this embodiment, 676, 49, and 238, respectively). Each time it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C3 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

その埌、ステップでは、䜜動口ぞの入賞に䌎う始動入賞凊理を実行する。この始動入賞凊理を図のフロヌチャヌトにより説明するず、ステップでは、遊技球が䜜動口に入賞始動入賞したか吊かを䜜動口スむッチの怜出情報により刀別する。遊技球が䜜動口に入賞したず刀別されるず、続くステップでは、第図柄衚瀺装眮の䜜動保留球数が䞊限倀本実斜の圢態では未満であるか吊かを刀別する。䜜動口ぞの入賞があり、䞔぀䜜動保留球数であるこずを条件にステップに進み、䜜動保留球数をむンクリメントする。続くステップでは、前蚘ステップで曎新した倧圓たり乱数カりンタ、倧圓たり図柄カりンタ及びリヌチ乱数カりンタの各倀を、の保留球栌玍゚リアの空き蚘憶゚リアのうち最初の゚リアに栌玍する。そしお、始動入賞凊理の埌、は本タむマ割蟌み凊理を䞀旊終了する。   Thereafter, in step S604, a start winning process associated with winning in the operating port 33 is executed. The start winning process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 37. In step S701, whether or not the game ball has won the start opening 33 (start winning) is determined based on the detection information of the operation opening switch 224. When it is determined that the game ball has won the operating port 33, in the subsequent step S702, it is determined whether or not the number N of active reserved balls of the first symbol display device 41 is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). Determine. The process proceeds to step S703 on the condition that there is a winning at the operation port 33 and the number N of activated balls is <4, and the number N of activated balls is incremented by one. In the subsequent step S704, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot symbol counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in the step S603 are stored in the first area in the free storage area of the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503. Then, after the start winning process, the CPU 501 once ends the timer interrupt process.

なお、遊技球が䜜動口に入賞始動入賞した堎合、それに䌎い第図柄衚瀺装眮による第図柄の倉動衚瀺が開始されるこずずなるが、始動入賞埌、第図柄が倉動し図柄停止に至るたでには所定時間䟋えば秒が経過しおいなければならないずいう制玄がある。そこで、䞊蚘始動入賞凊理では、始動入賞が確認された堎合、各カりンタ倀の栌玍凊理ステップの埌に、始動入賞埌の経過時間を蚈るためのタむマをセットするこずずしおいる。具䜓的には、䞊蚘始動入賞凊理は呚期で実行されるため、䟋えば秒の経過時間を蚈枬するにはタむマに数倀「」をセットし、始動入賞凊理の郜床、タむマ倀をず぀枛算する。このタむマ倀は、その時々の各カりンタ〜の倀ず共に、の保留球栌玍゚リアに栌玍され管理される。そしお、埌述する第図柄の倉動パタヌン蚭定に際しおは、䞊蚘タむマ倀が参照され、残り時間に応じお所定時間経過埌に図柄倉動が停止されるよう倉動パタヌンが蚭定されるようになっおいる。   In addition, when the game ball wins the operating port 33 (start winning prize), the first symbol display display on the first symbol display device 41 is started accordingly, but after the start winning, the first symbol changes. However, there is a restriction that a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) must elapse before the symbol is stopped. Therefore, in the start winning process, when the start winning is confirmed, a timer for measuring the elapsed time after the start winning is set after each counter value storing process (step S704). Specifically, since the start winning process is executed at a cycle of 2 msec, for example, in order to measure an elapsed time of 5 seconds, a numerical value “2500” is set in the timer, and the timer value is incremented by 1 for each start winning process. Subtract. This timer value is stored and managed in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 together with the values of the respective counters C1 to C3. Then, when setting the variation pattern of the first symbol, which will be described later, the timer value is referred to, and a variation pattern is set according to the remaining time (so that the symbol variation is stopped after a predetermined time elapses). .

図は、割蟌み凊理を瀺すフロヌチャヌトであり、本凊理は、䞻制埡装眮のにより停電の発生等によるパチンコ機の電源遮断時に実行される。この割蟌みにより、電源遮断時の䞻制埡装眮の状態がのバックアップ゚リアに蚘憶される。すなわち、停電の発生等によりパチンコ機の電源が遮断されるず、停電信号が停電監芖回路から䞻制埡装眮内のの端子に出力され、は実行䞭の制埡を䞭断しお割蟌み凊理を開始する。図の割蟌み凊理プログラムは、䞻制埡装眮のに蚘憶されおいる。停電信号が出力された埌所定時間は、䞻制埡装眮の凊理が実行可胜ずなるように電源郚から電源䟛絊がなされおおり、この所定時間内に割蟌み凊理が実行される。   FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process. This process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main controller 271 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interruption, the state of the main controller 271 at the time of power-off is stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main controller 271 and the CPU 501 interrupts the control being executed. To start NMI interrupt processing. The NMI interrupt processing program in FIG. 38 is stored in the ROM 502 of the main controller 271. For a predetermined time after the power failure signal SG1 is output, power is supplied from the power supply unit 541 so that the processing of the main controller 271 can be executed, and the NMI interrupt processing is executed within this predetermined time.

割蟌み凊理においお、ステップでは䜿甚レゞスタをのバックアップ゚リアに退避し、続くステップではスタックポむンタの倀を同バックアップ゚リアに蚘憶する。さらに、ステップでは電源遮断の発生情報をバックアップ゚リアに蚭定し、ステップでは電源が遮断されたこずを瀺す電源遮断通知コマンドを他の制埡装眮に察しお送信する。ステップでは刀定倀を算出し、バックアップ゚リアに保存する。刀定倀は、䟋えば、の䜜業領域アドレスにおけるチェックサム倀である。ステップでは、アクセスを犁止する。その埌は、電源が完党に遮断しお凊理が実行できなくなるのに備え、無限ルヌプに入る。   In the NMI interrupt processing, in step S801, the used register is saved in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503, and in the subsequent step S802, the value of the stack pointer is stored in the backup area 503a. Further, in step S803, the information on occurrence of power interruption is set in the backup area 503a, and in step S804, a power interruption notification command indicating that the power has been interrupted is transmitted to another control device. In step S805, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the backup area 503a. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. In step S806, RAM access is prohibited. Thereafter, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the power supply being completely shut down and the processing being impossible.

なお、䞊蚘の割蟌み凊理は払出制埡装眮でも同様に実行され、かかる割蟌みにより、停電の発生等による電源遮断時の払出制埡装眮の状態がのバックアップ゚リアに蚘憶される。停電信号が出力された埌所定時間は、払出制埡装眮の凊理が実行可胜ずなるように電源郚から電源䟛絊がなされるのも同様である。すなわち、停電の発生等によりパチンコ機の電源が遮断されるず、停電信号が停電監芖回路から払出制埡装眮内のの端子に出力され、は実行䞭の制埡を䞭断しお図の割蟌み凊理を開始する。その内容はステップの電源遮断通知コマンドの送信を行わない点を陀き䞊蚘説明ず同様である。   The above NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner in the payout control device 311, and the state of the payout control device 311 when the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like is stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 by the NMI interrupt. Similarly, power is supplied from the power supply unit 541 so that the processing of the payout control device 311 can be executed for a predetermined time after the power failure signal SG1 is output. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout controller 311 and the CPU 511 interrupts the control being executed. The NMI interrupt process of FIG. 38 is started. The contents are the same as described above, except that the power-off notification command is not transmitted in step S804.

図は、䞻制埡装眮内のにより実行されるメむン凊理の䞀䟋を瀺すフロヌチャヌトであり、このメむン凊理は電源投入時のリセットに䌎い起動される。   FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of a main process executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 271, and this main process is started upon a reset at power-on.

メむン凊理においお、ステップでは、電源投入に䌎う初期蚭定凊理を実行する。具䜓的には、スタックポむンタに予め決められた所定倀を蚭定するず共に、サブ偎の制埡装眮音声ランプ制埡装眮、払出制埡装眮等が動䜜可胜な状態になるのを埅぀ために䟋えば秒皋床、りェむト凊理を実行する。ステップでは、払出制埡装眮に察しお払出蚱可コマンドを送信し、続くステップでは、アクセスを蚱可する。   In the main process, in step S101, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, in order to set a predetermined value in the stack pointer and wait for the sub-side control devices (audio lamp control device 272, payout control device 311, etc.) to become operable, for example, Wait processing is performed for about 1 second. In step S102, a payout permission command is transmitted to the payout control device 311. In subsequent step S103, RAM access is permitted.

その埌、内のに関しおデヌタバックアップの凊理を実行する。぀たり、ステップでは電源装眮に蚭けた消去スむッチが抌されおいるか吊かを刀別し、続くステップではのバックアップ゚リアに電源遮断の発生情報が蚭定されおいるか吊かを刀別する。たた、ステップでは刀定倀を算出し、続くステップでは、その刀定倀が電源遮断時に保存した刀定倀ず䞀臎するか吊か、すなわちバックアップの有効性を刀別する。刀定倀は、䟋えばの䜜業領域アドレスにおけるチェックサム倀である。なお、の所定の゚リアに曞き蟌たれたキヌワヌドが正しく保存されおいるか吊かによりバックアップの有効性を刀断するこずも可胜である。   Thereafter, data backup processing is executed for the RAM 503 in the CPU 501. That is, in step S104, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided in the power supply device 313 is pressed, and in subsequent step S105, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power shutdown is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. To do. In step S106, a RAM determination value is calculated. In subsequent step S107, it is determined whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, that is, the validity of the backup. The RAM determination value is a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 503, for example. Note that it is possible to determine the effectiveness of backup based on whether or not the keywords written in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 are correctly stored.

䞊述したように、本パチンコ機では、䟋えばホヌルの営業開始時など、電源投入時にデヌタを初期化する堎合には消去スむッチを抌しながら電源が投入される。埓っお、消去スむッチが抌されおいれば、の初期化凊理ステップ〜に移行する。たた、電源遮断の発生情報が蚭定されおいない堎合や、刀定倀チェックサム倀等によりバックアップの異垞が確認された堎合も同様にの初期化凊理ステップ〜に移行する。぀たり、ステップではの䜿甚領域をにクリアし、続くステップではの初期化凊理を実行する。たた、ステップでは割蟌み蚱可を蚭定し、埌述する通垞凊理に移行する。   As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, at the start of business in the hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the process proceeds to a RAM initialization process (steps S114 to S116). Similarly, when the information on occurrence of power shutdown is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like), the process proceeds to initialization processing (steps S114 to S116) of the RAM 503 in the same manner. . That is, in step S114, the use area of the RAM 503 is cleared to 0, and in the subsequent step S115, initialization processing of the RAM 503 is executed. In step S116, interrupt permission is set, and the process proceeds to normal processing described later.

䞀方、消去スむッチが抌されおいない堎合には、電源遮断の発生情報が蚭定されおいるこず、及び刀定倀チェックサム倀等が正垞であるこずを条件に、埩電時の凊理電源遮断埩旧時の凊理を実行する。぀たり、ステップでは電源遮断前のスタックポむンタを埩垰させ、ステップでは電源遮断の発生情報をクリアする。ステップではサブ偎の制埡装眮を電源遮断時の遊技状態に埩垰させるためのコマンドを送信し、ステップでは䜿甚レゞスタをのバックアップ゚リアから埩垰させる。たた、ステップでは、割蟌み蚱可䞍蚱可を電源遮断前の状態に埩垰させた埌、電源遮断前の番地ぞ戻る。   On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 has not been pressed, the power-off occurrence information is set, and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal, the condition at the time of power recovery Execute the process (process when power is restored). That is, in step S108, the stack pointer before power-off is restored, and in step S109, information on occurrence of power-off is cleared. In step S110, a command for returning the sub-side control device to the gaming state at the time of power-off is transmitted, and in step S111, the used register is returned from the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. In steps S112 and S113, the interrupt permission / non-permission is returned to the state before the power shutdown, and then the address before the power shutdown is returned.

次に、通垞凊理の流れを図のフロヌチャヌトを参照しながら説明する。この通垞凊理では遊技の䞻芁な凊理が実行される。その抂芁ずしお、ステップ〜の凊理が呚期の定期凊理ずしお実行され、その残䜙時間でステップのカりンタ曎新凊理が実行される構成ずなっおいる。   Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, the processing of steps S201 to S207 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S209 and S210 is executed with the remaining time.

通垞凊理においお、ステップでは、前回の凊理で曎新されたコマンド等の出力デヌタをサブ偎の各制埡装眮に送信する。具䜓的には、入賞怜知情報の有無を刀別し、入賞怜知情報があれば払出制埡装眮に察しお獲埗遊技球数に察応する賞球払出コマンドを送信する。たた、第図柄衚瀺装眮による第図柄の倉動衚瀺に際しお停止図柄コマンド、倉動パタヌンコマンド、確定コマンド等の衚瀺コマンドを衚瀺制埡装眮に送信する。なお、第図柄の倉動開始埌においお、倉動パタヌンコマンド→巊図柄列の停止図柄コマンド→䞭図柄列の停止図柄コマンド→右図柄列の停止図柄コマンドの順で通垞凊理の郜床぀ず぀すなわち、毎に぀ず぀コマンドが送信され、倉動時間経過のタむミングで確定コマンドが送信されるようになっおいる。   In the normal process, in step S201, output data such as a command updated in the previous process is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information is determined, and if there is winning detection information, a winning ball payout command corresponding to the number of acquired game balls is transmitted to the payout control device 311. In addition, when the first symbol display device 41 displays the variation of the first symbol, a display command such as a stop symbol command, a variation pattern command, and a confirmation command is transmitted to the display control device 214. In addition, after the start of the fluctuation of the first symbol, one each time in the normal process in order of the fluctuation pattern command → the left symbol row stop symbol command → the middle symbol row stop symbol command → the right symbol row stop symbol command The command is transmitted once every 4 msec), and the confirmation command is transmitted at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses.

次に、ステップでは、倉動皮別カりンタの曎新を実行する。具䜓的には、倉動皮別カりンタをむンクリメントするず共に、それらのカりンタ倀が最倧倀本実斜の圢態ではに達した際それぞれにクリアする。そしお、倉動皮別カりンタの曎新倀を、の該圓するバッファ領域に栌玍する。続くステップでは、巊図柄列、䞭図柄列及び右図柄列の各倖れ図柄カりンタの曎新を実行する。   Next, in step S202, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated. Specifically, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and are cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum values (198 and 240 in this embodiment). Then, the update values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503. In subsequent step S203, updating of each outlier symbol counter CL, CM, CR of the left symbol row, the middle symbol row, and the right symbol row is executed.

各倖れ図柄カりンタの曎新凊理を説明するず、図に瀺すように、ステップでは、巊図柄列の倖れ図柄カりンタの曎新時期か吊かを刀別し、ステップでは、䞭図柄列の倖れ図柄カりンタの曎新時期か吊かを刀別する。そしお、巊図柄列の曎新時期ステップがであればステップに進み、巊図柄列の倖れ図柄カりンタを曎新する。たた、䞭図柄列の曎新時期ステップがであればステップに進み、䞭図柄列の倖れ図柄カりンタを曎新する。さらに、右図柄列の曎新時期ステップが共にであればステップに進み、右図柄列の倖れ図柄カりンタを曎新する。ステップ〜の倖れ図柄カりンタの曎新では、前回のカりンタ倀にレゞスタの䞋䜍ビットの倀を加算するず共にその加算結果が最倧倀を超えた堎合にを枛算し、その挔算結果を倖れ図柄カりンタの今回倀ずする。䞊蚘の曎新凊理によれば、巊図柄列、䞭図柄列及び右図柄列の各倖れ図柄カりンタが回の通垞凊理で぀ず぀順に曎新され、各カりンタ倀の曎新時期が重なるこずはない。これにより、通垞凊理を回実行する毎に倖れ図柄カりンタのセット分が曎新されるようになっおいる。   The update process of each outlier symbol counter CL, CM, CR will be described. As shown in FIG. 33, in step S301, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the outlier symbol counter CL in the left symbol row. It is determined whether or not it is time to update the symbol counter CM symbol symbol CM. If the update timing of the left symbol row (YES in step S301), the process proceeds to step S303, and the outlier symbol counter CL of the left symbol row is updated. On the other hand, if it is time to update the middle symbol sequence (YES in step S302), the process proceeds to step S304 to update the out-of-middle symbol counter CM. Further, if the update timing of the right symbol sequence (both NO in steps S301 and S302), the process proceeds to step S305, and the outlier symbol counter CR of the right symbol sequence is updated. In updating the outlier symbol counters CL, CM, CR in steps S303 to S305, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous counter value, and 20 is subtracted when the addition result exceeds the maximum value, The result of the calculation is out of sync and is used as the current value of the symbol counters CL, CM, CR. According to the CL, CM, and CR update processing, the left symbol row, middle symbol row, and right symbol row outlier symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are sequentially updated one by one in one normal process. The update times of the values do not overlap. As a result, every time the normal process is executed three times, one set of the off symbol counters CL, CM, CR is updated.

その埌、ステップでは、䞊蚘曎新した倖れ図柄カりンタの組み合わせが倧圓たり図柄の組み合わせになっおいるか吊かを刀別し、倧圓たり図柄の組み合わせである堎合、そのたた本凊理を終了する。倧圓たり図柄の組み合わせでない堎合、ステップでは、リヌチ図柄の組み合わせになっおいるか吊かを刀別し、リヌチ図柄の組み合わせである堎合、さらにステップでは、それが前埌倖れリヌチであるか吊かを刀別する。倖れ図柄カりンタが前埌倖れリヌチの組み合わせである堎合、ステップに進み、その時の倖れ図柄カりンタの組み合わせをの前埌倖れリヌチ図柄バッファに栌玍する。倖れ図柄カりンタが前埌倖れ以倖リヌチの組み合わせである堎合には、ステップに進み、その時の倖れ図柄カりンタの組み合わせをの前埌倖れ以倖リヌチ図柄バッファに栌玍する。倖れ図柄カりンタの組み合わせが倧圓たり図柄の組み合わせでなく、䞔぀リヌチ図柄の組み合わせでもない堎合ステップが共にの堎合、これは倖れ図柄カりンタの組み合わせが倖れ図柄の組み合わせになっおいるこずに盞圓し、かかる堎合には、ステップに進み、その時の倖れ図柄カりンタの組み合わせをの完党倖れ図柄バッファに栌玍する。   Thereafter, in step S306, it is determined whether or not the combination of the updated off symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a jackpot symbol combination. If the symbol combination is a jackpot symbol combination, the process is terminated. If it is not a jackpot symbol combination, it is determined in step S307 whether or not it is a reach symbol combination, and if it is a reach symbol combination, in step S308 it is further determined whether or not it is a front-rear reach. To do. If the off symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are combinations of front and rear outreach, the process proceeds to step S309, and the combination of out symbol symbols CL, CM, and CR at that time is stored in the front and rear outreach symbol buffer of the RAM 503. If the out symbol counters CL, CM, CR are a combination of reach other than front / back off, the process proceeds to step S310, and the combination of the out symbol counters CL, CM, CR at that time is stored in the reach symbol buffer other than front / back out of RAM 503. . If the combination of outlier symbol counters CL, CM, CR is not a jackpot symbol combination and not a reach symbol combination (when both S306 and S307 are NO), this is a combination of outlier symbol counters CL, CM, CR In this case, the process proceeds to step S 311, and the combination of the off symbol counters CL, CM, CR at that time is stored in the complete off symbol buffer of the RAM 503.

倖れ図柄カりンタの曎新凊理の埌、図のステップでは、払出制埡装眮より受信した賞球蚈数信号や払出異垞信号を読み蟌む。その埌、ステップでは、第図柄衚瀺装眮による第図柄の倉動衚瀺を行うための第図柄倉動凊理を実行する。この第図柄倉動凊理により、倧圓たり刀定や第図柄の倉動パタヌンの蚭定などが行われる。䜆し、第図柄倉動凊理の詳现は埌述する。   After update processing of the off symbol counters CL, CM, and CR, in step S204 in FIG. 32, a prize ball count signal and a payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 311 are read. Thereafter, in step S205, a first symbol variation process for performing variation display of the first symbol by the first symbol display device 41 is executed. By this first symbol variation process, jackpot determination, setting of a variation pattern of the first symbol, and the like are performed. The details of the first symbol variation process will be described later.

その埌、ステップでは、倧圓たり状態である堎合においお可倉入賞装眮の倧入賞口を開攟又は閉鎖するための倧入賞口開閉凊理を実行する。すなわち、倧圓たり状態のラりンド毎に倧入賞口を開攟し、倧入賞口の最倧開攟時間が経過したか、又は倧入賞口に遊技球が芏定数だけ入賞したかを刀定する。そしお、これら䜕れかの条件が成立するず倧入賞口を閉鎖する。このずき、遊技球が特定領域を通過したこずを条件に倧入賞口の連続開攟を蚱容し、これを所定ラりンド数繰り返し実行する。   Thereafter, in step S206, a big prize opening / closing process for opening or closing the big prize opening of the variable prize winning device 35 in the case of the big win state is executed. That is, it is determined whether the big winning opening is opened for each round in the big win state, and whether the maximum opening time of the big winning opening has passed or whether a predetermined number of game balls have been won in the big winning opening. When either of these conditions is satisfied, the special winning opening is closed. At this time, the continuous winning opening is allowed on condition that the game ball has passed the specific area, and this is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds.

ステップでは、第図柄衚瀺装眮による第図柄䟋えば「○」又は「×」の普通図柄の衚瀺制埡を実行する。簡単に説明するず、遊技球がスルヌゲヌトを通過したこずを条件に、その郜床の第図柄乱数カりンタの倀が取埗されるず共に第図柄衚瀺装眮の衚瀺郚にお第図柄の倉動衚瀺が実斜される。そしお、第図柄乱数カりンタの倀により第図柄の抜遞が実斜され、第図柄の圓たり状態になるず、䜜動口に付随する電動圹物が所定時間開攟される。なお説明は省略したが、第図柄乱数カりンタも、倧圓たり乱数カりンタ、倧圓たり図柄カりンタ及びリヌチ乱数カりンタず同様に、図に瀺すタむマ割蟌み凊理により曎新されるようになっおいる。   In step S207, display control of the second symbol (for example, a normal symbol of “◯” or “x”) by the second symbol display device 42 is executed. Briefly, on the condition that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, the value of the second symbol random number counter C4 is acquired each time and the second symbol is displayed on the display unit 45 of the second symbol display device 42. Is displayed. Then, the lottery of the second symbol is carried out based on the value of the second symbol random number counter C4, and when the winning state of the second symbol is reached, the electric accessory attached to the operating port 33 is released for a predetermined time. Although the description is omitted, the second symbol random number counter C4 is also updated by the timer interruption process shown in FIG. 36, like the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot symbol counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3.

その埌、ステップでは、次の通垞凊理の実行タむミングに至ったか吊か、すなわち前回の通垞凊理の開始から所定時間本実斜の圢態ではが経過したか吊かを刀別する。そしお、次の通垞凊理の実行タむミングに至るたでの残䜙時間内においお、乱数初期倀カりンタ及び倉動皮別カりンタの曎新を繰り返し実行するステップ。぀たり、ステップでは、乱数初期倀カりンタの曎新を実行する。具䜓的には、乱数初期倀カりンタをむンクリメントするず共に、そのカりンタ倀が最倧倀本実斜の圢態ではに達した際にクリアする。そしお、乱数初期倀カりンタの曎新倀を、の該圓するバッファ領域に栌玍する。たた、ステップでは、倉動皮別カりンタの曎新を実行する。具䜓的には、倉動皮別カりンタをむンクリメントするず共に、それらのカりンタ倀が最倧倀本実斜の圢態ではに達した際それぞれにクリアする。そしお、倉動皮別カりンタの曎新倀を、の該圓するバッファ領域に栌玍する。   Thereafter, in step S208, it is determined whether or not the next normal process execution timing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal process. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the next normal processing execution timing (steps S209 and S210). That is, in step S209, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (676 in the present embodiment). Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503. In step S210, update of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 is executed. Specifically, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and are cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum values (198 and 240 in this embodiment). Then, the update values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

ここで、ステップ〜の各凊理の実行時間は遊技の状態に応じお倉化するため、次の通垞凊理の実行タむミングに至るたでの残䜙時間は䞀定でなく倉動する。故に、かかる残䜙時間を䜿甚しお乱数初期倀カりンタの曎新を繰り返し実行するこずにより、乱数初期倀カりンタすなわち、倧圓たり乱数カりンタの初期倀をランダムに曎新するこずができ、同様に倉動皮別カりンタに぀いおもランダムに曎新するこずができる。   Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S207 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and varies. Therefore, it is possible to update the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) at random by repeatedly executing the update of the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time. The variation type counters CS1 and CS2 can also be updated at random.

次に、前蚘ステップの第図柄倉動凊理を図及び図のフロヌチャヌトを参照しお説明する。   Next, the first symbol variation process of step S205 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

第図柄倉動凊理においお、ステップでは、今珟圚倧圓たり䞭であるか吊かを刀別する。なお、倧圓たり䞭には、倧圓たりの際に第図柄衚瀺装眮で衚瀺される倧圓たり遊技の最䞭ず倧圓たり遊技終了埌の所定時間の最䞭ずが含たれる。続くステップでは、第図柄衚瀺装眮による第図柄の倉動衚瀺䞭であるか吊かを刀別する。そしお、倧圓たり䞭でなくさらに第図柄の倉動衚瀺䞭でもない堎合、ステップに進み、第図柄衚瀺装眮の䜜動保留球数がよりも倧きいか吊かを刀別する。そしお、倧圓たり䞭であるか、又は䜜動保留球数がである堎合、そのたた本凊理を終了する。   In the first symbol variation process, in step S401, it is determined whether or not a big hit is currently being made. Note that the jackpot includes the jackpot game displayed on the first symbol display device 41 in the jackpot and the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game ends. In a succeeding step S402, it is determined whether or not the first symbol display device 41 is displaying the variation of the first symbol. Then, when it is not a big hit and is not displaying the variation of the first symbol, the process proceeds to step S403, and it is determined whether or not the number N of active suspension balls of the first symbol display device 41 is larger than zero. Then, when the jackpot is being hit or the number N of operation-reserved balls is 0, this processing is terminated as it is.

倧圓たり䞭又は第図柄の倉動衚瀺䞭の䜕れでもなく䞔぀䜜動保留球数であれば、ステップに進む。ステップでは、䜜動保留球数を枛算する。ステップでは、保留球栌玍゚リアに栌玍されたデヌタをシフトさせる凊理を実行する。このデヌタシフト凊理は、保留球栌玍゚リアの保留第〜第゚リアに栌玍されおいるデヌタを実行゚リア偎に順にシフトさせる凊理であっお、保留第゚リア→実行゚リア、保留第゚リア→保留第゚リア、保留第゚リア→保留第゚リア、保留第゚リア→保留第゚リアずいった具合に各゚リア内のデヌタがシフトされる。   If neither the big hit or the change in the first symbol is being displayed and if the number N of activated balls is> 0, the process proceeds to step S404. In step S404, 1 is subtracted from the number N of active suspension balls. In step S405, a process for shifting the data stored in the reserved ball storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first to fourth areas of the reserved ball storage area to the execution area side. The reserved first area → the execution area, the reserved second area → The data in each area is shifted such as the first hold area, the third hold area → the second hold area, the fourth hold area → the third hold area.

その埌、ステップでは、第図柄の倉動開始凊理を実行する。ここで、図のフロヌチャヌトを甚いお倉動開始凊理の詳现を説明するず、ステップでは、保留球栌玍゚リアの実行゚リアに栌玍されおいる倧圓たり乱数カりンタの倀に基づいお倧圓たりか吊かを刀別する。倧圓たりか吊かは倧圓たり乱数カりンタ倀ずその時々のモヌドずの関係に基づいお刀別される。前述した通り通垞の䜎確率時には倧圓たり乱数カりンタの数倀〜のうち「」が圓たり倀であり、高確率時には「」が圓たり倀である。   Thereafter, in step S406, the first symbol variation start process is executed. Here, the details of the variation start process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 35. In step S501, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit based on the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area. To do. Whether or not the jackpot is determined is based on the relationship between the jackpot random number counter value and the mode at that time. As described above, “337,673” is a winning value among the numerical values 0 to 676 of the jackpot random number counter C1 at the normal low probability, and “67, 131, 199, 269, 337, 401, 463, 523” at the high probability. "601, 661" is the winning value.

倧圓たりであるず刀別された堎合、ステップでは、保留球栌玍゚リアの実行゚リアに栌玍されおいる倧圓たり図柄カりンタの倀に察応する図柄、すなわち倧圓たり図柄を図瀺しないテヌブル倧圓たり図柄カりンタの倀ず図柄ずの察応関係を衚すテヌブルに基づいお求め、その図柄を停止図柄コマンドに蚭定する。このずき、倧圓たり図柄カりンタの数倀〜は、党぀の有効ラむン䞊における通りの倧圓たり図柄の䜕れかに察応しおおり、停止図柄コマンドには通りの倧圓たり図柄の䜕れかが蚭定される。これらの倧圓たり図柄のうち予め定められた特定図柄で揃った堎合には以埌確倉状態に移行するが、特定図柄でない図柄非特定図柄で揃った堎合には確倉状態に移行しない。   If it is determined that the game is a jackpot, in step S502, a table corresponding to the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area, that is, a table not showing the jackpot symbol (value of the jackpot symbol counter C2). And a symbol representing the corresponding relationship between the symbol and the symbol, and the symbol is set as a stop symbol command. At this time, the numbers 0 to 49 of the jackpot symbol counter C2 correspond to any of the 50 jackpot symbols on all five active lines, and any one of the 50 jackpot symbols is set in the stop symbol command. Is done. When these jackpot symbols are gathered with a predetermined specific symbol, the state changes to a probability variation state. However, when the symbols are not specific symbols (non-specific symbols), the probability variation state is not entered.

次に、ステップでは、倧圓たり図柄で停止するたでの第図柄の倉動パタヌンを決定し、圓該倉動パタヌンを倉動パタヌンコマンドに蚭定する。このずき、のカりンタ甚バッファに栌玍されおいる倉動皮別カりンタの倀を確認し、第倉動皮別カりンタの倀に基づいおノヌマルリヌチ、スヌパヌリヌチ、プレミアムリヌチ等のリヌチ皮別やその他倧たかな図柄倉動態様を決定するず共に、第倉動皮別カりンタの倀に基づいおリヌチ発生埌に最終停止図柄本実斜の圢態では䞭図柄が停止するたでの経過時間蚀い換えれば、倉動図柄数などより现かな図柄倉動態様を決定する。なお、第倉動皮別カりンタの数倀ずリヌチパタヌンずの関係、第倉動皮別カりンタの数倀ず停止図柄時間ずの関係は、それぞれにテヌブル等により予め芏定されおいる。䜆し、䞊蚘倉動パタヌンは、第倉動皮別カりンタの倀を䜿わずに第倉動皮別カりンタの倀だけを甚いお蚭定するこずも可胜であり、第倉動皮別カりンタの倀だけでパタヌン蚭定するか又は䞡倉動皮別カりンタの䞡倀でパタヌン蚭定するかは、その郜床の第倉動皮別カりンタの倀や遊技条件などに応じお適宜決められるようになっおいる。これは、埌述する前埌倖れリヌチ衚瀺、前埌倖れ以倖リヌチ衚瀺、完党倖れ衚瀺を行う堎合における倉動パタヌンの蚭定でも同様である。   Next, in step S503, the variation pattern of the first symbol until it stops at the jackpot symbol is determined, and the variation pattern is set in the variation pattern command. At this time, the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503 are confirmed, and the reach type such as normal reach, super reach, premium reach, and other rough types are determined based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1. And the elapsed time until the final stop symbol (in this embodiment, the middle symbol) stops after the occurrence of reach based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2 (in other words, the number of variable symbols) More detailed pattern variation modes are determined. The relationship between the numerical value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the reach pattern and the relationship between the numerical value of the second variation type counter CS2 and the stop symbol time are respectively defined in advance by a table or the like. However, the variation pattern can be set using only the value of the first variation type counter CS1 without using the value of the second variation type counter CS2. Whether to set or to set a pattern with both values of both variation type counters CS1 and CS2 is appropriately determined according to the value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the game conditions each time. The same applies to the setting of the fluctuation pattern in the case of performing front / rear out of reach display, reach display other than front / rear out, and complete out of display described later.

ステップで倧圓たりではないず刀別された堎合には、ステップで、保留球栌玍゚リアの実行゚リアに栌玍されおいるリヌチ乱数カりンタの倀に基づいおリヌチ発生か吊かを刀別し、リヌチ発生の堎合、さらにステップで、同じくリヌチ乱数カりンタの倀に基づいお前埌倖れリヌチであるか吊かを刀別する。本実斜の圢態では、リヌチ乱数カりンタの倀は〜の䜕れかであり、そのうち「」が前埌倖れリヌチに該圓し、「〜」が前埌倖れ以倖リヌチに該圓し、「〜」がリヌチなし完党倖れに該圓する。   If it is determined in step S501 that the game is not a big hit, it is determined in step S504 whether or not reach has occurred based on the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area. In this case, in step S505, it is determined whether the reach is out of front or back based on the value of the reach random number counter C3. In the present embodiment, the value of the reach random number counter C3 is any one of 0 to 238, of which “0, 1” corresponds to the out-of-front reach and “2-21” corresponds to the reach other than the back-and-forth out- “22 to 238” corresponds to no reach (complete detachment).

前埌倖れリヌチ発生の堎合、ステップに進み、の前埌倖れリヌチ図柄バッファに栌玍されおいる巊・䞭・右の各倖れ図柄カりンタの各倀を停止図柄コマンドに蚭定する。たた、ステップでは、前埌倖れリヌチ衚瀺のための倉動パタヌンを決定し、圓該倉動パタヌンを倉動パタヌンコマンドに蚭定する。このずき、前蚘ステップず同様に、のカりンタ甚バッファに栌玍されおいる倉動皮別カりンタの倀を確認し、第倉動皮別カりンタの倀に基づいおノヌマルリヌチ、スヌパヌリヌチ、プレミアムリヌチ等のリヌチ皮別やその他倧たかな図柄倉動態様を決定するず共に、第倉動皮別カりンタの倀に基づいおリヌチ発生埌に最終停止図柄本実斜の圢態では䞭図柄が停止するたでの経過時間蚀い換えれば、倉動図柄数などより现かな図柄倉動態様を決定する。   If front / rear out of reach has occurred, the process proceeds to step S506, and the left, middle, and right out of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR stored in the front / rear out of reach design buffer of the RAM 503 are set as stop symbol commands. Also, in step S507, a variation pattern for front / rear out of reach display is determined, and the variation pattern is set as a variation pattern command. At this time, as in step S503, the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503 are checked, and the normal reach, super reach, and premium reach are determined based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1. The reach type (such as the middle symbol in the present embodiment) is stopped after the occurrence of the reach based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2 In other words, a more detailed symbol variation mode such as the number of variation symbols) is determined.

前埌倖れ以倖リヌチ発生の堎合、ステップに進み、の前埌倖れ以倖リヌチ図柄バッファに栌玍されおいる巊・䞭・右の各倖れ図柄カりンタの各倀を停止図柄コマンドに蚭定する。たた、ステップでは、前埌倖れ以倖リヌチ衚瀺のための倉動パタヌンを決定し、圓該倉動パタヌンを倉動パタヌンコマンドに蚭定する。このずき、のカりンタ甚バッファに栌玍されおいる倉動皮別カりンタの倀に基づいお倉動パタヌンが決定されるのは前蚘ステップ等ず同様である。   If a reach other than front / rear out occurs, the process proceeds to step S508, and the left, middle, and right outreach counters CL, CM, and CR stored in the reach symbol buffer other than front / rear out of RAM 503 are set as stop symbol commands. To do. In step S509, a variation pattern for reach display other than front / rear deviation is determined, and the variation pattern is set as a variation pattern command. At this time, the variation pattern is determined based on the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503, as in step S503 and the like.

倧圓たりでなくリヌチでもない堎合、ステップに進み、の完党倖れ図柄バッファに栌玍されおいる巊・䞭・右の各倖れ図柄カりンタの各倀を停止図柄コマンドに蚭定する。たた、ステップでは、完党倖れ衚瀺のための倉動パタヌンを決定し、圓該倉動パタヌンを倉動パタヌンコマンドに蚭定する。このずき、のカりンタ甚バッファに栌玍されおいる倉動皮別カりンタの倀に基づいお倉動パタヌンが決定されるのは前蚘ステップ等ず同様である。䞊蚘の通り倧圓たり時、リヌチ発生時、リヌチ非発生時のいずれかで図柄停止コマンド及び倉動パタヌンコマンドの蚭定が完了するず、本凊理を終了する。   If it is neither big hit nor reach, the process proceeds to step S510, and the left, middle, and right off symbol counters CL, CM, and CR stored in the complete off symbol buffer of the RAM 503 are set as stop symbol commands. In step S511, a variation pattern for complete out-of-range display is determined, and the variation pattern is set as a variation pattern command. At this time, the variation pattern is determined based on the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503, as in step S503 and the like. As described above, when the setting of the symbol stop command and the variation pattern command is completed at the time of jackpot, at the time of reach occurrence, or at the time of no reach occurrence, this processing is terminated.

図の説明に戻り、ステップが、すなわち第図柄の倉動衚瀺䞭である堎合には、ステップに進み、倉動時間が経過したか吊かを刀別する。このずき、第図柄の倉動パタヌンに応じお圓該第図柄の倉動時間が決められおおり、この倉動時間が経過した時にステップが肯定刀別される。そしお、ステップでは、停止図柄の確定のために蚭定されおいる確定コマンドを蚭定し、その埌本凊理を終了する。   Returning to the description of FIG. 34, if step S402 is YES, that is, if the variation of the first symbol is being displayed, the process proceeds to step S407 to determine whether or not the variation time has elapsed. At this time, the variation time of the first symbol is determined according to the variation pattern of the first symbol, and when this variation time has elapsed, an affirmative determination is made in step S407. In step S408, a confirmation command set for confirming the stop symbol is set, and then this process is terminated.

次に、払出制埡装眮内のにより実行される払出制埡に぀いお説明する。図は、払出制埡装眮のメむン凊理を瀺すフロヌチャヌトであり、このメむン凊理は電源投入時のリセットに䌎い起動される。   Next, payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the main process of the payout control apparatus 311. This main process is started upon reset when the power is turned on.

たず、ステップでは、電源投入に䌎う初期蚭定凊理を実行する。具䜓的には、スタックポむンタに予め決められた所定倀を蚭定するず共に、割蟌みモヌドを蚭定する。たた、ステップでは、䞻制埡装眮から送信される払出蚱可コマンドを受信するたで埅機する。そしお、払出蚱可コマンドを受信した時点でステップに進んでアクセスを蚱可するず共に、ステップで倖郚割蟌みベクタの蚭定を行う。   First, in step S901, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer, and an interrupt mode is set. In step S902, the process waits until a payout permission command transmitted from main controller 271 is received. When the payout permission command is received, the process advances to step S903 to permit RAM access, and in step S904, an external interrupt vector is set.

その埌、内のに関しおデヌタバックアップの凊理を実行する。぀たり、ステップでは電源装眮に蚭けた消去スむッチが抌されおいるか吊かを刀別し、続くステップではのバックアップ゚リアに電源遮断の発生情報が蚭定されおいるか吊かを刀別する。たた、ステップでは刀定倀を算出し、続くステップでは、その刀定倀が電源遮断時に保存した刀定倀ず䞀臎するか吊か、すなわちバックアップの有効性を刀別する。刀定倀は、䟋えばの䜜業領域アドレスにおけるチェックサム倀である。なお、の所定の゚リアに曞き蟌たれたキヌワヌドが正しく保存されおいるか吊かによりバックアップの有効性を刀断するこずも可胜である。   Thereafter, data backup processing is executed for the RAM 513 in the CPU 511. That is, in step S905, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided in the power supply device 313 is pressed, and in the subsequent step S906, it is determined whether or not the power shutoff occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. To do. In step S907, a RAM determination value is calculated. In subsequent step S908, it is determined whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, that is, the validity of the backup. The RAM determination value is a checksum value at a work area address in the RAM 513, for example. Note that it is possible to determine the validity of the backup based on whether or not the keywords written in a predetermined area of the RAM 513 are correctly stored.

消去スむッチが抌されおいれば、の初期化凊理ステップ〜に移行する。たた、電源遮断の発生情報が蚭定されおいない堎合や、刀定倀チェックサム倀等によりバックアップの異垞が確認された堎合も同様にの初期化凊理ステップ〜に移行する。぀たり、ステップではの党領域をにクリアし、続くステップではの初期化凊理を実行する。たた、ステップでは呚蟺デバむスの初期蚭定を行うず共に、ステップでは割蟌み蚱可を蚭定し、埌述する払出制埡凊理に移行する。   If the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the process proceeds to RAM initialization processing (steps S915 to S918). Similarly, when the occurrence information of the power shutdown is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like), the process proceeds to the initialization process of the RAM 513 (steps S915 to S918). . That is, in step S915, the entire area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and in the subsequent step S916, initialization processing of the RAM 513 is executed. In step S917, CPU peripheral devices are initialized, and in step S918, interrupt permission is set, and the process proceeds to a payout control process described later.

䞀方、消去スむッチが抌されおいない堎合には、電源遮断の発生情報が蚭定されおいるこず、及び刀定倀チェックサム倀等が正垞であるこずを条件に、埩電時の凊理電源遮断埩旧時の凊理を実行する。぀たり、ステップでは電源遮断前のスタックポむンタを埩垰させ、ステップでは電源遮断の発生情報をクリアする。たた、ステップでは呚蟺デバむスの初期蚭定を行い、ステップでは䜿甚レゞスタをのバックアップ゚リアから埩垰させる。さらに、ステップでは、割蟌み蚱可䞍蚱可を電源遮断前の状態に埩垰させた埌、電源遮断前の番地ぞ戻る。   On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 has not been pressed, the power-off occurrence information is set, and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal, the condition at the time of power recovery Execute the process (process when power is restored). That is, in step S909, the stack pointer prior to power shutdown is restored, and in step S910, the information on occurrence of power shutdown is cleared. In step S911, the CPU peripheral device is initialized, and in step S912, the used register is restored from the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. Further, in steps S913 and S914, the interrupt permission / non-permission is returned to the state before the power shutdown, and then the address before the power shutdown is returned.

次に、払出制埡凊理の流れを図のフロヌチャヌトを参照しながら説明する。   Next, the flow of the payout control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

図においお、ステップでは、䞻制埡装眮からのコマンドを取埗し、賞球の総賞球個数を蚘憶する。ステップでは、発射制埡装眮に察しお発射蚱可の蚭定を行う。たた、ステップでは、状態埩垰スむッチをチェックしお、状態埩垰動䜜開始ず刀定した堎合に状態埩垰動䜜を実行する。   In FIG. 40, in step S1001, a command from the main controller 271 is acquired, and the total number of prize balls is stored. In step S1002, the launch control apparatus 312 is set for launch permission. In step S1003, the state return switch 321 is checked, and if it is determined that the state return operation has started, the state return operation is executed.

その埌、ステップでは、䞋皿の状態の倉化に応じお䞋皿満タン状態又は䞋皿満タン解陀状態の蚭定を実行する。すなわち、䞋皿満タンスむッチの怜出信号により䞋皿の満タン状態を刀別し、䞋皿満タンになった時、䞋皿満タン状態の蚭定を実行し、䞋皿満タンでなくなった時、䞋皿満タン解陀状態の蚭定を実行する。たた、ステップでは、タンク球の状態の倉化に応じおタンク球無し状態又はタンク球無し解陀状態の蚭定を実行する。すなわち、タンク球無しスむッチの怜出信号によりタンク球無し状態を刀別し、タンク球無しになった時、タンク球無し状態の蚭定を実行し、タンク球無しでなくなった時、タンク球無し解陀状態の蚭定を実行する。   Thereafter, in step S1004, setting of the lower pan full tank state or the lower pan full tank release state is executed in accordance with the change in the state of the lower pan 16. That is, when the lower pan 16 is determined to be full based on the detection signal of the lower pan full switch, when the lower pan is full, the lower pan full state is set, and when the lower pan is full , Set the lower pan full release state. In step S1005, setting of a tank ball absence state or a tank ball absence release state is executed according to a change in the state of the tank ball. In other words, the tank ball no switch state is determined based on the detection signal of the tank ball no switch. When there is no tank ball, the tank ball no state setting is executed. Perform configuration.

その埌、ステップでは、報知する状態の有無を刀別し、報知する状態が有る堎合には払出制埡装眮に蚭けたセグメントにより報知する。   Thereafter, in step S1006, the presence / absence of the state to be notified is determined. If there is a state to be notified, the 7-segment LED provided in the payout control device 311 is notified.

ステップ〜では、賞球払出の凊理を実行する。この堎合、賞球の払出䞍可状態でなく䞔぀前蚘ステップで蚘憶した総賞球個数がでなければステップが共に、ステップに進み、図に瀺した埌述する賞球制埡凊理を開始する。たた、賞球の払出䞍可状態又は総賞球個数がであればステップの䜕れかが、ステップ〜の貞球払出の凊理に移行する。   In steps S1007 to S1009, prize ball payout processing is executed. In this case, if the prize ball is not in a payout disabled state and the total number of prize balls stored in step S1001 is not 0 (both NO in steps S1007 and S1008), the process proceeds to step S1009 and a prize to be described later shown in FIG. Start the ball control process. If the prize ball is not paid out or the total number of prize balls is 0 (YES in any of steps S1007 and S1008), the process proceeds to the lending / paying process in steps S1010 to S1012.

貞球払出の凊理においお、貞球の払出䞍可状態でなく䞔぀カヌドナニットからの貞球払出芁求を受信しおいればステップが、が、ステップに進み、図に瀺した埌述する貞球制埡凊理を開始する。たた、貞球の払出䞍可状態又は貞球払出芁求を受信しおいなければステップが又はが、埌続の球抜きの凊理を実行する。   In the lending process, if the lending is not disabled and a lending request is received from the card unit (NO in step S1010, YES in S1011), the process proceeds to step S1012 and is shown in FIG. The ball rental control process described later is started. Further, if a rental ball cannot be paid out or a rental ball payout request has not been received (YES in step S1010 or NO in S1011), subsequent ball removal processing is executed.

ステップでは、状態埩垰スむッチをチェックしお球抜き䞍可状態でないこず、及び球抜き動䜜開始でないこずを条件に、払出モヌタを駆動させ球抜き凊理を実行する。続くステップでは、球詰たり状態であるこずを条件にバむブレヌタの制埡バむブモヌタ制埡を実行する。その埌、本払出制埡凊理の先頭に戻る。   In step S1013, the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the ball removal process on the condition that the state return switch 321 is checked and the ball removal disabled state is not set and the ball removal operation is not started. In subsequent step S1014, control of vibrator 360 (vibration motor control) is executed on the condition that the ball is clogged. Thereafter, the process returns to the top of the payout control process.

ここで、図に瀺す賞球制埡凊理においお、ステップでは、払出モヌタを駆動させお賞球の払出を実行する。続くステップでは、払出モヌタの回転が正垞であるかを払出回転センサの怜出結果により刀別する。払出モヌタの回転が正垞でなければ、ステップに進み、払出モヌタを駆動させおリトラむ凊理を実行するず共に払出モヌタの停止凊理を実行し、その埌、図の払出制埡凊理に戻る。   Here, in the prize ball control process shown in FIG. 41, in step S1101, the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the prize ball payout. In subsequent step S1102, whether the rotation of the payout motor 358a is normal is determined based on the detection result of the payout rotation sensor. If the rotation of the payout motor 358a is not normal, the process proceeds to step S1103, where the payout motor 358a is driven to execute a retry process and a stop process of the payout motor 358a, and then the process returns to the payout control process of FIG.

たた、払出モヌタの回転が正垞であれば、ステップに進み、遊技球のカりントが正垞に行われおいるか吊かを払出カりントスむッチの怜出結果により刀別する。遊技球のカりントが正垞でなければ、ステップに進み、払出モヌタを駆動させおリトラむ凊理を実行するず共に払出モヌタの停止凊理を実行し、その埌、図の払出制埡凊理に戻る。   If the rotation of the payout motor 358a is normal, the process proceeds to step S1104, and whether or not the game ball is normally counted is determined based on the detection result of the payout count switch. If the game ball count is not normal, the process advances to step S1105 to drive the payout motor 358a to execute a retry process and execute a stop process of the payout motor 358a, and then returns to the payout control process of FIG.

さらに、遊技球のカりントが正垞であれば、ステップに進み、払出カりントスむッチによる遊技球のカりント数が総賞球個数に達しお払出が完了したか吊かを刀別する。払出が完了しおいれば、ステップで払出モヌタの停止凊理を実行し、その埌、図の払出制埡凊理に戻る。   If the game ball count is normal, the process proceeds to step S1106, where it is determined whether or not the game ball count by the payout count switch has reached the total number of prize balls and the payout has been completed. If the payout has been completed, a stop process of the payout motor 358a is executed in step S1107, and then the process returns to the payout control process of FIG.

たた、図に瀺す貞球制埡凊理においお、ステップでは、払出モヌタを駆動させお貞球の払出を実行する。続くステップでは、払出モヌタの回転が正垞であるかを払出回転センサの怜出結果により刀別する。払出モヌタの回転が正垞でなければ、ステップに進み、払出モヌタを駆動させおリトラむ凊理を実行するず共に払出モヌタの停止凊理を実行し、その埌、図の払出制埡凊理に戻る。   In the ball lending control process shown in FIG. 42, in step S1201, the payout motor 358a is driven to pay out the lending ball. In the subsequent step S1202, it is determined from the detection result of the dispensing rotation sensor whether the rotation of the dispensing motor 358a is normal. If the rotation of the payout motor 358a is not normal, the process advances to step S1203 to drive the payout motor 358a to execute a retry process and execute a stop process of the payout motor 358a, and then return to the payout control process of FIG.

たた、払出モヌタの回転が正垞であれば、ステップに進み、遊技球のカりントが正垞に行われおいるか吊かを払出カりントスむッチの怜出結果により刀別する。遊技球のカりントが正垞でなければ、ステップに進み、払出モヌタを駆動させおリトラむ凊理を実行するず共に払出モヌタの停止凊理を実行し、その埌、図の払出制埡凊理に戻る。   If the rotation of the payout motor 358a is normal, the process advances to step S1204 to determine whether or not the game ball is normally counted based on the detection result of the payout count switch. If the game ball count is not normal, the process advances to step S1205 to drive the payout motor 358a to execute a retry process and execute a stop process of the payout motor 358a, and then return to the payout control process of FIG.

さらに、遊技球のカりントが正垞であれば、ステップに進み、払出カりントスむッチによる遊技球のカりント数が所定の貞球個数個に達しお払出が完了したか吊かを刀別する。払出が完了しおいれば、ステップで払出モヌタの停止凊理を実行し、その埌、図の払出制埡凊理に戻る。   Further, if the game ball count is normal, the process proceeds to step S1206, where it is determined whether or not the game ball count by the payout count switch has reached a predetermined number of rented balls (25) and the payout is completed. If the payout has been completed, a stop process of the payout motor 358a is executed in step S1207, and then the process returns to the payout control process of FIG.

次に、衚瀺制埡装眮による衚瀺制埡の具䜓的手順に぀いお抂説する。図は、衚瀺制埡装眮内のにより実行される衚瀺制埡凊理を瀺すフロヌチャヌトである。は、図に瀺す手順に埓っお䞻制埡装眮から提䟛される各皮コマンドを凊理し぀぀第図柄衚瀺装眮の衚瀺制埡を実行する。   Next, a specific procedure of display control by the display control device 214 will be outlined. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing display control processing executed by the CPU 521 in the display control device 214. The CPU 521 executes display control of the first symbol display device 41 while processing various commands provided from the main control device 271 according to the procedure shown in FIG.

図においお、先ずステップでは、䞻制埡装眮から衚瀺コマンドを受信したか吊かを刀別する。ステップがの堎合、䜕らかのコマンドを受信するたで埅機する。そしお、衚瀺コマンドを受信するず、ステップに進み、その衚瀺コマンドの内容をワヌクに栌玍する。続いおステップでは、ワヌクに栌玍された情報に基づき、に察する内郚コマンドを生成する等の各皮の挔算凊理を開始する。内郚コマンドは、倉動衚瀺の開始から終了たでの䞀連の衚瀺挔出を指定するためのコマンドであり、ワヌクに栌玍された情報に基づいおその郜床必芁な内郚コマンドが生成される。これにより、は、からの指什内郚コマンドに応じお描画凊理を行い、第図柄衚瀺装眮での図柄の倉動衚瀺を開始する。たたこのずき、は、その郜床の衚瀺挔出に同期させながら、音声類、ランプ類を駆動するための制埡コマンドや右扉及び巊扉を動䜜させるための制埡コマンドを音声ランプ制埡装眮に察しお送信する。これにより、音声ランプ制埡装眮は、からの制埡コマンドに埓っお音声類、ランプ類に加え右扉及び巊扉を駆動させる。なお、衚瀺コマンドを䞀旊受信するずその埌に確定コマンドを受信するたでの間、ずずの協働のもずに図柄の倉動衚瀺が継続される。その間、は、の制埡ず図に瀺すコマンド受信凊理ずを䞊行しお行う。音声ランプ制埡装眮における制埡も同様である。   In FIG. 43, first, in step S1301, it is determined whether a display command has been received from the main controller 271 or not. When step S1301 is NO, it waits until it receives some command. When the display command is received, the process proceeds to step S1302, and the contents of the display command are stored in the work RAM 523. In step S1303, various arithmetic processes such as generating an internal command for the VDP 524 are started based on the information stored in the work RAM 523. The internal command is a command for designating a series of display effects from the start to the end of variable display, and a necessary internal command is generated each time based on information stored in the work RAM 523. As a result, the VDP 524 performs a drawing process in response to a command (internal command) from the CPU 521 and starts the variable display of symbols on the first symbol display device 41. At this time, the CPU 521 outputs a control command for driving voices and lamps and a control command for operating the right door 171 and the left door 172 while synchronizing with the display effects at each time. Send to. As a result, the sound lamp control device 272 drives the right door 171 and the left door 172 in addition to the sounds and lamps in accordance with the control command from the CPU 521. It should be noted that the symbol variation display is continued under the cooperation of the CPU 521 and the VDP 524 until the display command is received once until the confirmation command is received thereafter. Meanwhile, the CPU 521 performs the control of the VDP 524 and the command reception process shown in FIG. 43 in parallel. The control in the sound lamp control device 272 is the same.

その埌、ステップでは、䞻制埡装眮から確定コマンドを受信したか吊かを刀別する。そしお、確定コマンドを受信したこずを条件にステップに進み、に察しお停止図柄での確定衚瀺を指瀺する。これにより、は倉動しおいた図柄を停止図柄で確定衚瀺させる。こうしお、図柄の倉動開始から倉動停止確定衚瀺たでの䞀連の衚瀺凊理が行われる。衚瀺制埡装眮は、図柄の倉動開始時及び倉動停止時に䞻制埡装眮によるコントロヌルを受けるが、その間の図柄の継続的な倉動に぀いおは、衚瀺制埡装眮内の及びによる自立的な画像制埡によっお担保される。   Thereafter, in step S1304, it is determined whether or not a confirmation command has been received from main controller 271. Then, the process proceeds to step S1305 on the condition that the confirmation command has been received, and instructs the VDP 524 to confirm the display with the stop symbol. As a result, the VDP 524 confirms and displays the changed symbol as a stop symbol. In this way, a series of display processes from the start of pattern change to the stop of change (determined display) are performed. The display control device 214 is controlled by the main control device 271 at the time of starting and stopping the change of the symbol, but the continuous change of the symbol during that time is a self-supporting image by the CPU 521 and the VDP 524 in the display control device 214. Secured by control.

ここで、衚瀺制埡装眮にお生成される内郚コマンドの抂略に぀いお図を甚いお説明する。図は、プログラムに蚘憶されおいる内郚コマンドの基本構造を瀺す抂略図である。衚瀺制埡装眮のは、䞻制埡装眮から衚瀺コマンド倉動パタヌンコマンドを受信するず、その衚瀺コマンドに応じお内郚コマンドを決定し、圓該内郚コマンドに含たれる倉動制埡デヌタを順次出力する。   Here, an outline of an internal command generated by the display control device 214 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a schematic diagram showing the basic structure of internal commands stored in the program ROM 522. As shown in FIG. When the CPU 521 of the display control device 214 receives a display command (variation pattern command) from the main control device 271, the CPU 521 determines an internal command according to the display command and sequentially outputs variation control data included in the internal command.

図においお、内郚コマンドの倉動制埡デヌタは、倧別しお通垞倉動デヌタ矀ず、ノヌマルリヌチデヌタ矀ず、スヌパヌリヌチデヌタ矀ずを有しおなり、倉動開始埌は、先ず通垞倉動デヌタ矀の各デヌタが順次出力され、その埌、ノヌマルリヌチ発生時にはノヌマルリヌチデヌタ矀の各デヌタが順次出力され、スヌパヌリヌチ発生時にはスヌパヌリヌチデヌタ矀の各デヌタが順次出力される。詳しくは、図柄の通垞倉動に際し、通垞倉動背景衚瀺デヌタ、キャラクタ衚瀺デヌタ、通垞倉動効果音デヌタ、通垞倉動デヌタ、通垞倉動デヌタ・・・が芏定のタむミングで順次出力される。ノヌマルリヌチ発生時には、ノヌマルリヌチ背景衚瀺デヌタ、ノヌマルリヌチ効果音デヌタ、ノヌマルリヌチデヌタ、ノヌマルリヌチデヌタ・・・が芏定のタむミングで順次出力される。スヌパヌリヌチ発生時には、スヌパヌリヌチ背景衚瀺デヌタ、スヌパヌリヌチ効果音デヌタ、スヌパヌリヌチデヌタ、圹物デヌタ、スヌパヌリヌチデヌタ、予告遞択デヌタ、スヌパヌリヌチデヌタ・・・が芏定のタむミングで順次出力される。䞊蚘各デヌタの出力は、終了デヌタが出力されるたで継続される。なお、予告遞択デヌタは、予告甚乱数による抜遞結果に基づいお出力される。   In FIG. 44, the fluctuation control data of the internal command is roughly divided into a normal fluctuation data group D1, a normal reach data group D2, and a super reach data group D3. Then, each data of the normal reach data group D2 is sequentially output when a normal reach occurs, and each data of the super reach data group D3 is sequentially output when a super reach occurs. Specifically, during normal variation of a symbol, normal variation background display data, character display data, normal variation sound effect data, normal variation LED data, normal variation data 1, 2,... N are sequentially output at a specified timing. . When normal reach occurs, normal reach background display data, normal reach sound effect data, normal reach LED data, normal reach data 1, 2,... N are sequentially output at a prescribed timing. When super reach occurs, super reach background display data, super reach sound effect data, super reach LED data, accessory data, super reach data 1 and 2, notice selection data, super reach data 3,. Are output sequentially. The output of each data is continued until end data is output. The notice selection data is output based on a lottery result based on a notice random number.

かかる堎合、背景衚瀺デヌタ、キャラクタ衚瀺デヌタ、通垞倉動デヌタ、各リヌチデヌタ及び予告遞択デヌタはに察しお出力され、背景衚瀺デヌタ、キャラクタ衚瀺デヌタ、予告遞択デヌタに基づいお、その郜床該圓する背景、キャラクタ、予告図柄が衚瀺画面に衚瀺される。たた、通垞倉動デヌタや各リヌチデヌタに基づいお、その郜床該圓する倉動パタヌンが芏定の時間ルヌル倉動速床、時間等に即しお衚瀺画面に衚瀺される。その他、効果音デヌタ、デヌタ、圹物デヌタは音声ランプ制埡装眮に察しお出力され、各デヌタに基づいお、音声類、ランプ類、右扉及び巊扉による補助挔出が適宜行われる。   In such a case, background display data, character display data, normal variation data, reach data, and notice selection data are output to the VDP 524, and based on the background display data, character display data, and notice selection data, the corresponding background each time. , Characters and notice symbols are displayed on the display screen. Further, based on the normal fluctuation data and each reach data, the corresponding fluctuation pattern is displayed on the display screen in accordance with a prescribed time rule (fluctuation speed, time, etc.). In addition, sound effect data, LED data, and accessory data are output to the sound lamp control device 272, and based on each data, auxiliary effects by sounds, lamps (LED), right door 171 and left door 172 are provided. As appropriate.

次に、衚瀺制埡装眮による衚瀺制埡においお、リヌチ発生に際しお実際にどのような衚瀺が行われ、さらに衚瀺画面䞊の右扉及び巊扉がどのように動䜜するかを具䜓䟋を挙げお説明する。図〜図には、各皮リヌチパタヌンでの第図柄衚瀺装眮の衚瀺画面を瀺す衚瀺䟋を瀺す。ここでは、パタヌン〜パタヌンたで皮類のリヌチパタヌンを䟋瀺しおおり、このうちパタヌンはノヌマルリヌチず称されるリヌチパタヌンであり、パタヌン〜パタヌンはスヌパヌリヌチず称されるリヌチパタヌンである。   Next, in the display control by the display control device 214, a specific example will be given of what display is actually performed when reach occurs and how the right door 171 and the left door 172 operate on the display screen. explain. 45 to 50 show display examples showing the display screens of the first symbol display device 41 in various reach patterns. Here, six types of reach patterns from pattern 1 to pattern 6 are illustrated. Of these, pattern 1 is a reach pattern called normal reach, and patterns 2 to pattern 6 are reach patterns called super reach. is there.

図に瀺すパタヌンでは、右扉及び巊扉は共に閉じたたたであり、さらに䞻衚瀺領域及び副衚瀺領域は぀に領域区分されたたたである。この堎合、䞻衚瀺領域においお背景画面が通垞時のものから倉曎されるこずはなく、最終停止図柄䞭図柄列の図柄の倉動衚瀺も通垞時ずほが同様に行われる。   In the pattern 1 shown in FIG. 45, both the right door 171 and the left door 172 remain closed, and the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs remain divided into two areas. In this case, the background screen in the main display area Rm is not changed from that in the normal state, and the variable display of the final stop symbol (the symbol in the middle symbol row) is performed in substantially the same manner as in the normal state.

図に瀺すパタヌンでは、右扉及び巊扉は共に閉じたたたであるが、䞻衚瀺領域及び副衚瀺領域の領域区分が倖され、䞻衚瀺領域ず副衚瀺領域の䞭倮領域図で説明した第予告領域ずを甚いおリヌチ挔出が行われる。この堎合、背景画面が通垞時ずは異なるものに倉曎されるずずもに、リヌチ挔出甚のキャラクタ図では花びらをバックにした少女キャラクタが珟れ、その衚瀺状態で最終停止図柄䞭図柄列の図柄の倉動衚瀺が行われる。最終停止図柄は、膚匵及び収瞮を繰り返しながら倉動する。   In the pattern 2 shown in FIG. 46, the right door 171 and the left door 172 are both closed, but the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs are removed, and the center of the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs is removed. A reach effect is performed using the area (the third notice area Rs3 described with reference to FIG. 29). In this case, the background screen is changed to something different from the normal screen, and a reach effect character (a girl character with petals in the figure) appears, and the final stop symbol (the symbol in the middle symbol row) is displayed. ) Is displayed. The final stop pattern fluctuates while repeating expansion and contraction.

図に瀺すパタヌンでは、右扉が開き、巊扉が閉じた状態ずされる。たた、䞻衚瀺領域及び副衚瀺領域の領域区分が倖され、䞻衚瀺領域ず副衚瀺領域の右偎領域及び䞭倮領域図で説明した第第予告領域ずを甚いおリヌチ挔出が行われる。この堎合、背景画面が通垞時ずは異なるものに倉曎されるずずもに、リヌチ挔出甚のキャラクタ図ではクレヌン車に乗った少幎キャラクタが珟れ、その衚瀺状態で最終停止図柄䞭図柄列の図柄の倉動衚瀺が行われる。最終停止図柄は、クレヌンで持ち䞊げられるなどされながら倉動する。   In the pattern 3 shown in FIG. 47, the right door 171 is opened and the left door 172 is closed. In addition, the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs are separated from each other, and the right area and the center area of the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs (first and third notice areas Rs1, Rs3 described in FIG. 29). And reach production. In this case, the background screen is changed to something different from the normal screen, and a reach effect character (a boy character riding a crane truck in the figure) appears, and the final stop symbol (the symbol in the middle symbol row) is displayed. ) Is displayed. The final stop symbol changes while being lifted by a crane.

図に瀺すパタヌンでは、右扉が閉じ、巊扉が開いた状態ずされる。たた、䞻衚瀺領域及び副衚瀺領域の領域区分が倖され、䞻衚瀺領域ず副衚瀺領域の巊偎領域及び䞭倮領域図で説明した第第予告領域ずを甚いおリヌチ挔出が行われる。この堎合、背景画面が通垞時ずは異なるものに倉曎されるずずもに、リヌチ挔出甚のキャラクタ図ではコンベアを操䜜する少幎キャラクタが珟れ、その衚瀺状態で最終停止図柄䞭図柄列の図柄の倉動衚瀺が行われる。最終停止図柄は、元々の副衚瀺領域の巊偎領域及び䞭倮領域図で説明した第第予告領域でコンベアに乗せられお暪方向に移動しながら倉動する。   In the pattern 4 shown in FIG. 48, the right door 171 is closed and the left door 172 is opened. In addition, the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs are separated from each other, and the left area and the center area of the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs (second and third notice areas Rs2 and Rs3 described in FIG. 29). And reach production. In this case, the background screen is changed to something different from the normal screen, and a reach effect character (a boy character who operates the conveyor in the figure) appears, and the final stop symbol (the symbol in the middle symbol row) appears in that display state. Is displayed. The final stop symbol fluctuates while being moved in the horizontal direction on the conveyor in the left side region and the central region (second and third notice regions Rs2 and Rs3 described in FIG. 29) of the original sub display region Rs.

図に瀺すパタヌンでは、右扉及び巊扉が共に開いた状態ずされる。たた、䞻衚瀺領域及び副衚瀺領域の領域区分が倖され、䞻衚瀺領域ず副衚瀺領域党䜓ずを甚いおリヌチ挔出が行われる。この堎合、背景画面が通垞時ずは異なるものに倉曎されるずずもに、リヌチ挔出甚のキャラクタ図では朚槌を持った少幎キャラクタずそれを芋぀める少女キャラクタが珟れ、その衚瀺状態で最終停止図柄䞭図柄列の図柄の倉動衚瀺が行われる。最終停止図柄は、䞊から䞋ぞず移動し、さらに぀ず぀朚槌で殎打されながら倉動する。

最埌に、図に瀺すパタヌンでは、右扉及び巊扉が共に開いた状態ずされる。たた、䞻衚瀺領域及び副衚瀺領域の領域区分が倖され、䞻衚瀺領域ず副衚瀺領域党䜓ずを甚いおリヌチ挔出が行われる。この堎合、背景画面が通垞時ずは異なるものに倉曎されるずずもに、リヌチ挔出甚のキャラクタ図では朚槌を持った少幎キャラクタが珟れ、その衚瀺状態で最終停止図柄䞭図柄列の図柄の倉動衚瀺が行われる。特にかかるパタヌンでは、有効ラむン数が通垞時のラむンよりも増やされおおり、倧圓たり状態に移行する期埅床が高められおいる。最終停止図柄は、䞊から䞋ぞず移動し、さらに぀ず぀朚槌で殎打されながら倉動する。
In the pattern 5 shown in FIG. 49, the right door 171 and the left door 172 are both opened. In addition, the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs are separated from each other, and a reach effect is performed using the main display area Rm and the entire sub display area Rs. In this case, the background screen is changed to something different from the normal screen, and a reach effect character (a boy character with a mallet and a girl character staring at it) appears, and the final stop pattern is displayed in that state. The change display of (the symbol in the middle symbol row) is performed. The final stop symbol moves from top to bottom and fluctuates while being beaten one by one with a mallet.

Finally, in the pattern 6 shown in FIG. 50, the right door 171 and the left door 172 are both opened. In addition, the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs are separated from each other, and a reach effect is performed using the main display area Rm and the entire sub display area Rs. In this case, the background screen is changed to something different from the normal screen, and a reach effect character (a boy character with a wooden mallet in the figure) appears, and the final stop symbol (the symbol in the middle symbol row) appears in that display state. ) Is displayed. In particular, in the pattern 6, the number of effective lines is increased from the normal five lines, and the degree of expectation for shifting to the big hit state is increased. The final stop symbol moves from top to bottom and fluctuates while being beaten one by one with a mallet.

次に、䞊蚘各パタヌン〜パタヌンのスヌパヌリヌチに぀いお、図柄の倉化を時系列的に図瀺しながらより詳しく説明する。なお、以䞋の説明では䟿宜䞊、前述した䞻図柄を各々に付された数字番号で蚘述するこずずし、具䜓的にはそれぞれ「」図柄、「」図柄、「」図柄、・・・「」図柄ず蚘述する。たた、巊右の図柄列に䞀旊停止した䞻図柄が同䞀である堎合、この巊図柄ず右図柄ずを結んだラむンをリヌチラむンず蚘述する。たた必芁に応じお、前蚘図で説明した、衚瀺画面、䞻衚瀺領域、副衚瀺領域、図柄列〜、第予告領域、第予告領域、第予告領域等の甚語を甚いるこずずする。   Next, the super reach of each of the patterns 2 to 6 will be described in more detail while showing the change of the symbols in time series. In the following description, for the sake of convenience, the above-described main symbols will be described by numerical numbers assigned to them. Specifically, “0” symbol, “1” symbol, “2” symbol,. 9 ”Describe as a symbol. Further, when the main symbols once stopped in the left and right symbol rows Z1 and Z3 are the same, a line connecting the left symbol and the right symbol is described as a reach line. If necessary, the display screen G, the main display area Rm, the sub display area Rs, the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the first notice area Rs1, the second notice area Rs2, and the third notice area Rs3 described in FIG. And other terms will be used.

前蚘図に瀺したパタヌンのリヌチパタヌンを、図〜の䞀連の衚瀺態様に基づいお詳现に説明する。   The reach pattern of the pattern 2 shown in FIG. 46 will be described in detail based on a series of display modes shown in FIGS.

たずでは、衚瀺画面の䞻衚瀺領域においお、各図柄列〜の図柄が通垞倉動した埌に巊図柄及び右図柄の倉動衚瀺が䞀旊停止し、リヌチラむン䞊でリヌチが発生する。リヌチラむンでは巊右の図柄が「」図柄ずなり、リヌチラむンでは巊右の図柄が「」図柄ずなっおいる。それらリヌチラむンは、前蚘図で説明した右䞊がりラむン及び巊䞊がりラむンず察応しおいる。右扉及び巊扉は共に閉じたたたであり、䞻衚瀺領域及び副衚瀺領域は぀に領域区分されたたたである。リヌチ衚瀺が発生するず、副衚瀺領域の䞭倮領域図で説明した第予告領域に衚瀺された少幎キャラクタにより、リヌチ発生である旚報知される。この段階では、䞻衚瀺領域においお背景画面が通垞時のものから倉曎されるこずはなく、䞭図柄の倉動衚瀺も通垞倉動ず同様に行われる。   First, in (a), in the main display region Rm of the display screen G, after the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 have normally changed, the change display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, and the reach on the reach lines La1 and La2 is temporarily stopped. Occurs. In the reach line La1, the left and right symbols are “1” symbols, and in the reach line La2, the left and right symbols are “0” symbols. These reach lines La1 and La2 correspond to the right rising line L4 and the left rising line L5 described with reference to FIG. Both the right door 171 and the left door 172 remain closed, and the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs remain divided into two areas. When the reach display occurs, the boy character displayed in the center area of the sub display area Rs (the third notice area Rs3 described with reference to FIG. 29) notifies that the reach has occurred. At this stage, the background screen in the main display area Rm is not changed from that in the normal state, and the change display of the middle symbol is performed in the same manner as the normal change.

その埌、に瀺すように、䞻衚瀺領域及び副衚瀺領域の領域区分が倖され、䞻衚瀺領域ず副衚瀺領域の䞭倮領域ずを甚いお所定のリヌチ挔出が行われる。すなわち、䞻衚瀺領域が副衚瀺領域の䞭倮領域を統合するようにしお拡匵される。この堎合、背景画面が通垞時ずは異なるものに倉曎されるずずもに、花びらをバックにした少女キャラクタが衚瀺される。たた、,に瀺すように、最終停止図柄た
る䞭図柄は、リヌチラむンずリヌチラむンの亀差する䜍眮にお膚匵及び収瞮を繰り返しながら昇順に倉動衚瀺される。そしお、に瀺すように、最終停止図柄が「」又は「」図柄にお停止し確定衚瀺された堎合、前蚘少女キャラクタにより、倧圓たり発生である旚報知される。なお、䞊蚘のようなスヌパヌリヌチに発展しおも、最終停止図柄が圓たり図柄本䟋では「」又は「」図柄にお停止しなかった堎合には、前蚘少女キャラクタにより、倧圓たり非発生である旚報知される。
Thereafter, as shown in (b), the area division of the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs is removed, and a predetermined reach effect is performed using the main display area Rm and the central area of the sub display area Rs. That is, the main display area Rm is expanded so as to integrate the central area of the sub display area Rs. In this case, the background screen is changed to a different one from the normal time, and the girl character with the petals in the background is displayed. Further, as shown in (b) and (c), the middle symbol, which is the final stop symbol, is variably displayed in ascending order while repeating expansion and contraction at the position where the reach line La1 and the reach line La2 intersect. Then, as shown in (d), when the final stop symbol stops at the “0” or “1” symbol and is displayed in a fixed manner, the girl character is notified that a big hit has occurred. If the final stop symbol does not stop at the winning symbol (in this example, “0” or “1” symbol) even if the super-reach is developed as described above, the girl character does not win the jackpot. The occurrence is notified.

次に、前蚘図に瀺したパタヌンのリヌチパタヌンを、図〜の䞀連の衚瀺態様に基づいお詳现に説明する。   Next, the reach pattern of pattern 3 shown in FIG. 47 will be described in detail based on a series of display modes shown in FIGS.

では、衚瀺画面の䞻衚瀺領域においお、各図柄列〜の図柄が通垞倉動した埌に巊図柄及び右図柄の倉動衚瀺が䞀旊停止し、リヌチラむン䞊でリヌチが発生する。リヌチラむンでは巊右の図柄が「」図柄ずなっおおり、該リヌチラむンは、前蚘図で説明した䞋ラむンず察応しおいる。リヌチ衚瀺が発生するず、副衚瀺領域の䞭倮領域図で説明した第予告領域に衚瀺された少幎により、リヌチ発生である旚報知される。   In (a), in the main display region Rm of the display screen G, after the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 have normally changed, the left and right symbol change display is temporarily stopped, and reach occurs on the reach line Lb1. . In the reach line Lb1, the left and right symbols are “4” symbols, and the reach line Lb1 corresponds to the lower line L3 described in FIG. When the reach display occurs, the boy displayed in the center area of the sub display area Rs (the third notice area Rs3 described with reference to FIG. 29) notifies that the reach has occurred.

ここで、図瀺のように氎平ラむンでリヌチ衚瀺がなされる堎合、巊右の図柄列においお「」図柄はリヌチ衚瀺の察象図柄ずなるが、それ以倖の図柄はリヌチ衚瀺の察象ずならない。そこで、リヌチ発生時には、リヌ察象倖の図柄に関しお半透明化の凊理が斜される図では「」図柄以倖の「」図柄、「」図柄、花びら圢状の副図柄に察しお半透明化の凊理が斜されおいる。これにより、リヌチ衚瀺以倖の図柄が薄色でがんやりず衚瀺されるのに察し、リヌチ衚瀺図柄が匷調衚瀺されるようになっおいる。なお、説明は省略したが、前蚘図の事䟋においおのようにクロスラむンでリヌチ衚瀺された堎合、リヌチ衚瀺ずは無関係な図柄この堎合は副図柄に぀いおはやはり半透明化の凊理が斜されおいる。埌述する他のリヌチに぀いおも同様である。   Here, when the reach display is performed on the horizontal line as shown in the figure, in the left and right symbol rows Z1 and Z3, the symbol “4” is the symbol for reach display, but the other symbols are not the targets for reach display. . Therefore, when reach occurs, translucent processing is applied to symbols that are not subject to Lee (in the figure, “3” symbols other than “4” symbols, “5” symbols, and sub-patterns with petal shape). Is being processed). As a result, the symbols other than the reach display are displayed in a light color and blurred, whereas the reach display symbols are highlighted. In addition, although explanation is omitted, in the case of FIG. 51, when the reach display is performed with the cross line as shown in (a), the symbols that are unrelated to the reach display (in this case, the sub-design) are still translucent. Processing has been applied. The same applies to other reach described later.

その埌に瀺すように、前蚘少幎キャラクタが右扉を朚槌にお叩く挔出が行われる。このずき、右扉は朚槌にお叩かれるこずで開攟されるかの劂く動䜜するずずもに、副衚瀺領域の右偎領域図で説明した第予告領域にはクレヌン車が衚瀺される。及びの段階では、䞻衚瀺領域の背景画面が通垞時のものから倉曎されるこずはなく、䞭図柄の倉動衚瀺も通垞倉動ずほが同様に行われる。たた、䞻衚瀺領域及び副衚瀺領域は぀に領域区分されたたたである。   Thereafter, as shown in (b), the boy character strikes the right door 171 with a mallet. At this time, the right door 171 operates as if it is opened by being hit with a wooden mallet, and a crane truck is displayed in the right side area of the sub display area Rs (the first notice area Rs1 described in FIG. 29). Is done. At the stage of (a) and (b), the background screen of the main display area Rm is not changed from that in the normal state, and the change display of the middle symbols is performed in substantially the same manner as the normal change. Further, the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs remain divided into two areas.

その埌では、䞻衚瀺領域及び副衚瀺領域の領域区分が倖され、䞻衚瀺領域ず副衚瀺領域の䞭倮領域及び右偎領域ずを甚いお所定のリヌチ挔出が行われる。すなわち、䞻衚瀺領域が副衚瀺領域の䞭倮領域及び右偎領域を統合するようにしお拡匵される。この堎合、背景画面が通垞時ずは異なるものに倉曎されるずずもに、副衚瀺領域の䞭倮領域に衚瀺されおいた少幎キャラクタがクレヌン車を操䜜する様が衚瀺される。たた、最終停止図柄たる䞭図柄は、異なる䞻図柄が面ず぀に付された朚箱がクレヌン車に持ち䞊げられお回転したり、クレヌン車前方に投げ出されお転げ回ったりするこずで倉動衚瀺される。そしお、に瀺すように、最終停止図柄が「」図柄にお停止し確定衚瀺された堎合、クレヌン車に乗った少幎キャラクタにより、倧圓たり発生である旚報知される。なお、䞊蚘のようなスヌパヌリヌチに発展しおも、最終停止図柄が圓たり図柄本䟋では「」図柄にお停止しなかった堎合には、前蚘少幎キャラクタにより、倧圓たり非発生である旚報知される。   Thereafter, in (c), the area division of the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs is removed, and a predetermined reach effect is performed using the main display area Rm and the center area and the right area of the sub display area Rs. That is, the main display area Rm is expanded so as to integrate the central area and the right area of the sub display area Rs. In this case, the background screen is changed to a different one from that in the normal time, and the boy character displayed in the central area of the sub display area Rs is displayed to operate the crane vehicle. In addition, the middle symbol, which is the final stop symbol, is variably displayed when a wooden box with different main symbols attached to each side is lifted and rotated by a crane truck, or thrown forward and rolled around the crane truck. The Then, as shown in (d), when the final stop symbol stops at the symbol “4” and is displayed in a fixed manner, the boy character riding on the crane vehicle notifies that a big hit has occurred. If the final stop symbol does not stop at the winning symbol (in this example, “4” symbol) even if the super-reach is developed as described above, the boy character does not generate a big hit. Informed.

次に、前蚘図に瀺したパタヌンのリヌチパタヌンを、図〜の䞀連の衚瀺態様に基づいお詳现に説明する。   Next, the reach pattern of the pattern 4 shown in FIG. 48 will be described in detail based on a series of display modes of FIGS. 53 (a) to 53 (d).

では、衚瀺画面の䞻衚瀺領域においお、各図柄列〜の図柄が通垞倉動した埌に巊図柄及び右図柄の倉動衚瀺が䞀旊停止し、リヌチラむン䞊でリヌチが発生する。リヌチラむンでは巊右の図柄が「」図柄ずなっおおり、該リヌチラむンは、前蚘図で説明した䞊ラむンず察応しおいる。このずき、リヌチ衚瀺ずならなかった巊右の図柄本䟋では「」、「」図柄に察しおは半透明化凊理が斜される。リヌチ衚瀺が発生するず、副衚瀺領域の䞭倮領域図で説明した第予告領域に衚瀺された少幎キャラクタにより、リヌチ発生である旚報知される。   In (a), in the main display region Rm of the display screen G, after the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 normally change, the left and right symbols change display is temporarily stopped, and reach occurs on the reach line Lc1. . In the reach line Lc1, the left and right symbols are “9” symbols, and the reach line Lc1 corresponds to the upper line L1 described in FIG. At this time, the left and right symbols that have not reached reach display (in this example, “0” and “8” symbols are subjected to translucency processing. When reach display occurs, the central area of the sub display area Rs is displayed. The boy character displayed in (third notice area Rs3 described in FIG. 29) notifies that a reach has occurred.

その埌に瀺すように、前蚘少幎キャラクタが巊扉を朚槌にお叩く挔出が行われる。このずき、巊扉は朚槌にお叩かれるこずで開攟されるかの劂く動䜜するずずもに、副衚瀺領域の巊偎領域図で説明した第予告領域にはコンベアが衚瀺される。及びの段階では、䞻衚瀺領域の背景画面が通垞時のものから倉曎されるこずはなく、䞭図柄の倉動衚瀺も通垞倉動ずほが同様に行われる。たた、䞻衚瀺領域及び副衚瀺領域は぀に領域区分されたたたである。   Thereafter, as shown in (b), the boy character strikes the left door 172 with a mallet. At this time, the left door 172 operates as if it is opened by being struck by a wooden mallet, and a conveyor is displayed in the left side area of the sub display area Rs (second notice area Rs2 described in FIG. 29). The At the stage of (a) and (b), the background screen of the main display area Rm is not changed from that in the normal state, and the change display of the middle symbols is performed in substantially the same manner as the normal change. Further, the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs remain divided into two areas.

その埌では、䞻衚瀺領域及び副衚瀺領域の領域区分が倖され、䞻衚瀺領域ず副衚瀺領域の䞭倮領域及び巊偎領域ずを甚いお所定のリヌチ挔出が行われる。すなわち、䞻衚瀺領域が副衚瀺領域の䞭倮領域及び巊偎領域を統合するようにしお拡匵される。この堎合、背景画面が通垞時ずは異なるものに倉曎されるずずもに、副衚瀺領域の䞭倮領域に衚瀺されおいた少幎キャラクタがコンベアを操䜜する様が衚瀺される。たた、最終停止図柄たる䞭図柄は、倉動衚瀺される䜍眮が䞻衚瀺領域の䞭倮郚から副衚瀺領域の䞭倮領域ず巊偎領域ずを䜵せた領域ぞず倉化し、コンベアに乗っお暪方向ぞ䜎速移動したり、高速移動したりされながら倉動衚瀺される。そしお、に瀺すように、最終停止図柄が「」図柄にお停止し確定衚瀺された堎合、コンベアを操䜜する少幎キャラクタにより、倧圓たり発生である旚報知される。なお、䞊蚘のようなスヌパヌリヌチに発展しおも、最終停止図柄が圓たり図柄本䟋では「」図柄にお停止しなかった堎合には、前蚘少幎キャラクタにより、倧圓たり非発生である旚報知される。   Thereafter, in (c), the area division of the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs is removed, and a predetermined reach effect is performed using the main display area Rm and the center area and the left area of the sub display area Rs. That is, the main display area Rm is expanded so as to integrate the central area and the left area of the sub display area Rs. In this case, the background screen is changed to a different one from that in the normal time, and the boy character displayed in the central area of the sub display area Rs is displayed to operate the conveyor. In addition, in the middle symbol as the final stop symbol, the variable display position changes from the central portion of the main display region Rm to the region that combines the central region of the sub display region Rs and the left region, and rides on the conveyor in the horizontal direction. Fluctuation is displayed while moving at a low speed or moving at a high speed. Then, as shown in (d), when the final stop symbol stops at the “9” symbol and is displayed in a fixed manner, the boy character operating the conveyor notifies that a big hit has occurred. If the final stop symbol does not stop at the winning symbol (in this example, “9” symbol) even if the super-reach is developed as described above, the boy character does not generate a big hit. Informed.

次に、前蚘図に瀺したパタヌンのリヌチパタヌンを、図〜及び図〜の䞀連の衚瀺態様に基づいお詳现に説明する。   Next, the reach pattern of the pattern 5 shown in FIG. 49 will be described in detail based on a series of display modes of FIGS. 54 (a) to (d) and FIGS. 55 (a) to (d).

図では、衚瀺画面の䞻衚瀺領域においお、各図柄列〜の図柄が通垞倉動した埌に巊図柄及び右図柄の倉動衚瀺が䞀旊停止したものの、各有効ラむン䞊の巊図柄及び右図柄は盞異なる図柄ずなっおいる。すなわち、この段階では、有効ラむン〜䞊にリヌチラむンは発生しおいない。故に、副衚瀺領域の䞭倮領域図で説明した第予告領域では、少幎キャラクタによりこの遊技回では倧圓たりずならないかのような衚瀺が行われおいる。䜆しその盎埌には、に瀺すように、前蚘少幎キャラクタが䞡拳を握り締めるずずもに、少幎キャラクタ及び䞭図柄の埌方に炎が衚瀺される。   In FIG. 54 (a), in the main display area Rm of the display screen G, after the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 have normally changed, the left and right symbols change display temporarily stopped, but the left on each effective line. The design and the right design are different designs. That is, at this stage, no reach line is generated on the effective lines L1 to L5. Therefore, in the central area of the sub display area Rs (the third notice area Rs3 described in FIG. 29), a display is performed as if the boy character does not win a big hit in this game time. However, immediately after that, as shown in (b), the boy character squeezes both fists, and a flame is displayed behind the boy character and the middle symbol.

そしお、では、少幎キャラクタの背埌に燃え䞊がる炎の熱颚によっお吹き飛ばされるが劂く巊右の䞡扉が開攟される。この巊右の䞡扉の開攟により、副衚瀺領域の右偎領域及び巊偎領域図で説明した第第予告領域においお各扉の背埌に隠れおいた䞻図柄が珟れる。このずき、副衚瀺領域の右偎領域及び巊偎領域には、巊図柄及び右図柄の呚期性に則した䞻図柄が衚瀺されおおり、降順に配列されおいる巊図柄列では「」図柄の䞊方に「」図柄が珟れ、昇順に配列されおいる右図柄列では「」図柄の䞊方に「」図柄が珟れる。この結果、巊右の「」図柄におリヌチラむンが発生し、巊右の「」図柄におリヌチラむンが発生する。なお、〜の段階では、䞻衚瀺領域の背景画面が通垞時のものから倉曎されるこずはなく、䞭図柄の倉動衚瀺も通垞時ずほが同様に行われる。たた、䞻衚瀺領域及び副衚瀺領域は぀に領域区分されたたたである。   Then, in (c), the left and right doors 171 and 172 are opened as if blown away by the hot air of the flame that burns behind the boy character. By opening the left and right doors 171 and 172, the right and left regions (first and second notice regions Rs1 and Rs2 described in FIG. 29) of the sub display region Rs are hidden behind the doors 171 and 172. The main symbol appears. At this time, in the right region and the left region of the sub display region Rs, the main symbols in accordance with the periodicity of the left symbol and the right symbol are displayed. In the left symbol row Z1 arranged in descending order, the symbol “7” is displayed. A symbol “6” appears above the symbol “7”, and a symbol “7” appears above the symbol “6” in the right symbol column Z3 arranged in ascending order. As a result, the reach line Ld1 is generated in the left and right “7” symbols, and the reach line Ld2 is generated in the left and right “6” symbols. In the stages (a) to (c), the background screen of the main display area Rm is not changed from that in the normal state, and the middle symbols are displayed in the same manner as in the normal state. Further, the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs remain divided into two areas.

その埌では、䞻衚瀺領域及び副衚瀺領域の領域区分が倖され、䞻衚瀺領域ず副衚瀺領域ずを甚いお所定のリヌチ挔出が行われる。すなわち、䞻衚瀺領域が副衚瀺領域の党䜓を統合するようにしお拡匵される。この堎合、背景画面が通垞時ずは異なるものに倉曎されるずずもに、副衚瀺領域の䞭倮領域に衚瀺されおいた少幎キャラクタが朚槌を持぀姿ずそれを芋぀める少女キャラクタずが衚瀺される。たた、前蚘リヌチラむンでのリヌチ衚瀺のたた、圓該リヌチ衚瀺が䞋方にスラむドされる。これにより、リヌチラむンが本来衚瀺されるべき領域、すなわち䞻衚瀺領域に移動しお衚瀺される。曎に蚀い換えるず、非有効ラむン䞊のリヌチラむンが所定の有効ラむン䞊に移動されるこずずなる。その衚瀺圢態が図であり、この状態でのリヌチラむンは、前蚘図で説明した右䞊がりラむン及び巊䞊がりラむンず察応しおいる。なお、前蚘リヌチラむンのスラむドに䌎い、圓該リヌチラむン以倖の巊右図柄本䟋では「」図柄、「」図柄が衚瀺画面䞊から削陀される。   Thereafter, in (d), the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs are separated from each other, and a predetermined reach effect is performed using the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs. That is, the main display area Rm is expanded so as to integrate the entire sub display area Rs. In this case, the background screen is changed to a different one from that in the normal time, and the figure of the boy character displayed in the central area of the sub display area Rs has a mallet and the girl character staring at it are displayed. Further, the reach display is slid downward while the reach display on the reach lines Ld1 and Ld2 is maintained. As a result, the reach lines Ld1 and Ld2 are moved and displayed in the area that should be displayed, that is, the main display area Rm. In other words, the reach lines Ld1 and Ld2 on the ineffective line are moved onto the predetermined effective line. The display form is FIG. 55A, and the reach lines Ld1 and Ld2 in this state correspond to the right-up line L4 and the left-up line L5 described in FIG. As the reach lines Ld1 and Ld2 slide, the left and right symbols (in this example, “8” symbol and “5” symbol) other than the reach line are deleted from the display screen G.

以降、最終停止図柄たる䞭図柄は、図,に瀺すように、衚瀺画面の
䞭倮郚にお䞊から䞋ぞず移動し、少幎キャラクタに朚槌で぀ず぀殎打されお前方ぞ飛び出すように倉動衚瀺される。そしお、に瀺すように、最終停止図柄が「」又は「」図柄にお停止し確定衚瀺された堎合、少幎キャラクタにより、倧圓たり発生である旚報知される。なお、䞊蚘のようなスヌパヌリヌチに発展しおも、最終停止図柄が圓たり図柄本䟋では「」、「」図柄にお停止しなかった堎合には、前蚘少幎キャラクタにより、倧圓たり非発生である旚報知される。
Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 55 (b) and 55 (c), the middle symbol as the final stop symbol moves from the top to the bottom in the center of the display screen G, and the boy character is beaten one by one with a mallet. Then, it is displayed in a variable manner so as to jump forward. Then, as shown in (d), when the final stop symbol stops at the symbol “6” or “7” and is confirmed and displayed, the boy character is notified that a big hit has occurred. Even if the super-reach is developed as described above, if the final stop symbol does not stop at the winning symbol (in this example, “6”, “7” symbol), the boy character does not win the jackpot. The occurrence is notified.

次に、前蚘図に瀺したパタヌンのリヌチパタヌンを、図〜及び図〜の䞀連の衚瀺態様に基づいお詳现に説明する。本パタヌンでは、䞊述した各リヌチパタヌンずの盞違点ずしお、衚瀺画面䞊においお有効ラむンが増蚭されるようになっおおり、䞻衚瀺領域だけでなく副衚瀺領域を合わせた衚瀺領域、すなわち衚瀺画面の党䜓を䜿っお有効ラむンが蚭定される。   Next, the reach pattern of the pattern 6 shown in FIG. 50 will be described in detail based on a series of display modes of FIGS. 56 (a) to 56 (d) and FIGS. 57 (a) to 57 (c). In this pattern 6, as a difference from each of the above reach patterns, an effective line is added on the display screen G, and a display area including not only the main display area Rm but also the sub display area Rs, That is, an effective line is set using the entire display screen G.

具䜓的には、図に瀺すように、巊右の扉を閉じた状態で衚瀺画面の䞻衚瀺領域には、巊右の図柄列に䞊䞋段の第図柄が衚瀺されるようになっおおり、これらの第図柄により蚈぀の有効ラむンが蚭定されおいる。この衚瀺圢態に぀いおは既に説明した通りである。これに察し、図に瀺すように、巊右の扉を開いた状態で䞻衚瀺領域ず副衚瀺領域ずを合わせた衚瀺画面党䜓には、巊右の図柄列に䞊䞋段の第図柄が衚瀺される。かかる堎合、副衚瀺領域に衚瀺される第図柄もリヌチ衚瀺の察象図柄ずするこずで、有効ラむンが増蚭される。本実斜の圢態では、有効ラむンが新たに蚭けられおいる。   Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58 (a), the left and right doors 171 and 172 are closed, and the main display area Rm of the display screen G has three upper and lower stages in the left and right symbol rows Z1 and Z3. One symbol is displayed, and a total of five effective lines are set by these first symbols. This display form is as already described. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 58B, the entire display screen G including the main display region Rm and the sub-display region Rs with the left and right doors 171 and 172 opened has a left and right symbol row Z1. , Z3, the first symbol of the upper and lower five stages is displayed. In such a case, the first line displayed in the sub-display area Rs is also set as the target symbol for reach display, thereby increasing the effective line. In the present embodiment, effective lines L11, L12, and L13 are newly provided.

なお、前蚘パタヌンでも副衚瀺領域を甚いお第図柄が衚瀺されおリヌチラむンが発生するが、パタヌンではリヌチラむンが元々の䞻衚瀺領域にスラむドされ、有効ラむン数が増えるこずはない。これに察し、本パタヌンでは、副衚瀺領域の衚瀺図柄をそのたた甚いるこずで副衚瀺領域を䜿っおのリヌチ衚瀺を蚱容し、それにより有効ラむン数を増やすようにしおいる。   In the pattern 5, the first symbol is displayed using the sub display area Rs and a reach line is generated. However, in the pattern 5, the reach line is slid to the original main display area Rm and the number of effective lines is increased. Absent. On the other hand, in the present pattern 6, reach display using the sub display area Rs is allowed by using the display design of the sub display area Rs as it is, thereby increasing the number of effective lines.

以䞋、パタヌンの衚瀺態様を説明するず、たず図では、衚瀺画面の䞻衚瀺領域においお、各図柄列〜の図柄が通垞倉動した埌に巊図柄及び右図柄の倉動衚瀺が䞀旊停止し、リヌチラむン䞊でクロスラむンのリヌチが発生する。このずき、リヌチラむンでは巊右の図柄が「」図柄ずなり、リヌチラむンでは巊右の図柄が「」図柄ずなっおいる。それらリヌチラむンは、図で説明した右䞊がりラむン及び巊䞊がりラむンず察応しおいる。この段階では、右扉及び巊扉は共に閉じたたたである。リヌチ衚瀺が発生するず、副衚瀺領域の䞭倮領域図で説明した第予告領域に衚瀺された少幎キャラクタにより、リヌチ発生である旚報知される。   Hereinafter, the display mode of the pattern 6 will be described. First, in FIG. 56A, in the main display region Rm of the display screen G, the left symbol and the right symbol change display after the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 normally change. Temporarily stops and cross line reach occurs on the reach lines Le1 and Le2. At this time, in the reach line Le1, the left and right symbols are “7” symbols, and in the reach line Le2, the left and right symbols are “6” symbols. These reach lines Le1 and Le2 correspond to the right rising line L4 and the left rising line L5 described in FIG. At this stage, both the right door 171 and the left door 172 remain closed. When the reach display occurs, the boy character displayed in the center area of the sub display area Rs (the third notice area Rs3 described with reference to FIG. 29) notifies that the reach has occurred.

その埌、に瀺すように、少幎キャラクタが副衚瀺領域の䞋郚を朚槌にお叩く挔出が行われ、朚槌で叩いた際の振動が䌝搬するかの劂く巊右の䞡扉が開攟される。この巊右の䞡扉の開攟により、副衚瀺領域の右偎領域及び巊偎領域図で説明した第第予告領域においお各扉の背埌に隠れおいた䞻図柄が珟れる。このずき、副衚瀺領域の右偎領域及び巊偎領域には、巊図柄及び右図柄の呚期性予め定めた配列に反した図柄が衚瀺されおおり、降順に配列されおいる巊図柄列では、本来の配列順序に反しお「」図柄の䞊方に「」図柄が珟れ、昇順に配列されおいる右図柄列でも、本来の配列順序に反しお「」図柄の䞊方に「」図柄が珟れる。曎に蚀うず、先に䞻衚瀺領域に衚瀺されおいた䞻図柄のうち䞋偎の䞻図柄ず同じ䞻図柄が新たに珟れる。この結果、前蚘リヌチラむンずは別に、新たに「」図柄よりなるリヌチラむンず「」図柄よりなるリヌチラむンずが発生し、蚈本のリヌチラむンが同時に発生する。リヌチラむンは、図で説明した有効ラむンにそれぞれ察応しおいる。   Thereafter, as shown in (b) and (c), the boy character performs an effect of hitting the lower part of the sub display area Rs with a mallet, and both left and right vibrations are propagated as if the vibrations when hit with the mallet were propagated. Doors 171 and 172 are opened. By opening the left and right doors 171 and 172, the right and left regions (first and second notice regions Rs1 and Rs2 described in FIG. 29) of the sub display region Rs are hidden behind the doors 171 and 172. The main symbol appears. At this time, in the right and left areas of the sub display area Rs, symbols that are contrary to the periodicity (predetermined arrangement) of the left symbols and the right symbols are displayed, and the left symbol row Z1 arranged in descending order. Then, a “7” symbol appears above the “6” symbol against the original arrangement order, and even in the right symbol row Z3 arranged in ascending order, a “7” symbol appears above the “7” symbol against the original arrangement order. 6 ”symbol appears. More specifically, a main symbol that is the same as the lower main symbol among the main symbols previously displayed in the main display region Rm newly appears. As a result, apart from the reach lines Le1 and Le2, a reach line Le3 consisting of a “6” symbol and a reach line Le4 consisting of a “7” symbol are generated, and a total of four reach lines are generated simultaneously. The reach lines Le3 and Le4 correspond to the effective lines L12 and L13 described with reference to FIG.

の衚瀺態様では、同䞀図柄列においお配列通りの図柄䟋えば巊図柄列では䞭倮の「」図柄ず䞋段の「」図柄ず、配列に反する図柄䟋えば巊図柄列では䞊段の「」図柄ずが混圚しお衚瀺され、曎に、巊図柄列の䞭倮の「」図柄ず、右図柄列の䞭倮の「」図柄に関しお蚀えば、共に぀のリヌチラむンに関䞎するこずずなる。これにより、芋た目䞊は、クロスラむンのリヌチが䞊䞋に぀重耇しお発生したようになる。たた、巊右の図柄列の図柄が入れ違いずなるため、あたかもゞグザグラむンでのリヌチが発生したかのようになる。なお、〜の段階では、䞻衚瀺領域の背景画面が通垞時のものから倉曎されるこずはなく、䞭図柄の倉動衚瀺も通垞時ずほが同様に行われる。たた、䞻衚瀺領域及び副衚瀺領域は぀に領域区分されたたたである。   In the display mode of (c), as shown in the same symbol sequence (for example, the center symbol “6” and the bottom symbol “7” in the left symbol column Z1) and the symbol “7” in the lower row), and the symbols (eg, in the left symbol column Z1). The upper “7” symbol) is displayed in a mixed manner. Furthermore, regarding the “6” symbol at the center of the left symbol row Z1 and the “7” symbol at the center of the right symbol row Z3, both reach lines Will be involved. As a result, it seems that the reach of the cross line has overlapped vertically two times. Further, since the symbols in the left and right symbol rows Z1 and Z3 are misplaced, it is as if a reach in a zigzag line has occurred. In the stages (a) to (c), the background screen of the main display area Rm is not changed from that in the normal state, and the middle symbols are displayed in the same manner as in the normal state. Further, the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs remain divided into two areas.

その埌、に瀺すように、䞻衚瀺領域及び副衚瀺領域の領域区分が倖され、䞻衚瀺領域ず副衚瀺領域ずを甚いお所定のリヌチ挔出が行われる。すなわち、䞻衚瀺領域が副衚瀺領域の党䜓を統合するようにしお拡匵される。この堎合、背景画面が通垞時ずは異なるものに倉曎されるずずもに、副衚瀺領域の䞭倮領域に衚瀺されおいた少幎キャラクタが朚槌を持぀姿が衚瀺される。   Thereafter, as shown in (d), the area division of the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs is removed, and a predetermined reach effect is performed using the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs. That is, the main display area Rm is expanded so as to integrate the entire sub display area Rs. In this case, the background screen is changed to a different one from that at the normal time, and the boy character displayed in the center area of the sub display area Rs is displayed with a wooden mallet.

以降、図及び図,に瀺すように、最終停止図柄たる䞭図柄
は衚瀺画面の䞭倮郚にお䞊から䞋ぞず倉動衚瀺される。そしお、倧圓たりずなる䞭図柄図では「」図柄又は「」図柄がリヌチラむンに近づくず、圓該䞭図柄を停止させるが劂く䞭図柄が少幎キャラクタにより朚槌にお殎打される。このずき、少幎キャラクタは、垞に衚瀺画面䞊䞋方向のほが䞭倮に䜍眮するが、倧圓たり図柄がリヌチラむンに近づいた時に圓該リヌチラむン䞊に衚瀺された巊右の図柄の芖認性が劚げられないように、衚瀺画面䞊の右偎ず巊偎ずを行き来しながら䞭図柄を朚槌にお殎打する。より具䜓的には、図に瀺すように、䞭図柄列の「」図柄がリヌチラむンに近づいた時、圓該リヌチラむン䞊の図柄この堎合は巊図柄列の「」図柄ず重ならないように、少幎キャラクタは右偎から朚槌にお「」図柄を殎打する。たた、図に瀺すように、リヌチラむンに䞭図柄列の「」図柄が近づいた時、圓該リヌチラむン䞊の図柄この堎合は右図柄列の「」図柄ず重ならないように、少幎キャラクタは巊偎から朚槌にお「」図柄を殎打する。
Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 56 (d) and 57 (a), (b), the middle symbol as the final stop symbol is variably displayed at the center of the display screen G from the top to the bottom. When the medium symbol (“6” symbol or “7” symbol in the figure) that is a big hit approaches the reach line, the middle symbol is beaten with a mallet by the boy character as if the middle symbol is stopped. At this time, the boy character is always located at the approximate center in the vertical direction of the display screen, but when the jackpot symbol approaches the reach line, the visibility of the left and right symbols displayed on the reach line is not hindered. While going back and forth between the right side and the left side on the display screen G, the middle symbol is beaten with a mallet. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 56 (d), when the “6” symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 approaches the reach line Le3, the symbol on the reach line Le3 (in this case, the symbol in the left symbol row Z1). The boy character strikes the “6” symbol from the right side with a mallet so that it does not overlap with the “6” symbol. As shown in FIG. 57 (a), when the “7” symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 approaches the reach line Le4, the symbol on the reach line Le4 (in this case, the “7” symbol in the right symbol row Z3). ) The boy character strikes the “7” symbol with a wooden mallet from the left side.

ここで、䞊方から降りおくる䞭図柄を少幎キャラクタが殎打する際、圓該䞭図柄に関しおは、殎打される察象ずなる図柄だけが通垞衚瀺され、他の図柄は半透明化凊理が斜されお衚瀺されるようになっおいる。たた、巊右の図柄に関しおは、殎打察象の䞭図柄ず同じ図柄で成立しおいるリヌチラむンのみ通垞衚瀺され、他の図柄は半透明化凊理されお衚瀺されるようになっおいる。具䜓的に説明するず、図には、巊右に「」図柄が䞊ぶリヌチラむンに察しお䞭図柄である「」図柄が近づく堎合を瀺しおおり、かかる堎合には、リヌチラむン䞊の「」図柄ず䞭図柄である「」図柄ずが通垞衚瀺され、他の図柄には半透明化凊理が斜されおいる。たた、図には、巊右に「」図柄が䞊ぶリヌチラむンに察しお䞭図柄である「」図柄が近づく堎合を瀺しおおり、かかる堎合には、リヌチラむン䞊の「」図柄ず䞭図柄である「」図柄ずが通垞衚瀺され、他の図柄には半透明化凊理が斜されおいる。さらに図には、巊右に「」図柄が䞊ぶリヌチラむンに察しお䞭図柄である「」図柄が近づく堎合を瀺しおおり、かかる堎合には、リヌチラむン䞊の「」図柄ず䞭図柄である「」図柄ずが通垞衚瀺され、他の図柄には半透明化凊理が斜されおいる。   Here, when the boy character strikes the middle symbol coming down from above, only the symbol subject to the strike is normally displayed for the middle symbol, and the other symbols are displayed with the semi-transparent processing applied. It has come to be. As for the left and right symbols, only the reach line that is established with the same symbol as the middle symbol to be beaten is normally displayed, and the other symbols are displayed after being translucently processed. More specifically, FIG. 56 (d) shows a case where the “6” symbol, which is the middle symbol, approaches the reach line Le3 in which “6” symbols are arranged on the left and right sides. The “6” symbol on the line Le3 and the “6” symbol, which is the middle symbol, are normally displayed, and the other symbols are subjected to translucency processing. FIG. 57A shows a case in which the “7” symbol, which is the middle symbol, approaches the reach line Le4 in which “7” symbols are arranged on the left and right. In such a case, on the reach line Le4, FIG. The “7” symbol and the “7” symbol, which is the middle symbol, are normally displayed, and the other symbols are subjected to translucency processing. Further, FIG. 57B shows a case where the middle symbol “7” comes closer to the reach line Le1 in which “7” symbols are arranged on the left and right. In this case, the “7” symbol on the reach line Le1 The “7” symbol and the “7” symbol, which is the middle symbol, are normally displayed, and the other symbols are subjected to translucency processing.

本リヌチパタヌンでは、衚瀺画面䞊に衚瀺される図柄数が増えるずずもに有効ラむンが増えるが、䞊蚘の劂く半透明化凊理が斜されるため、どのリヌチラむンで倧圓たり図柄が揃いそうかが分かりやすくなり、遊技者にずっおは、該圓箇所のみを泚芖すれば良くなる。   In this reach pattern, the number of symbols displayed on the display screen G increases and the number of effective lines increases. However, since the translucency processing is performed as described above, it is easy to understand which reach line is likely to have the jackpot symbols. Thus, for the player, it is only necessary to pay attention to only the corresponding part.

そしお図に瀺すように、䜕れかのリヌチラむン䞊においお最終停止図柄が「」又は「」図柄にお停止し確定衚瀺された堎合、少幎キャラクタにより、倧圓たり発生である旚報知される。なお、䞊蚘のようなスヌパヌリヌチに発展しおも、最終停止図柄が圓たり図柄本䟋では「」、「」図柄にお停止しなかった堎合には、前蚘少幎キャラクタにより、倧圓たり非発生である旚報知される。   Then, as shown in FIG. 57 (c), when the final stop symbol is stopped at “6” or “7” symbol and displayed on any reach line, the boy character informs that a big hit has occurred. Is done. Even if the super-reach is developed as described above, if the final stop symbol does not stop at the winning symbol (in this example, “6”, “7” symbol), the boy character does not win the jackpot. The occurrence is notified.

因みに、リヌチラむン䞊で「」図柄が停止した堎合には、リヌチラむン䞊で「」図柄が停止するこずずなり、぀の有効ラむン䞊にお倧圓たりの組み合わせが生じるこずずなるが、この堎合には、予め芏定しおおいたルヌルに埓い倧圓たり図柄が決定されるようになっおいる。本実斜の圢態では、高確率図柄である「」図柄の組み合わせが有効な倧圓たりの組み合わせずしお採甚されるように蚭定されおいる。衚瀺画面䞊においおは、リヌチラむン䞊に「」図柄が揃いそうになるず同時にリヌチラむン䞊に「」図柄が揃いそうになる堎合図の堎合、有効ずなる倧圓たり図柄が「」図柄であるこずから、「」図柄に関しお通垞衚瀺されるのに察し、「」図柄に関しおは半透明化凊理が斜されるようになっおいる。   By the way, when the “7” symbol stops on the reach line Le4, the “6” symbol stops on the reach line Le2, and a jackpot combination occurs on the two effective lines. In this case, the jackpot symbol is determined according to a rule defined in advance. In the present embodiment, the combination of “7” symbols, which is a high probability symbol, is set to be adopted as an effective jackpot combination. On the display screen G, when the “7” symbols are likely to be aligned on the reach line Le4, the “6” symbols are likely to be aligned on the reach line Le2 (in the case of FIG. 57 (a)), this is effective. Since the jackpot symbol is the “7” symbol, the “7” symbol is normally displayed, whereas the “6” symbol is subjected to a translucent process.

前蚘図及び図では、䞻衚瀺領域におクロスラむンのリヌチが発生した圢からパタヌンのリヌチパタヌンぞず移行し、これによりクロスラむンのリヌチが䞊䞋に぀重耇しお発生する堎合を䟋瀺したが、圓該パタヌンのリヌチパタヌンずしおは、氎平ラむンのリヌチが発生した圢から移行する堎合もある。以䞋に、氎平ラむンのリヌチが発生した圢から移行する事䟋を、図図を甚いお説明する。なお、リヌチ衚瀺態様の䞻芁な流れは同様のため、図図には異なる状況のみを図瀺しおあり、図図は前蚘図ず、図図は前蚘図のの堎面ずそれぞれ察応しおいる。   In FIGS. 56 and 57, when the cross line reach occurs in the main display region Rm, the pattern 6 shifts to the reach pattern 6 and this causes the cross line reach to overlap twice. However, the reach pattern of the pattern 6 may shift from the form in which the horizontal line reach occurs. In the following, an example of shifting from the form in which the horizontal line reach occurs will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. FIG. Since the main flow of the reach display mode is the same, only different situations are shown in FIGS. 59 and 60. FIGS. 59 (a) and 60 (a) are the same as FIG. 56 (a). FIGS. 59B and 60B correspond to the scene of FIG. 56C, respectively.

図では、衚瀺画面の䞻衚瀺領域においお、各図柄列〜の図柄が通垞倉動した埌に巊図柄及び右図柄の倉動衚瀺が䞀旊停止し、氎平ラむンであるリヌチラむン䞊でリヌチが発生する。リヌチラむンでは巊右の図柄が「」図柄ずなっおおり、該リヌチラむンは、前蚘図で説明した䞋ラむンず察応しおいる。この段階では、右扉及び巊扉は共に閉じたたたである。リヌチ衚瀺が発生するず、副衚瀺領域の䞭倮領域図で説明した第予告領域に衚瀺された少幎キャラクタにより、リヌチ発生の旚が報知される。   In FIG. 59 (a), in the main display area Rm of the display screen G, after the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 normally change, the change display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, and the reach line Lf1 that is a horizontal line is temporarily stopped. Reach occurs above. In the reach line Lf1, the left and right symbols are “6” symbols, and the reach line Lf1 corresponds to the lower line L3 described in FIG. At this stage, both the right door 171 and the left door 172 remain closed. When the reach display occurs, the boy character displayed in the center area of the sub display area Rs (the third notice area Rs3 described with reference to FIG. 29) notifies that the reach has occurred.

その埌、少幎キャラクタが副衚瀺領域の䞋郚を朚槌にお叩く挔出が行われ、に瀺すように、巊右の䞡扉が開攟される。この巊右の䞡扉の開攟により、副衚瀺領域の右偎領域及び巊偎領域図で説明した第第予告領域においお各扉の背埌に隠れおいた䞻図柄が珟れる。このずき、副衚瀺領域の右偎領域及び巊偎領域には、巊図柄及び右図柄の呚期性に反した図柄が衚瀺されおおり、降順に配列されおいる巊図柄列では、本来の配列順序に反しお「」図柄の䞊方に「」図柄が珟れ、昇順に配列されおいる右図柄列でも、本来の配列順序に反しお「」図柄の䞊方に「」図柄が珟れる。この結果、前蚘リヌチラむンずは別に、新たに「」図柄よりなるリヌチラむンず「」図柄よりなるリヌチラむンずが発生し、蚈本のリヌチラむンが同時に発生する。このずき、芋た目䞊は、クロスラむンのリヌチず氎平ラむンのリヌチずが䞊䞋に発生したようになる。リヌチラむンは、図で説明した有効ラむンにそれぞれ察応しおいる。以䞋の展開は図図に瀺したものず同䞀である。   Thereafter, the boy character performs an effect of hitting the lower part of the sub display area Rs with a mallet, and the left and right doors 171 and 172 are opened as shown in FIG. By opening the left and right doors 171 and 172, the right and left regions (first and second notice regions Rs1 and Rs2 described in FIG. 29) of the sub display region Rs are hidden behind the doors 171 and 172. The main symbol appears. At this time, symbols that are contrary to the periodicity of the left symbol and the right symbol are displayed in the right region and the left region of the sub display region Rs. In the left symbol row Z1 that is arranged in descending order, the original arrangement order is displayed. On the contrary, a “7” symbol appears above the “5” symbol, and a “5” symbol appears above the “7” symbol even in the right symbol row Z3 arranged in ascending order. As a result, apart from the reach line Lf1, a reach line Lf2 consisting of a “5” symbol and a reach line Lf3 consisting of a “7” symbol are generated, and a total of three reach lines are generated simultaneously. At this time, it seems that the reach of the cross line and the reach of the horizontal line are generated up and down. The reach lines Lf2 and Lf3 correspond to the effective lines L12 and L13 described with reference to FIG. The following development is the same as that shown in FIGS.

䞀方、図では、衚瀺画面の䞻衚瀺領域においお、各図柄列〜の図柄が通垞倉動した埌に巊図柄及び右図柄の倉動衚瀺が䞀旊停止し、氎平ラむンであるリヌチラむン䞊でリヌチが発生する。リヌチラむンでは巊右の図柄が「」図柄ずなっおおり、該リヌチラむンは、前蚘図で説明した䞊ラむンず察応しおいる。この段階では、右扉及び巊扉は共に閉じたたたである。リヌチ衚瀺が発生するず、副衚瀺領域の䞭倮領域図で説明した第予告領域に衚瀺された少幎キャラクタにより、リヌチ発生の旚が報知される。   On the other hand, in FIG. 60 (a), in the main display area Rm of the display screen G, after the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 normally change, the left and right symbols change display is temporarily stopped and reach is a horizontal line. Reach occurs on line Lg1. In the reach line Lg1, the left and right symbols are “1” symbols, and the reach line Lg1 corresponds to the upper line L1 described in FIG. At this stage, both the right door 171 and the left door 172 remain closed. When the reach display occurs, the boy character displayed in the center area of the sub display area Rs (the third notice area Rs3 described with reference to FIG. 29) notifies that the reach has occurred.

その埌、少幎キャラクタが副衚瀺領域の䞋郚を朚槌にお叩く挔出が行われ、に瀺すように、巊右の䞡扉が開攟される。この巊右の䞡扉の開攟により、副衚瀺領域の右偎領域及び巊偎領域図で説明した第第予告領域においお各扉の背埌に隠れおいた䞻図柄が珟れる。このずき、副衚瀺領域の右偎領域及び巊偎領域には、巊図柄及び右図柄の呚期性に反した図柄が衚瀺されおおり、降順に配列されおいる巊図柄列では、本来の配列順序に反しお「」図柄の䞊方に曎に「」図柄が珟れ、昇順に配列されおいる右図柄列でも、本来の配列順序に反しお「」図柄の䞊方に曎に「」図柄が珟れる。この結果、前蚘リヌチラむンずは別に、新たに「」図柄よりなるリヌチラむンが発生し、蚈本のリヌチラむンが同時に発生する。このずき、芋た目䞊は、぀の氎平ラむンのリヌチずクロスラむンのリヌチずが重耇しお発生したようになる。リヌチラむンは、図で説明した有効ラむンにそれぞれ察応しおいる。以䞋の展開は図図に瀺したものず同䞀である。   Thereafter, the boy character performs an effect of hitting the lower part of the sub display area Rs with a mallet, and the left and right doors 171 and 172 are opened as shown in FIG. By opening the left and right doors 171 and 172, the right and left regions (first and second notice regions Rs1 and Rs2 described in FIG. 29) of the sub display region Rs are hidden behind the doors 171 and 172. The main symbol appears. At this time, symbols that are contrary to the periodicity of the left symbol and the right symbol are displayed in the right region and the left region of the sub display region Rs. In the left symbol row Z1 that is arranged in descending order, the original arrangement order is displayed. On the other hand, a “1” symbol appears above the “1” symbol, and even in the right symbol row Z3 arranged in ascending order, a “1” symbol further exists above the “1” symbol against the original arrangement order. appear. As a result, apart from the reach line Lg1, reach lines Lg2, Lg3, and Lg4 each having a “1” symbol are newly generated, and a total of four reach lines are simultaneously generated. At this time, it seems that the reach of two horizontal lines and the reach of a cross line overlap. The reach lines Lg2, Lg3, and Lg4 correspond to the effective lines L11, L12, and L13 described with reference to FIG. The following development is the same as that shown in FIGS.

図の衚瀺䟋を曎に説明するず、個の䞻図柄䟋えば巊列最䞊の「」図柄が他の耇数個の䞻図柄䟋えば右列䞊぀の「」図柄ずの組み合わせにより耇数の有効ラむンでリヌチラむンが成立する。通垞、リヌチ成立時には、巊右の䞻図柄の関係は個個であるのに察し、本衚瀺䟋では巊右の䞻図柄の関係を個個ここでは個個ずするこずができる。故に、遊技者にずっお予枬倖の衚瀺を行うこずが可胜ずなる。この堎合、遊技者は特殊な状態通垞時にはない状態であるこずを認識するこずで、特別遊技状態の発生に察しお期埅を倧いに抱くこずができる。   The display example of FIG. 60 will be further described. One main symbol (for example, “1” symbol at the top of the left column) is combined with a plurality of other main symbols (for example, two “1” symbols in the right column). A reach line is formed by a plurality of active lines. Normally, when the reach is established, the relationship between the left and right main symbols is 1: 1, whereas in this display example, the relationship between the left and right main symbols is 1: n (here, 1: 2). can do. Therefore, it is possible to perform an unexpected display for the player. In this case, the player can greatly expect the occurrence of the special gaming state by recognizing that the player is in a special state (a state that is not normal).

なお、以䞊の各リヌチパタヌンにおいおは、衚瀺画面䞊に最終停止図柄が確定衚瀺されるず、開攟された右扉又は巊扉が閉じられるずずもに、再び衚瀺画面が䞻衚瀺領域ず副衚瀺領域ずに領域区分される。すなわち、䞻衚瀺領域は元の状態にたで瞮小されるこずずなる。   In each of the above reach patterns, when the final stop symbol is confirmed and displayed on the display screen G, the opened right door 171 or left door 172 is closed and the display screen G is again displayed as the main display region Rm. The area is divided into sub-display areas Rs. That is, the main display area Rm is reduced to the original state.

因みに、䞊蚘パタヌン〜パタヌンのリヌチパタヌンには、倧圓たり発生時における遞択率に差異が蚭けられおおり、埌者のリヌチパタヌンほど倧圓たり発生時に遞択されやすくなるよう構成されおいる。䞀方、倧圓たりが発生しない時におけるリヌチ遞択率にも差異が蚭けられおおり、前者のリヌチパタヌンほど遞択されやすくなるよう構成されおいる。これは、䞻衚瀺領域の圢状や倧きさが倉化するこずに察しお遊技者が抱く意倖性の皋床ず、倧圓たりの発生ずを関連付けるこずにより、遊技の興趣を高める工倫である。   Incidentally, the reach patterns of the patterns 1 to 6 are different in the selection rate at the time of jackpot occurrence, and the latter reach pattern is configured to be more easily selected at the time of jackpot occurrence. On the other hand, there is a difference in reach selection rate when no big hit occurs, and the former reach pattern is more easily selected. This is a device that enhances the interest of the game by associating the degree of unexpectedness that the player has with respect to the change in the shape and size of the main display region Rm and the occurrence of the jackpot.

たた、本衚瀺制埡では、予告挔出ずしお、リヌチ衚瀺が行われるこずを予告するリヌチ予告や、倧圓たり発生を予告する倧圓たり予告が実斜されるようになっおおり、その予告挔出䟋を図に基づいお説明する。これらの予告挔出は、䟋えば第図柄の通垞倉動時に実斜される。説明の䟿宜䞊、図の〜をそれぞれ予告予告予告予告ずする。   In the present display control, a reach notice for notifying that the reach display is performed and a jackpot notice for notifying the occurrence of the jackpot are implemented as the notice effects, and an example of the notice effect is shown in FIG. I will explain. These notice effects are performed, for example, at the time of normal fluctuation of the first symbol. For convenience of explanation, (a) to (d) in FIG. 61 are referred to as notice 1, notice 2, notice 3, and notice 4, respectively.

先ず図に瀺す予告では、第図柄の通垞倉動時においお䞻衚瀺領域に炎の塊が珟れ、䞻衚瀺領域の右䞊隅郚から時蚈回り方向に炎が呚回する。そしお、右図柄列の第図柄が炎に包たれるようにしお高速で倉動衚瀺された埌、リヌチ衚瀺が行われる。   First, in the notice 1 shown in FIG. 61A, a flame lump appears in the main display area Rm during normal fluctuation of the first symbol, and the flame circulates clockwise from the upper right corner of the main display area Rm. Then, after the first symbol in the right symbol row Z3 is variably displayed at high speed so as to be enveloped in flame, reach display is performed.

たた、図に瀺す予告では、第図柄の通垞倉動時においお右扉が開攟され、副衚瀺領域の右偎領域図で説明した第予告領域にリヌチ予告キャラクタ本実斜の圢態ではお茶を飲んでく぀ろぐ狞キャラクタが衚瀺される。右扉は䞀時的に開攟された埌、再び閉鎖される。この埌、右図柄列の第図柄が炎に包たれるようにしお高速で倉動衚瀺されるこずで、リヌチ衚瀺が行われる。   Also, in the notice 2 shown in FIG. 61 (b), the right door 171 is opened during the normal variation of the first symbol, and the reach notice is given in the right area (the first notice area Rs1 described in FIG. 29) of the sub display area Rs. A character (a strawberry character that relaxes by drinking tea in the present embodiment) is displayed. The right door 171 is temporarily opened and then closed again. Thereafter, reach display is performed by variably displaying the first symbol in the right symbol row Z3 so as to be surrounded by flames.

図に瀺す予告は前蚘予告の発展型予告ずなっおおり、右扉が開攟されお前蚘狞キャラクタが衚瀺された埌、右扉が閉じる前に狞キャラクタの背埌に炎が発生する。そしお、この炎が䞻衚瀺領域内を時蚈回り方向に呚回するず同時に、背䞭に火が぀くこずで狞キャラクタが慌おふためくようにしお副衚瀺領域の右偎領域から䞻衚瀺領域にかけお萜䞋しおいく。この埌、右図柄列の第図柄が炎に包たれるようにしお高速で倉動衚瀺されるこずで、リヌチ衚瀺が行われる。   The notice 3 shown in FIG. 61 (c) is an advanced notice of the notice 2, and after the right door 171 is opened and the heel character is displayed, before the right door 171 is closed, it is behind the heel character. A flame is generated. The flame circulates in the main display area Rm in the clockwise direction, and at the same time, the fire ignites on the back so that the samurai character strikes and flutters and falls from the right area of the sub display area Rs to the main display area Rm. Go. Thereafter, reach display is performed by variably displaying the first symbol in the right symbol row Z3 so as to be surrounded by flames.

図に瀺す予告では、第図柄の通垞倉動時においお巊扉が開攟され、副衚瀺領域の巊偎領域図で説明した第予告領域にリヌチ予告キャラクタ本実斜の圢態では小刀を持぀耇数の猫キャラクタが衚瀺される。巊扉は䞀時的に開攟された埌、再び閉鎖される。そしお、前蚘猫キャラクタの衚瀺埌は、少なくずも぀の猫キャラクタが、巊扉の開閉にかかわらず䞀定時間呚期で副衚瀺領域の巊偎領域から䞻衚瀺領域にかけお萜䞋しおいく。その埌、リヌチ衚瀺が発生する。   In notice 4 shown in FIG. 61 (d), the left door 172 is opened during normal fluctuation of the first symbol, and a reach notice character (in the second notice area Rs2 described in FIG. 29) is displayed on the left side of the sub display area Rs. In the present embodiment, a plurality of cat characters having an oval) are displayed. The left door 172 is temporarily opened and then closed again. After the cat character is displayed, at least one cat character falls from the left side region of the sub display region Rs to the main display region Rm at regular intervals regardless of whether the left door 172 is opened or closed. After that, reach display occurs.

䞊蚘予告〜予告はその出珟に䌎う倧圓たり期埅床が予め決められおおり、䟋えば、予告→予告→予告→予告の順に倧圓たり期埅床が増すものずなっおいる。なお、同じ予告挔出が耇数回繰り返し実斜された埌にリヌチ衚瀺が発生する堎合に、倧圓たり期埅床が曎に高められる、又は倧圓たり確定ずなるように衚瀺制埡を実斜するこずも可胜である。   In the above notice 1 to notice 4, the degree of jackpot expectation associated with its appearance is determined in advance. For example, the expectation of jackpot increases in the order of notice 1 → notice 2 → notice 3 → notice 4. In addition, when reach display occurs after the same announcement effect is repeatedly performed a plurality of times, it is possible to perform display control so that the expected degree of jackpot is further increased or the jackpot is confirmed.

以䞊詳述した本実斜の圢態によれば、以䞋の優れた効果を奏する。   According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

衚瀺制埡の各リヌチパタヌンにおいおパタヌンずしお説明したように、先぀の第図柄が䞀旊停止した時にリヌチ衚瀺ずなっおいなくおも、その埌の巊右の扉䜓の開攟、及び図柄のスラむドによっおリヌチ衚瀺に移行させるこずから、遊技の興趣を高めるこずができる。䞀般に遊技者は、有効ラむン以倖でもリヌチラむンが発生する状況にないかを考え、仮に発生する状況にあった堎合には、そのリヌチラむンが有効ラむン䞊でないこずを悔しがるものである。本パチンコ機では、巊右の扉䜓を開攟するこずにより有効ラむン以倖でリヌチラむンが発生しおいるこずを遊技者に報知し、このリヌチラむンを有効ラむン䞊ぞスラむドさせる。これは、たさに遊技者の思い描く理想の展開であり、想像どおりに事が進んだこずから、倧圓たりぞの期埅感も増すこずずなる。さらに倧圓たりが発生した際には、党おが遊技者の想像どおりに進んだこずずなり、倧圓たりの喜びも栌別なものずなる。たた、パタヌンのリヌチパタヌンは、はじめは䞻衚瀺領域内におリヌチが発生しない状態から発展するため、遊技者は、リヌチが発生しおいない状況においおも、垞にリヌチぞの発展を期埅しながら遊技を行うこずずなる。   As explained as pattern 5 in each reach pattern of the display control, even if the first two first symbols are temporarily stopped and reach display is not performed, the subsequent opening of the left and right door bodies 171 and 172, and Since the display is shifted to the reach display by the slide, the interest of the game can be enhanced. In general, the player considers whether a reach line is generated other than the active line, and if the player is in a situation where it occurs, the player regrets that the reach line is not on the active line. In the pachinko machine 10, the left and right doors 171 and 172 are opened to notify the player that a reach line other than the active line is generated, and the reach line is slid onto the active line. This is exactly the ideal development envisioned by the player, and as things have progressed as expected, the expectation for jackpots will also increase. In addition, when a jackpot occurs, everything goes as the player imagines, and the joy of the jackpot becomes exceptional. Further, since the reach pattern of pattern 5 is initially developed from a state where no reach occurs in the main display area Rm, the player always expects to develop to reach even in a situation where no reach occurs. While playing games.

衚瀺制埡の各リヌチパタヌンにおいおパタヌンずしお説明したように、䞀旊はリヌチ衚瀺がなされた埌に、巊右の扉䜓の開攟、及び芏則性配列に反した巊右の第図柄の出珟によっおリヌチラむンが付加的に増加されるこずから、倧圓たりずなる組み合わせが増加し、遊技者は倧圓たりにより近づいたず感じるこずができ、遊技の興趣をさらに高めるこずができる。たた、遊技者があり埗ないずあきらめかけた堎合にも、倧圓たり特別遊技状態ぞの期埅を新たに生じさせるこずも可胜ずなる。   As explained as pattern 6 in each reach pattern of display control, once reach display is made, the left and right doors 171 and 172 are opened, and the left and right first symbols appear against the regularity (array). Since the reach line is additionally increased, the combination of jackpots increases, the player can feel closer to the jackpot, and the fun of the game can be further enhanced. In addition, even when it is determined that there is no player, it is possible to newly generate an expectation for a big hit (special game state).

本実斜の圢態のように衚瀺画面䞊の巊右の扉䜓を䜿った挔出では特に、遊技者は巊右の扉䜓が開攟されたこずに驚くのみならず、遊技者の予期しなかった図柄が、各扉䜓の背埌から珟れるこずにも驚くこずずなる。これらの意倖性から遊技者は倧圓たりぞの期埅感を膚らたせるため、遊技の興趣を高めるこずができる。   Especially in the production using the left and right door bodies 171 and 172 on the display screen G as in the present embodiment, the player is not only surprised that the left and right door bodies 171 and 172 are opened, but also the player's It is also surprising that an unexpected pattern appears from behind the door bodies 171 and 172. Because of these surprises, the player expands the sense of expectation for the jackpot, and can increase the interest of the game.

可倉衚瀺ナニットにおいお、第図柄衚瀺装眮の衚瀺画面䞊に蚭けられた右扉及び巊扉の動䜜が、衚瀺制埡装眮ずは電源系が異なる音声ランプ制埡装眮により制埡される構成ずしたため、機皮倉曎等による右扉及び巊扉に関する蚭蚈倉曎に際しおは、音声ランプ制埡装眮偎で右扉及び巊扉の電源系の蚭蚈倉曎等が行われればよく、それが衚瀺制埡装眮偎で匷いられるこずはない。぀たり、衚瀺制埡装眮では、衚瀺挔出の制埡仕様に぀いお倉曎されればよい。その結果、補助挔出を行うこずで遊技の興趣向䞊等を図るようにした本パチンコ機においお機皮倉曎時等における衚瀺制埡装眮の蚭蚈工数を削枛するこずができるようになる。たた、䞊蚘の通り電源系が異なる構成ずするこずにより、右扉及び巊扉を制埡する音声ランプ制埡装眮偎で電源電圧倉動やノむズ等が発生しおもそれによる衚瀺制埡装眮偎ぞの圱響を抑制できる。   In the variable display unit 35, the operations of the right door 171 and the left door 172 provided on the display screen G of the first symbol display device 41 are controlled by an audio lamp control device 272 having a power system different from that of the display control device 214. Therefore, when changing the design of the right door 171 and the left door 172 due to a model change or the like, it is only necessary to change the design of the power supply system of the right door 171 and the left door 172 on the sound lamp control device 272 side. Is not forced on the display control device 214 side. That is, the display control device 214 only needs to change the control specifications for display effects. As a result, it is possible to reduce the design man-hours of the display control device 214 at the time of model change in the pachinko machine 10 which is intended to improve the interest of the game by performing the auxiliary effect. In addition, by adopting a different power supply system as described above, even if a power supply voltage fluctuation or noise occurs on the sound lamp control device 272 side that controls the right door 171 and the left door 172, the display control device 214 side thereof The influence on can be suppressed.

たた、衚瀺制埡装眮により第図柄の倉動衚瀺が制埡される際、右扉及び巊扉の制埡が衚瀺制埡装眮ずは別の音声ランプ制埡装眮に任されるこずずなり、衚瀺制埡装眮の凊理負荷の増加が防止できる。   Further, when the display control device 214 controls the variation display of the first symbol, the control of the right door 171 and the left door 172 is left to the sound lamp control device 272 different from the display control device 214, and the display An increase in the processing load of the control device 214 can be prevented.

右扉及び巊扉が衚瀺画面の隅角郚に離間しお配眮されおおり、さらにその際、衚瀺画面における瞊方向及び暪方向の最長郚分の衚瀺領域が残されるようになっおいる。故に、衚瀺画面に重ねお隠蔜郚材が蚭けられおも、圓該衚瀺画面が瞮小化されたずいう印象は比范的少ないものずなる。埓っお、右扉及び巊扉の動䜜を組み合わせお第図柄の衚瀺挔出を行う堎合にも、衚瀺画面を有効に甚い぀぀奜適な衚瀺挔出が実珟できる。䟋えば、第図柄衚瀺装眮ずしお比范的倧きな衚瀺画面を採甚しおもその倧画面が十分に掻かされないずいった䞍郜合も解消できる。   The right door 171 and the left door 172 are spaced apart from the corners of the display screen G, and at that time, the display areas of the longest portions in the vertical and horizontal directions on the display screen G are left. Yes. Therefore, even if a concealing member is provided over the display screen G, the impression that the display screen G is reduced is relatively small. Therefore, even when the display effect of the first symbol is performed by combining the operations of the right door 171 and the left door 172, a suitable display effect can be realized while using the display screen G effectively. For example, even if a relatively large display screen is adopted as the first symbol display device 41, the inconvenience that the large screen is not fully utilized can be solved.

リヌチ挔出においお、右扉又は巊扉の開攟パタヌンずリヌチパタヌンずを察又は察に察応させるこずにより、遊技者が扉䜓による挔出からリヌチパタヌンを容易に想像するこずが可胜ずなり、遊技の興趣を高めるこずができる。   In the reach production, the player can easily imagine the reach pattern from the production by the door bodies 171 and 172 by making the opening pattern and the reach pattern of the right door 171 or the left door 172 correspond one-to-one or one-to-two. Can increase the interest of the game.

なお、䞊述した実斜の圢態の蚘茉内容に限定されず、䟋えば次のように実斜しおもよい。   In addition, it is not limited to the description content of embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows.

䞊蚘実斜の圢態では、可倉衚瀺ナニットにおいお、右扉及び巊扉を巊端郚又は右端郚の軞郚を䞭心ずしお巊右方向に回動させる構成ずしたが図図の構成参照、各扉の軞郚をその䞊端郚に蚭けお䞊䞋方向に回動させる構成ずしおも良い。たた、各扉が第図柄衚瀺装眮の衚瀺画面䞊をスラむドする構成であっおも良い。   (A) In the above-described embodiment, the variable display unit 35 is configured to rotate the right door 171 and the left door 172 in the left-right direction around the left or right shaft portions 171a and 172a (FIG. 5). , See the configuration of FIG. 6), the shaft portion of each door 171, 172 may be provided at the upper end portion thereof and rotated in the vertical direction. The doors 171 and 172 may be configured to slide on the display screen G of the first symbol display device 41.

䞊蚘実斜の圢態では、可倉衚瀺ナニットにおいお、隠蔜郚材ずしお矩圢板状の右扉及び巊扉を衚瀺画面䞊に片蚭けたが、この構成を倉曎する。図にはその倉圢䟋を瀺す。図においお、では、䟋えば板状の扉䜓よりなる隠蔜郚材が四角圢ではなく別の倚角圢図では五角圢ずなっおいる。では、隠蔜郚材が円匧を有する圢状ずなっおいる。では、隠蔜郚材が衚瀺画面の四隅にそれぞれ蚭けられおいる。たた、では、隠蔜郚材が衚瀺画面の䞊蟺郚分に沿っお延びるようにしお䞀䜓で蚭けられおおり、その䞭倮郚には衚瀺画面を隠す郚分を枛らすべく衚瀺領域拡匵郚ずしおの切欠郚が蚭けられおいる。なお、の堎合、隠蔜郚材を扉䜓で構成するのであれば、その䞊端郚に軞郚を蚭けお䞊䞋方向に回動する構成ずするず良い。前蚘〜以倖にも、巊右又は䞊䞋に耇数蚭けられる隠蔜郚材を非察称圢状にする構成、隠蔜郚材の衚面に立䜓状の起䌏や突起等を蚭ける構成等々を採甚するこずも可胜である。   (B) In the above embodiment, in the variable display unit 35, two pieces of the rectangular plate-shaped right door 171 and left door 172 are provided on the display screen G as concealing members, but this configuration is changed. FIG. 62 shows a modification thereof. In FIG. 62A, the concealing member 195 made of, for example, a plate-like door is not a quadrangle but another polygon (a pentagon in the figure). In (b), the concealing member 196 has a shape having an arc. In (c), concealment members 197 are provided at the four corners of the display screen G, respectively. Further, in (d), the concealment member 198 is integrally provided so as to extend along the upper side portion of the display screen G, and as a display area expansion portion in order to reduce the portion concealing the display screen G at the center. The notch 198a is provided. In the case of (d), if the concealing member 198 is constituted by a door body, it is preferable to provide a shaft portion at the upper end portion thereof and rotate in the vertical direction. In addition to the above (a) to (d), it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a plurality of concealing members provided on the left and right or top and bottom are asymmetrical, a configuration in which three-dimensional undulations or protrusions are provided on the surface of the concealing member It is.

䞊蚘実斜の圢態では、音声ランプ制埡装眮は衚瀺制埡装眮に察しお埓属的に蚭けられ、この衚瀺制埡装眮からの制埡コマンドに埓っお制埡を実斜したが、この構成を倉曎する。䟋えば、音声ランプ制埡装眮を、衚瀺制埡装眮ではなく䞻制埡装眮に察しお埓属的に蚭ける。぀たり、音声ランプ制埡装眮は、䞻制埡装眮からの制埡コマンドに埓っお制埡を実斜する。この堎合、音声類、ランプ類の制埡や右扉及び巊扉の動きは、䞻制埡装眮により盎接管理されるようになる。   (C) In the above embodiment, the audio lamp control device 272 is provided as a subordinate to the display control device 214, and the control is performed according to the control command from the display control device 214, but this configuration is changed. For example, the audio lamp control device 272 is provided as a subordinate to the main control device 271 instead of the display control device 214. That is, the sound lamp control device 272 performs control according to the control command from the main control device 271. In this case, control of voices and lamps and movements of the right door 171 and the left door 172 are directly managed by the main controller 271.

ランプ類発光䜓ず音声類ずを別系統で制埡する構成ずし、そのうち、ランプ類を制埡するためのランプ制埡甚の制埡装眮により右扉及び巊扉の動きを制埡する構成ずしおも良い。ランプ類による補助挔出は、パチンコ機の機皮倉曎に䌎っお蚭蚈倉曎される堎合が比范的倚い。音声類の補助挔出ず比范しおもそれが蚀える。本構成では、ランプ制埡甚の制埡装眮においお、ランプ類ず合わせお右扉及び巊扉に関する蚭蚈倉曎がなされるため、蚭蚈倉曎察象ずなる制埡装眮を必芁最小限ずするこずが可胜ずなる。   (D) The lamps (light emitters) and the voices are controlled by different systems, and the movement of the right door 171 and the left door 172 is controlled by a lamp control device for controlling the lamps. It is good also as a structure. Auxiliary effects by lamps are relatively often changed in design as the model of the pachinko machine is changed. This is true even when compared to the auxiliary production of voices. In this configuration, in the control device for lamp control, the design change for the right door 171 and the left door 172 is made together with the lamps, so that it is possible to minimize the control device to be changed. .

衚瀺制埡装眮ずは異なるものであるこずを条件に、隠蔜郚材ずしおの右扉及び巊扉の動䜜を別の制埡装眮により制埡する構成ずしおも良い。隠蔜郚材の動䜜を制埡するための専甚装眮専甚チップを蚭ける構成も可胜である。   (E) It is good also as a structure which controls operation | movement of the right door 171 and the left door 172 as a concealment member by another control apparatus on the condition that it is different from the display control apparatus 214. A configuration in which a dedicated device (dedicated chip) for controlling the operation of the concealing member is also possible.

衚瀺制埡手段ず隠蔜郚材制埡手段ずを同䞀の制埡装眮にお具䜓化する構成ずしおも良い。䟋えば、衚瀺制埡装眮により前蚘䞡制埡手段を実珟しおも良い。   (F) The display control means and the concealing member control means may be embodied by the same control device. For example, both the control means may be realized by the display control device 214.

衚瀺画面の䞻衚瀺領域においお有効ラむン䞊に所定数分の第図柄を衚瀺するこずに加え、圓該䞻衚瀺領域の境界郚にこれずは別に第図柄の䞀郚を芖認可胜に衚瀺する構成ずしおも良い。この堎合、䞻衚瀺領域から倖れた第図柄の䞀郚が芋えおいるだけに、この倖れ図柄ず組み合わせるこずでもう少しでリヌチであったのに、ずの印象を遊技者に持たせるこずができ、この状態からリヌチ衚瀺に移行させるこずで、より䞀局遊技者の興趣を高めるこずができる。   (G) In addition to displaying a predetermined number of first symbols on the active line in the main display region Rm of the display screen G, a part of the first symbol is separately displayed at the boundary of the main display region Rm. It is good also as a structure displayed so that visual recognition is possible. In this case, only a part of the first symbol deviating from the main display area Rm can be seen, so that it is possible to give the player the impression that it was a little more reach by combining with this deviating symbol. Yes, by shifting from this state to reach display, the player's interest can be further enhanced.

前蚘図及び図で説明したパタヌンのリヌチパタヌンでは、リヌチラむンを䞋方にスラむドさせお有効ラむンず察応する䜍眮に来るよう構成したが、リヌチラむンをスラむドさせない構成ずしおもよい。かかる構成においおは、前蚘図に瀺すように、右扉及び巊扉を開いおリヌチラむンが発生した際、そのたたの状態でリヌチ挔出が実斜される。この堎合、リヌチラむンは本来の有効ラむン〜ず異なるため、有効ラむンが新たに远加されるよう衚瀺制埡が行われるず良い。   (H) In the reach pattern of the pattern 5 described with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55, the reach lines Ld1 and Ld2 are slid downward to come to positions corresponding to the effective lines L4 and L5. It is good also as a structure which does not slide Ld2. In this configuration, as shown in FIG. 54 (c), when the right door 171 and the left door 172 are opened and the reach lines Ld1 and Ld2 are generated, the reach effect is performed as it is. In this case, since the reach lines Ld1 and Ld2 are different from the original effective lines L1 to L5, display control may be performed so that new effective lines are added.

前蚘図及び図で説明したパタヌンのリヌチパタヌンでは、右扉及び巊扉が開攟された時、その背埌から、双方ずも新たなリヌチラむンを構成する䞻図柄が珟れる構成ずしたが、この構成には限定されない。䟋えば、図においお、右扉及び巊扉が開攟された時、その背埌から巊図柄ずしお「」図柄が、右図柄ずしおも「」図柄が珟れる構成ずする䜆し、右図柄は「」図柄以倖であれば任意。かかる堎合、リヌチラむンは成立するものの、リヌチラむンは成立しない。こうした衚瀺制埡にあっおも、右扉及び巊扉の開攟に䌎いリヌチラむンが増えるこずには倉わりなく、遊技者の興趣は高められる。なお、右扉及び巊扉の開攟に䌎い片方でのみリヌチラむンが増えるのではあれば、リヌチラむンが増えない方の扉䜓前䟋で蚀えば右扉は開攟しない構成ずするこずも可胜である。   (I) In the reach pattern of the pattern 6 described in FIG. 56 and FIG. 57, when the right door 171 and the left door 172 are opened, the main symbols constituting a new reach line appear from both behind the right door 171 and the left door 172. However, it is not limited to this configuration. For example, in FIG. 56 (c), when the right door 171 and the left door 172 are opened, the "7" symbol appears as the left symbol and the "7" symbol appears as the right symbol from behind (however, The right symbol is optional unless the symbol is “6”. In this case, the reach line Le4 is established, but the reach line Le3 is not established. Even in such display control, the reach line is increased as the right door 171 and the left door 172 are opened, and the interest of the player is enhanced. If the reach line increases only on one side with the opening of the right door 171 and the left door 172, the door body (the right door 171 in the previous example) on which the reach line does not increase is not opened. Is also possible.

䞊蚘実斜の圢態では、パタヌンのリヌチパタヌンにおいお、有効ラむンを圓初のラむンからラむン分増やすこずが可胜な構成ずしたが、より倚くの有効ラむンを増蚭する構成ずしおも良い。珟実には、前蚘図に瀺すように、衚瀺画面䞊においお、右扉及び巊扉の開攟に䌎い巊右の図柄列に瞊段ず぀の第図柄が衚瀺される構成にあっおは、最倧ラむン分を増やすこずができ、有効ラむンを蚈ラむンずするこずも可胜ずなる。   (J) In the above embodiment, in the reach pattern of pattern 6, the number of effective lines can be increased by 3 lines from the initial 5 lines. However, a structure in which more effective lines are added may be used. Actually, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), on the display screen G, as the right door 171 and the left door 172 are opened, the first symbol is displayed in five vertical columns in the left and right symbol rows. In this case, a maximum of 6 lines can be increased, and the total number of effective lines can be 11 lines.

衚瀺画面においお䞻衚瀺領域ず副衚瀺領域ずを領域区分しない構成ずしおも良い。かかる堎合、䟋えば前蚘の劂く衚瀺画面䞊に有効ラむンが予めラむン蚭定されおいる構成においお、各有効ラむンのうち少なくずもラむンを右扉及び巊扉により䞀郚隠し、他のラむンを垞時芖認できるようにしおおく。そしお、所定の条件に応じお、芖認可胜な有効ラむン数を増加させる構成ずする。䟋えば、衚瀺画面においお䞊䞋段に第図柄を衚瀺する構成にあっお、䞊段分を右扉及び巊扉により隠しおおけば、通垞は有効ラむンがラむン芖認でき、右扉及び巊扉を開攟するこずで有効ラむンがラむン芖認できるように倉化させるこずが可胜ずなる。   (K) The display screen G may be configured such that the main display area Rm and the sub display area Rs are not divided into areas. In such a case, for example, in the configuration in which five effective lines are set in advance on the display screen G as described above, at least one of the effective lines is partially hidden by the right door 171 and the left door 172, and the other lines are hidden. Keep it visible at all times. And it is set as the structure which increases the number of visible effective lines according to predetermined conditions. For example, in the configuration in which the first symbol is displayed in the upper and lower three stages on the display screen G and the upper one stage is hidden by the right door 171 and the left door 172, normally two effective lines can be visually recognized. By opening the door 171 and the left door 172, it is possible to change so that five effective lines can be visually recognized.

䞊蚘実斜の圢態では、衚瀺画面䞊に巊右䞀察の扉䜓を蚭けたパチンコ機に぀いお各皮のリヌチパタヌンを説明したが、扉䜓を持たないパチンコ機に前蚘各リヌチパタヌンを適甚するこずも可胜である。䟋えば、パタヌンのリヌチパタヌンの堎合、前蚘同様、衚瀺画面䞊に䞻衚瀺領域ず副衚瀺領域ずを蚭けおおき、本来は有効ラむンではないが䟋倖的に、副衚瀺領域に衚瀺された第図柄を甚いおリヌチラむンを発生させる構成ずする。このずき、その衚瀺態様のたたリヌチ衚瀺ずしおも良いし、前蚘リヌチラむンを䞻衚瀺領域内にスラむドさせおも良い。たた、パタヌンのリヌチパタヌンの堎合には、副衚瀺領域に配列に反する第図柄を衚瀺し、その衚瀺した第図柄を甚いおリヌチラむンを付加的に発生させる構成ずする。   (L) In the above-described embodiment, various reach patterns have been described for the pachinko machine 10 provided with the pair of left and right door bodies 171 and 172 on the display screen G. However, the pachinko machine without the door bodies 171 and 172 has been described above. It is also possible to apply each reach pattern. For example, in the case of the reach pattern of pattern 5, a main display area Rm and a sub display area Rs are provided on the display screen G as described above, and they are not originally effective lines but are exceptionally displayed in the sub display area Rs. It is set as the structure which generates a reach line using the made 1st symbol. At this time, the reach display may be used as it is, or the reach line may be slid into the main display area Rm. Further, in the case of the reach pattern of pattern 6, the first design contrary to the arrangement is displayed in the sub-display area Rs, and a reach line is additionally generated using the displayed first design.

䞊蚘実斜の圢態では、パタヌンのリヌチパタヌンで説明したように、぀の有効ラむン䞊にお倧圓たりの組み合わせが発生した堎合、高確率図柄の組み合わせを有効な倧圓たりの組み合わせずしお採甚するよう構成したが、倧圓たり状態終了埌にどちらの組み合わせが有効であったかを報知する構成ずしおもよい。この堎合、倧圓たり状態が終了するたで遊技者のどきどき感が継続するため、遊技の興趣を高めるこずが可胜ずなる。   (M) In the above embodiment, as described in the reach pattern of pattern 6, when a jackpot combination occurs on two effective lines, a combination of high probability symbols is adopted as an effective jackpot combination. Although comprised, it is good also as a structure which alert | reports which combination was effective after the jackpot state end. In this case, the player's thrilling feeling continues until the jackpot state ends, so that it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

䞊蚘実斜の圢態では、各図柄列〜の図柄が通垞倉動した埌、巊図柄及び右図柄の倉動衚瀺が䞀旊停止し、そこから各皮リヌチパタヌンぞず移行する構成ずしたが、䟋えば、パタヌンのリヌチパタヌン終了埌にパタヌンのリヌチパタヌンぞ、さらにはその埌パタヌンのリヌチパタヌンぞず進行しおいく構成ずしおもよい。かかる構成においおは、スヌパヌリヌチず図柄衚瀺領域の圢状が連続的に倉化しおいくため、遊技の興趣を高めるこずが可胜である。   (N) In the above embodiment, after the symbols of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 normally fluctuate, the left and right symbols fluctuate display once and then shift to various reach patterns. For example, after reaching the reach pattern of pattern 2, it may be configured to proceed to the reach pattern of pattern 3 and then to the reach pattern of pattern 4. In such a configuration, the shape of the super reach and the symbol display area is continuously changed, so that it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

䞊蚘実斜の圢態では、第図柄衚瀺装眮の衚瀺画面においお第図柄が瞊方向に倉動衚瀺されるよう構成したが、暪方向に倉動衚瀺されるよう構成しおも、同様の効果が埗られるこずは蚀うたでもない。たた、぀の有効ラむンを有するパチンコ機に限らず、぀以倖䟋えば぀や぀の有効ラむンを有するパチンコ機に適甚しおもよく、第図柄の倉動方向ず有効ラむン数の組み合わせは任意である。たた、衚瀺画面においお、列の図柄列を蚭けるこずにも限定はされるこずはなく、列、列又は列以䞊の図柄列を蚭ける構成であっおも良い。   (O) In the above-described embodiment, the first symbol is variably displayed in the vertical direction on the display screen G of the first symbol display device 41. It goes without saying that the effect of can be obtained. In addition to pachinko machines having five effective lines, the present invention may be applied to pachinko machines having five (for example, two or three) effective lines. Is optional. In addition, the display screen G is not limited to providing three symbol rows, and may be configured to provide one, two, or four or more symbol rows.

䞊蚘実斜の圢態では、前扉枠に前埌䞀察のガラスを取り付けたが、所定の透明性を有しおいれば、いかなる材質のものを採甚しおもよい。䟋えば、「ガラス」に代えお「暹脂板」を採甚しおもよい。   (P) In the above embodiment, the pair of front and rear glasses 137 are attached to the front door frame 13, but any material may be adopted as long as it has predetermined transparency. For example, “resin plate” may be employed instead of “glass”.

䞊蚘実斜の圢態では、埓来に比べお遊技領域が比范的倧きいパチンコ機に぀いお説明したが、これに限らず、埓来のような遊技領域や窓郚等を有するパチンコ機等の遊技機にも適甚できる。たた、䞊蚘実斜の圢態ずは異なる他のタむプの匟球遊技機、䟋えば他の圹物を備えたパチンコ機、アレンゞボヌル機、雀球等の遊技機にも適甚できる。その他、スロットマシン等の回胎匏遊技機や、パチンコ球等の遊技球を遊技媒䜓ずしお䜿甚する球䜿甚ベルト匏遊技機にも適甚できる。   (Q) In the above embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 having a relatively large game area as compared with the conventional game machine has been described. It can also be applied to. Further, the invention can be applied to other types of ball game machines different from the above-described embodiment, for example, game machines such as a pachinko machine, an arrange ball machine, and a sparrow ball provided with other objects. In addition, it can also be applied to a swivel type gaming machine such as a slot machine, and a ball-type belt type gaming machine that uses a gaming ball such as a pachinko ball as a gaming medium.

䞀実斜の圢態におけるパチンコ機を瀺す正面図である。It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in one embodiment. パチンコ機の䞻芁な構成を展開又は分解しお瀺す斜芖図である。It is a perspective view which expands or shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. パチンコ機を構成する本䜓枠の前面構成を瀺す正面図である。It is a front view which shows the front structure of the main body frame which comprises a pachinko machine. 遊技盀の構成を瀺す正面図である。It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. 可倉衚瀺ナニットの構成を瀺す正面図及び背面図である。It is the front view and back view which show the structure of a variable display unit. 扉䜓の駆動機構を瀺す構成図である。It is a block diagram which shows the drive mechanism of a door body. 扉䜓の䜜動状態を説明するための説明図である。It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the operating state of a door body. 前扉枠の構成を瀺す背面図である。It is a rear view which shows the structure of a front door frame. パチンコ機の構成を瀺す背面図である。It is a rear view which shows the structure of a pachinko machine. パチンコ機の背面構成を䞻芁郚品毎に分解しお瀺す分解斜芖図である。It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the back surface structure of a pachinko machine for every main part. パチンコ機裏面における第制埡基板ナニット、第制埡基板ナニット及び裏パックナニットの配眮を瀺す暡匏図である。It is a schematic diagram which shows arrangement | positioning of the 1st control board unit in the back surface of a pachinko machine, a 2nd control board unit, and a back pack unit. 本䜓枠及び遊技盀の構成を瀺す背面図である。It is a rear view which shows the structure of a main body frame and a game board. 本䜓枠の背面構成を瀺す斜芖図である。It is a perspective view which shows the back surface structure of a main body frame. 遊技盀の背面構成を瀺す斜芖図である。It is a perspective view which shows the back surface structure of a game board. 軞受け金具の構成を瀺す斜芖図である。It is a perspective view which shows the structure of a bearing metal fitting. 第制埡基板ナニットの構成を瀺す正面図である。It is a front view which shows the structure of a 1st control board unit. 第制埡基板ナニットの構成を瀺す斜芖図である。It is a perspective view which shows the structure of a 1st control board unit. 第制埡基板ナニットの分解斜芖図である。It is a disassembled perspective view of a 1st control board unit. 第制埡基板ナニットの背面構成を瀺す分解斜芖図である。It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the back surface structure of a 1st control board unit. 第制埡基板ナニットの構成を瀺す正面図である。It is a front view which shows the structure of a 2nd control board unit. 第制埡基板ナニットの構成を瀺す斜芖図である。It is a perspective view which shows the structure of a 2nd control board unit. 第制埡基板ナニットの分解斜芖図である。It is a disassembled perspective view of a 2nd control board unit. 裏パックナニットの構成を瀺す正面図である。It is a front view which shows the structure of a back pack unit. 裏パックナニットの分解斜芖図である。It is a disassembled perspective view of a back pack unit. タンクレヌルの分解斜芖図である。It is a disassembled perspective view of a tank rail. パチンコ機の電気的構成を瀺すブロック図である。It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. 衚瀺制埡装眮の衚瀺制埡にかかる構成を瀺すブロック図である。It is a block diagram which shows the structure concerning display control of a display control apparatus. 第図柄を個々に瀺す図面である。It is drawing which shows a 1st design individually. 第図柄衚瀺装眮の衚瀺画面を瀺す図面である。It is drawing which shows the display screen of a 1st symbol display apparatus. 遊技制埡に甚いる各皮カりンタの抂芁を瀺す説明図である。It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of the various counters used for game control. 䞻制埡装眮によるメむン凊理を瀺すフロヌチャヌトである。It is a flowchart which shows the main process by the main controller. 通垞凊理を瀺すフロヌチャヌトである。It is a flowchart which shows a normal process. 倖れ図柄カりンタの曎新凊理を瀺すフロヌチャヌトである。It is a flowchart which shows the update process of an off symbol counter. 第図柄倉動凊理を瀺すフロヌチャヌトである。It is a flowchart which shows a 1st symbol fluctuation | variation process. 倉動開始凊理を瀺すフロヌチャヌトである。It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation start process. タむマ割蟌み凊理を瀺すフロヌチャヌトである。It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. 始動入賞凊理を瀺すフロヌチャヌトである。It is a flowchart which shows a start winning process. 割蟌み凊理を瀺すフロヌチャヌトである。It is a flowchart which shows a NMI interruption process. 払出制埡装眮によるメむン凊理を瀺すフロヌチャヌトである。It is a flowchart which shows the main process by the payout control apparatus. 払出制埡凊理を瀺すフロヌチャヌトである。It is a flowchart which shows payout control processing. 賞球制埡凊理を瀺すフロヌチャヌトである。It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball control process. 貞球制埡凊理を瀺すフロヌチャヌトである。It is a flowchart which shows a ball rental control process. 衚瀺制埡凊理を瀺すフロヌチャヌトである。It is a flowchart which shows a display control process. 衚瀺制埡装眮に蚘憶される内郚コマンドの抂略図である。It is the schematic of the internal command memorize | stored in a display control apparatus. リヌチパタヌンの衚瀺䟋を瀺す図である。It is a figure which shows the example of a display of a reach pattern. リヌチパタヌンの衚瀺䟋を瀺す図である。It is a figure which shows the example of a display of a reach pattern. リヌチパタヌンの衚瀺䟋を瀺す図である。It is a figure which shows the example of a display of a reach pattern. リヌチパタヌンの衚瀺䟋を瀺す図である。It is a figure which shows the example of a display of a reach pattern. リヌチパタヌンの衚瀺䟋を瀺す図である。It is a figure which shows the example of a display of a reach pattern. リヌチパタヌンの衚瀺䟋を瀺す図である。It is a figure which shows the example of a display of a reach pattern. リヌチパタヌンの䞀連の衚瀺態様を瀺す図である。It is a figure which shows a series of display aspects of a reach pattern. リヌチパタヌンの䞀連の衚瀺態様を瀺す図である。It is a figure which shows a series of display aspects of a reach pattern. リヌチパタヌンの䞀連の衚瀺態様を瀺す図である。It is a figure which shows a series of display aspects of a reach pattern. リヌチパタヌンの䞀連の衚瀺態様を瀺す図である。It is a figure which shows a series of display aspects of a reach pattern. リヌチパタヌンの䞀連の衚瀺態様を瀺す図である。It is a figure which shows a series of display aspects of a reach pattern. リヌチパタヌンの䞀連の衚瀺態様を瀺す図である。It is a figure which shows a series of display aspects of a reach pattern. リヌチパタヌンの䞀連の衚瀺態様を瀺す図である。It is a figure which shows a series of display aspects of a reach pattern. 第図柄衚瀺装眮の衚瀺画面を瀺す図面である。It is drawing which shows the display screen of a 1st symbol display apparatus. リヌチパタヌンの衚瀺䟋を瀺す図である。It is a figure which shows the example of a display of a reach pattern. リヌチパタヌンの衚瀺䟋を瀺す図である。It is a figure which shows the example of a display of a reach pattern. 予告挔出の衚瀺䟋を瀺す図である。It is a figure which shows the example of a display of a notice effect. 隠蔜郚材の倉圢䟋を瀺す図面である。It is drawing which shows the modification of a concealment member.

 遊技機ずしおのパチンコ機、 倖枠、 本䜓枠、 前扉枠、 遊技盀、 可倉衚瀺ナニット、 切欠、 第図柄衚瀺装眮、 レヌルナニット、 シリンダ錠、 窓郚、 右扉、 軞郚、 巊扉、〜 隠蔜郚材、 切欠郚、 第制埡基板ナニット、 第制埡基板ナニット、 裏パックナニット、 衚瀺制埡装眮、 連動杆、 䞻制埡装眮、 音声ランプ制埡装眮、 衚瀺画面、〜 有効ラむン、 䞻衚瀺領域、 副衚瀺領域、〜 図柄列。   DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine as a gaming machine, 11 ... Outer frame, 12 ... Main body frame, 13 ... Front door frame, 30 ... Game board, 35 ... Variable display unit, 38 ... Notch, 41 ... First symbol display device, 50 ... Rail unit, 91 ... cylinder lock, 101 ... window, 171 ... right door, 171a ... shaft, 172 ... left door, 195-198 ... concealing member, 198a ... notch, 201 ... first control board unit, 202 ... 2nd control board unit, 203 ... back pack unit, 214 ... display control device, 248 ... interlocking rod, 271 ... main control device, 272 ... audio lamp control device, G ... display screen, L1-L5 ... effective line, Rm ... Main display area, Rs ... sub-display area, Z1-Z3 ... design row.

Claims (3)

遊技の進行を統括管理する䞻制埡手段ず、  A main control means for comprehensively managing the progress of the game;
衚瀺画面に絵柄が倉動衚瀺される絵柄衚瀺手段ず、  A pattern display means for displaying the pattern in a variable manner on the display screen;
前蚘絵柄衚瀺手段の衚瀺画面における絵柄の衚瀺態様を制埡する衚瀺制埡手段ず、  Display control means for controlling the display mode of the picture on the display screen of the picture display means;
前蚘衚瀺画面の前面偎に配眮され、動䜜可胜に蚭けられる可動郚材ず、  A movable member disposed on the front side of the display screen and provided to be operable;
前蚘可動郚材の動䜜を制埡する可動制埡手段ず、  Movable control means for controlling the operation of the movable member;
を備えた遊技機であっお、A gaming machine equipped with
前蚘衚瀺制埡手段及び前蚘可動制埡手段を、前蚘䞻制埡手段に盎列に接続される構成ずする䞀方、前蚘衚瀺制埡手段及び前蚘可動制埡手段に察しお各々独立しお電力䟛絊手段から電力が䟛絊される構成ずし、  The display control unit and the movable control unit are connected in series to the main control unit, while power is supplied from the power supply unit to the display control unit and the movable control unit independently. And
前蚘衚瀺制埡手段は、前蚘可動郚材の動䜜に察応させお前蚘絵柄衚瀺手段における衚瀺画面の衚瀺態様を制埡するものであり、  The display control means controls the display mode of the display screen in the picture display means in correspondence with the operation of the movable member,
前蚘可動郚材は、圓該可動郚材の䞋端を䞊昇させる回動動䜜が可胜な軞郚を有し、  The movable member has a shaft portion capable of rotating to raise the lower end of the movable member,
前蚘可動制埡手段は、前蚘可動郚材の䞋端を䞊昇させる制埡を実行可胜であるこずを特城ずする遊技機。  The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the movable control means is capable of executing control to raise a lower end of the movable member.
請求項に蚘茉の遊技機においお、  In the gaming machine according to claim 1,
前蚘衚瀺制埡手段は、前蚘可動郚材の䞋端が䞊昇される堎合に、前蚘絵柄衚瀺手段の衚瀺画面においお圓たり絵柄を配列可胜ずする有効ラむンの数をその動䜜の前よりも増加させるこずを特城ずする遊技機。  The display control means is characterized in that when the lower end of the movable member is raised, the number of effective lines on the display screen of the picture display means for enabling the arrangement of hit pictures is increased from that before the operation. To play.
請求項又はに蚘茉の遊技機においお、  In the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2,
前蚘電力䟛絊手段ず、前蚘衚瀺制埡手段及び前蚘可動制埡手段ずの間には、前蚘電力䟛絊手段からの電力が前蚘衚瀺制埡手段及び前蚘可動制埡手段に察しお各々独立しお䟛絊されるようにする独立䟛絊手段が蚭けられおいるこずを特城ずする遊技機。  Between the power supply means and the display control means and the movable control means, power from the power supply means is supplied independently to the display control means and the movable control means. An independent supply means is provided.
JP2003304357A 2003-08-28 2003-08-28 Game machine Expired - Fee Related JP4461742B2 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2003304357A JP4461742B2 (en) 2003-08-28 2003-08-28 Game machine

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2003304357A JP4461742B2 (en) 2003-08-28 2003-08-28 Game machine

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
JP2009094424A Division JP2009148642A (en) 2009-04-08 2009-04-08 Game machine

Publications (3)

Publication Number Publication Date
JP2005073732A JP2005073732A (en) 2005-03-24
JP2005073732A5 true JP2005073732A5 (en) 2009-05-21
JP4461742B2 JP4461742B2 (en) 2010-05-12

Family

ID=34408072

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
JP2003304357A Expired - Fee Related JP4461742B2 (en) 2003-08-28 2003-08-28 Game machine

Country Status (1)

Country Link
JP (1) JP4461742B2 (en)

Families Citing this family (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP6405678B2 (en) * 2014-04-17 2018-10-17 株匏䌚瀟䞉掋物産 Game machine
JP6662426B2 (en) * 2018-09-18 2020-03-11 株匏䌚瀟䞉掋物産 Gaming machine
JP7067642B2 (en) * 2021-01-14 2022-05-16 株匏䌚瀟䞉掋物産 Pachinko machine

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP4433733B2 (en) Game machine
JP4461743B2 (en) Game machine
JP6493493B2 (en) Game machine
JP4461742B2 (en) Game machine
JP4952852B2 (en) Game machine
JP5282805B2 (en) Game machine
JP4461751B2 (en) Game machine
JP2005073733A5 (en)
JP2005073732A5 (en)
JP4766148B2 (en) Game machine
JP6406421B2 (en) Game machine
JP5817765B2 (en) Game machine
JP4461752B2 (en) Game machine
JP4766147B2 (en) Game machine
JP4952851B2 (en) Game machine
JP5282804B2 (en) Game machine
JP5842845B2 (en) Game machine
JP2005066243A (en) Game machine
JP2005095276A5 (en)
JP2009148642A (en) Game machine
JP2011194260A (en) Game machine
JP2005095277A5 (en)
JP2013075240A (en) Game machine
JP2009148641A (en) Game machine
JP2011194259A (en) Game machine